CORNELL UNIVERSITY LIBRARY 27116 .L94™^" ""'™™">' "-'""^ olin 3 1924 029 621 293 Cornell University Library The original of tiiis book is in tine Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://archive.org/details/cu31924029621293 TRUBNEKS BIBLIOTHECA GLOTTICA. THE LITERATURE AMERICAN ABORIGINAL LANGUAGES. ^ HERMANN ErLUDEWIG. WITH ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS^ BY PEOFESSOE WM. W.^TUENEE. EDITED BY NICOLAS TRUBNER. LONDON: TRUBNER AND CO., 60, PATERNOSTER ROW MDCCCITIII. @ i UNIVERSITY! \ LIBRARY ■ LOKDOn: HOMAS HARBllD, PBIKTHB, 11, SAIISBUBV BQtJARB, FLSET 8TKEBT. PREFACE. A NEW edition of Vater's " Linguarum totius orbis iadex," after Professor Jiilg's revision of 1847, Tequires no apology. The science of Philology has made great progress within the last few years. Exotic languages are no longer considered as ID ere matters of cm'iosity, but are looked upon as interesting parts of the natural history of man, and as such receive their share of the brilliant light which modern critical studies have shed upon the natural sciences in general. Ethnologists now understand how to appreciate the high importance of language as one of the most interesting links of the great chain of national affinities ; and the reciprocity exist- ing between man, the soil he lives upon, and the language he speaks, will become better understood the more our knowledge of these interesting topics is extended. Comparative philology has begun to be established upon solid scientific foundations ; and the recent endeavours to establish finally a uniform system of linguistic orthography will, when generally received, give a new and important impetus to that study, which must lead to most interesting results. In such a state of progress, new literary guides are constantly required; and one of them, embracing the, aboriginal languages of our great western continent, is hereby offered to those who take an interest in American linguistics. VI PREFACE. From the discovery of our continent, the languages of the American Indians have always been, as they are still, an object of high interest to missionary labour; and wherever the atten- tion of the scientific world has been drawn to them, it was by the results of the exertions of these men, who, inspired by religious ardour, went out to teach the heathens, and, in their zeal for Christianity, soon learned to master the diversity of tongues. It was, however, and is still, difficult to obtain access to these results; the greater part of Indian grammars and vocabularies existing either in manuscript only, or, when printed, having been confined to the use of a particular nation, country, or religious society. Thus it happened that the Jesuit, Lorenzo Hervas, who zealously collected such grammars and vocabu- laries for the linguistic part of his " Idea del universo," could give notice of fifty-five American languages which were before unknown to learned philologists, or at least unnoticed by them. After Hervas and Gilii, whose discoveries were diligently revised and republished in Adelung's and Vater's Mithridates, Dr. Benjamin Smith Barton, of Philadelphia, drew the attention of the scientific world to the languages of our Indians. The historical societies of Massachusetts and Rhode Island, and the American Philosophical Society of Philadelphia, published, or republished, the scarce works of Eliot, Cotton, Roger Williams, Edwards, and Zeisberger ; and the last-named Society com- mitted to Stephen Duponceau the task of subjecting the Ameri- can Indian languages to critical inquiries and studies. John Pickering, Henry R. Schoolcraft, and, above all, the venerable Albert Gallatin, continued these researches; and to Gallatin we are indebted for a better classification and a comparative view of the languages of the northern half of our continent and of Mexico. By the exertions of these gentlemen the science of Indian philology has been actively promoted; and many officers of our PREFACE. VU army and navy have paid attention to the languages of the aborigines visited by them in their official explorations. In this way the materials for a more exact knowledge of the American Indian languages have been greatly increased ; and a new inventory of our riches is undoubtedly wanted. This want is the more felt, because nearly all the Indian grammars and vocabularies are exceedingly scarce ; and the greater part of these materials is dispersed in books of voyages and travels, historical and geographical collections, documents, and reports, which are generally found only in public libraries. How far it was possible to supply the want in this country, where bibliographical researches are much more troublesome and difficult than anywhere else, the following pages will show. The interest felt in this country in collecting and publishing notices concerning the languages of the aborigines of our con- tinent is naturally greater than elsewhere ; and the earlier, therefore, these notices are published, the sooner we may expect that those who are better acquainted with the subject will submit them to critical examination, and supply the deficiencies which they undoubtedly contain. This made the offer for the publication of the following bibliographical repertory, by their active and enterprising pub- lisher, a welcome one. More welcome and, for the friends of science, really gratifying must be the care bestowed by Mr. Triibner upon this publication. With true love for the subject, and with a scientific zeal not to be surpassed, he has revised the manuscript, and supplied it with whatever his own know- ledge furnished, aided by the ample means which London, and Europe in general, offer to bibliographical researches, and made many valuable additions which could not have been collected on this side of the Atlantic. He has been a true co-operator in the work now offered to the public. Business, in our great commercial emporium of the new world, leaves to the professional man but very little time for minute literary researches ; and our larger libraries being open via PREFACE. to the public only during business hoursj "but one of them could be consulted while correcting the notices collected in the course of several years. The friendly aid which the officers of the Astor Library and of the American Bible Society lent for this purpose is thank- fully acknowledged. HERMANN E. LUDEWIG. New York, December, 1855. CONTENTS. PAGE THE AUTHOE'S PEEPACE - . v THE EDITOE'S ADVEETISEMENT ix BIOGEAPHICAL MEMOIE . . xiii INTEODUCTOET BIBLIOGEAPHICAL NOTICES . xv THE LITEEATIJEE OP AMEEICAN ABOEIGINAL LANGUAGES .1 ADDENDA . . . . . 210 INDEX . 247 LIST OP EEEATA . 207 THE EDlTUirS ADYERTISEMKNT. Dr. Ludewig has himself so fully detailed the' plan and purport of this work, that little more remains for me to add beyond the mere statement of the origin of my connection with the publi- cation, and the mention of such additions for which I alone am responsible, and which, during its progress through the press, have gradually accumulated to about one-sixth of the whole. This is but an act of justice to the memory of Dr. Ludewig ; because, at the time of his death, in December, 1856, no more than 172 pages were printed oif, and these constitute the only portion of the work which had the benefit of his valuable per- sonal and final revision. Similarity of pursuits led, during my stay in New York -in 1855, to an intimacy with Dr. Ludewig, during which he men- tioned that he, like myself, had been making bibliographical memoranda for years of all books which serve to illustrate the history of spoken language. As a first section of a more ex- tended work on the Literary History of Language generally, he had prepared a bibliographical memoir of the remains of the aboriginal languages of America. The manuscript had been deposited by him in the library of the Ethnological So(jiety at New York, but at my request he at once most kindly placed it at my disposal, stipulating only that it should be printed in Europe, under my personal superintendence. Upon my return to England, I lost no time in carrying out the trust thus confided to me, intending then to confine myself simply to producing a correct copy of my friend^s manuscript. But it soon became obvious that the transcript had been hastily made, and but for the valuable assistance of literary friends, h X THE editor's ADVERTISEMENT. both in this country and in America, the work would probably have been abandoned. My thanks are more particularly due to Mr. E. G. Squier, and to Professor Wm. W. Turner, of Wash- ington, by whose considerate and valuable co-operation many difficulties were cleared away, and my editorial labours greatly lightened. This encouraged me to spare neither personal labour nor expense in the attempt to render the work as perfect as possible. With what success must be left to the judgment of those who can fairly appreciate the labours of a pioneer in any new field of literary research. De Souza's great and valuable bibliographical workj of which there is no copy in the library of the British Museum, has been carefully and sedulously consulted by Mr. Squier, who culled from it for my use all that bears upon the subject of American- Indian languages. Mr. Turner's additions Avill be found in the second portion of the volume ; for so valuable did his corrections and suggestions appear to me, that I determined to throw them, with' some remarks of my own, into a second alphabetical arrangement, similar to that of 'the first. His additions are easily distinguished from those the responsibility of which rests with myself, by being enclosed within brackets, with the initials W. W. T. It would here be out of place to do more than notice the value of the contribu- tions of so eminent a philologist, who is pre-eminently distin- guished at Washington as the highest authority in all matters appertaining to the knowledge of the languages of the aborigines of America. To this double alphabet a very full Index has been added, and this was the more necessary, because, as in the in- fancy of aU science there will be difficulties, in this there is no little confusion of names, which could only be reconciled by proper references in the Index. In opening a field hitherto almost untrodden, I may reasonably claim the reader's in- dulgence for such defects as must ever attend a first attempt of similar character. In all such cases facts have to be brought together, and seeming contradictions to be reconciled. Then as in aU branches of human knowledge, with such data to build THE EDITOR S ADVERTISEMENT. upon, in the hands of master-minds, a key may be discovered to the maze which^ however imperfectly, is here placed before the reader, and for which the merit of careful and pains- taking industry may fairly be claimed. The defects alluded to arise in a great measure from the diversity of spelling- adopted by the different nations of Europe to -represent the same sounds ; for the reader must bear in mind that the aborigiaes of America had no written alphabetical language, and that it was by Europeans that the spoken words of the various Indian tribes were first represented by distinct cha- racters. ^ This renders what I may perhaps be pardoned for calling a linguistic geography of America almost necessary, in which, as the same tribe is not unfrequently called by different names, the localities in which each of the many Red Indian tribes formerly dwelt should be noted with the utmost precision, A map constructed on this principle would enable the reader at one view to reconcile many apparent discrepancies, and to ascertain the affinity between each language, many of which are evidently mere dialects of one original tongue. As far as it was possible, the Index has been rendered complete, so that the reader will have little trouble in tracing any language he may be in search of. Should he find references to more than he is in quest of, he must consider it an error on the safe side, and attribute it entirely to similarity of sound and the difficulty of obtaining better materials. As " Old Mortality" cleaned the inscriptions on the Cove- nanters' tombs, so did Dr. Ludewig endeavour to rub off the rust of ages from the scattered remains of the aborigines of America. Had it not been a labour of love like his, it would not have been attempted. Unimportant as such labours may seem to men engaged in the more bustling occupa- tions of life, all must at least acknowledge that these records of the past, like the stern-lights of a departing ship, are the last glimmers of savage life, as it becomes absorbed, or recedes be- fore the tide of civilization. I may here be permitted to give the titles of a few other xii THE editok's advertisement. books appertaining to the subject, which did not come to hand till the whole of the sheets of the manual had been worked off :— Histoire des Nations Civilisees du Mexique et de I'Amerique Septeatrionale, par I'Abbe Brasseub de Boukboubg. Vol. I. Paris, 1857, 8vo.— Which, at pp. 44—73, contains a memoir on Mexican, writing, the materials of which were, for the most part, supplied by M. Aubin. In the third chapter, at page 62, are also some observations on the languages of Central America. Vocabulaire Francais-Creole, et des Conversations Pran9aises- Creoles, London, 1818, 8vo, pp. 113.— Which is siniply a re- print of Ducceur-Joly's Vocabulary. In Schoolcraft's History, Condition, and Prospects of the Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. V., p. 689, Appendix No. 1 7, is a letter on the affinities of dialects in New Mexico, by Governor William Care Lane. By the kindness of Mr. Thomas Wright, I have been favoured with a sight of a manuscript grammar and vocabulary of the Kariff, or Chiirrib language, as spoken in the Bay of Honduras. It is written by Mr. Alexander Henderson, of Belize, Hon- duras, and will probably soon be given to the public under the auspices of the London Ethnological Society. Dr. Thomas Rainy, of New York, is preparing a Dictionary of the Geral Tongue of Para, in the Brazils, accompanied by a memoir; and Dr. Franca, a Brazilian, has a dictionary of the Tupi language in the press at Leipzig. Mr. E. G. Squier will shortly publish a monograph on the aboriginal languages of Central America. In conclusion, following the good and honest example of Aldus Manutius, and the printers of old, I would respectfully suggest to the reader the propriety of correcting with a pen the errata, pointed out in the subjoined list, prior to his consultin"- the work itself. NICOLAS TRUBNER. LoMBON, hih October, 1857. BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIE. Hermann Ed. Ludewig^ though but little known in this country^ was held in considerable esteem as a jurist^ both in Germany and the United States of America. Born at Dresden in 1809, with but little exception he continued to reside in his native city until 1844, when he emigrated to America ; but though in both countries he practised law as a profession, his bent was the study of literary history, which was evidenced by his " Livre des Ana, Essai de Catalogue Manuel," published at his own cost in 1837, and by his " Bibliothekonomie," which appeared a few years later. But even whilst thus engaged, he delighted in investigating the rise and progress of the land of his subsequent adoption, and his researches into the vexed question of the origin of the peopling of America, gained him the highest consider- ation, on both sides of the Atlantic, as a man of original and inquiring mind. He was a contributor to Naumann's " Serapaettm;" and amongst the chief of his contributions to that journal may be mentioned those on " American Libraries," on the "Aids to American Bibliography," and on the "Book-trade of the United States of America." In 1846 appeared his "Literature of American Local-History," a work of much im- portance, and which required no small amount of labour and perseverance, owing to the necessity of consulting the many and widely-scattered materials, which had to be sought out from apparently the most unlikely channels. These studies formed a natural induction to the present work BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIR. on " The Literature of American Aboriginal Languages," which occupied, his leisure concurrently with the others, and the print- ing of which was commenced in August, 1856, but which he did not live to see launched upon the world j for at the date of his death, on the 12th of December following, only 172 pages were in type. It had been a labour of love with him for years; and if ever author were mindful of the nonum prematur in annum, he was when he deposited his manuscript in the Library of the American Ethnological Society, diffident himself as to its merits and value on a subject of such paramount interest. He had satisfied himself that in due time the reward of his patient industry might be the production of some more extended national work on the subject : and with this he was contented ; for it was a distinguishing feature in his character, notwithstanding his great and varied knowledge and brilliant acquirements, to disregard his own toil, even amounting to drudgery if needful, if he could in any way assist in the pro- mulgation of literature and science. Dr. Ludewig- was a corresponding member of many of the most distinguished European and American literary societies ; and few men were held in greater consideration by scholars both in America and Germany, as will readdy be acknowledged should his voluminous correspondence ever see the light. In private life he was distinguished for the best qualities which endear a man's memory to those who survive him — he was a kind and affectionate husband and a sincere friend. Always accessible, and ever ready to aid and counsel those who applied to him for advice upon matters appertaining to literature, his loss will long be felt by a most extended circle of friends; and in him Germany mourns one of the best representatives of her learned men in America— a genuine type of a class in which, with singular felicity, to genius of the highest order is combined a painstaking and plodding perseverance, but seldom met with beyond the confines of " the Fatherland." N. T. INTEODUCTOET BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. Epitome de la Biblioteca Oriental, i Occidental, Nautiea i Geogra- fica .... por el Licenciado Ahtonio de Leon, Eelator del Supremo i E,eal Consejo de las Indias. Madrid, Juan Gonzalez, 1629, 4to, pp. 80, 188, sii. The well-known Spanish historian, Don Andres Gonzales 15arcia, enlarged this small volume to a folio of about 1172 pages, which he published under the following title : — Epitome de la Biblioteca Oriental, y Occidental, Nautiea y Geogra- fica, de Don Aktonio de Leon Pinelo, del Consejo de S. M. : en la Casa de Contratacion de Sevilla y Ooronista mayor de las Indias. Anadido y enmendado nuevameute. Madrid, Erancisco Martinez Abad, 1737—38. Three parts in 1 vol. fol. Notwithstanding the confusion and prolixity of this wort, the notices it contains are very interesting, and their critical revision would be a useful and meritorious undertaking. The 18th chapter of the Biblioteca Occidental, " Autores que han escrito en Lenguas de las Indias'' (pp. 104 — 110 of the first, col. 719 — 738, and fol. 918 — 920 of the second edition), contains the bibliographical and hterarjt notices concerning American aboriginal languages, and mentions many works on that subject, which undoubtedly exist still in manuscript, but have never Ijeen collected. NicoiiAi Antonio, Bibliotbeea Hispana Vetus, complectens Scrip- tores qui ab Octaviani Augusti Imperio, usque ad annum M, floruerunt, studio efc curis Josepbi Saenz, Cardinalis de Aguirre. BomcB, 1696, 2 vols, in fol. The title contains a gross misprint. The work comprising the authors until the year 1500, it ought to read, " usque ad annvmi MD" (1500), instead of M (1000) . Antonio died without the means for printing this work. They were deirayed by the Cardinal de Aguirre, who entrusted the editorship to Emmanuel Mars, a learned Talentian. The authors are arranged in chrono- logical order; tables are added to faciUtate the use of the work. The Xvi INTRODUCTOEY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. " Bibliotheca Nova," although pubhshed first, is but a sequel of the " Biblio- theca Vetus," of which a reprint likewise has appeared at Madrid, in 1788, under this title : — Bibliotheca Hispana Vetus, sive Hispani Scriptores qui ab Octaviani Augusti Aevo ad annum Christi MD floruerunt. Auctore D. NicoLAO Antonio Hispalensi I.C., Ordinis S. Jacobi equite, patriffi ecclesisB canonico, regiorum negotiorum in urbe at roniana curia procuratore generali, consiliario regie. Curante Trancisco Perezio Bayerio, Valentino, Sereniss. Hisp. Infantum Caroli III. Eegis filiorum institutore primario, Eegise Bibliothecas, Palatino- Matritensis PrEefecto, qui et prologum, et auctoris vitas epitomen, et notulas adjecit. Tomi II, folio. Matriti, Ibarra, 1788. Ejusdem Nicolai Aktonio, Bibliotheca Hispana Nova, seu His- panorum qui sive Latina, aut populari, sive alia quavis lingua scripto ^liquid consignaverunt. BomcB, 1672, 2 vols, in fol. Typis Nicolai Tinassii. Nicolas Antonio was bom in 1617, at Seyilla, studied at Salamanca, and returned to SeviHa, composed his Bibliotheca Hispana in the convent of the Benedictines, where the abbot, Benedict de La Serra, had accumulated a splendid hbrary. When it was sufficiently advanced he toot it to Eome, where he completed and printed it. He died at Madrid, in 1784. Antonio, agreeable to the custom prevalent at that time, arranged the names of the authors according to the alphabetical order of their Christian names. This is u great inconvenience, which is only partially removed by the addition of a number of tables. A new edition was published at Madrid, by Franc. Perez Bayer, a learned Valentian ; the title of which is, Bibliotheca Hispana Nova sive Hispanorum Scriptorum qui ab anno MD ad MDCLXXXIV floruere notitia. Auctore D. NicoiAO Antonio Hispalensi I.C. Ordinis S. Jacobi equite, patriae ecclesisfe canonico, regiorum negotiorum in urhe et romana curia pro- curatore generali, consiliario regio. Nunc primum prodit recognita emendata aucta ab ipso Auctore. Tomi II. Matriti, Ibarra, 1783. The two worts together have long and favom-ably been known as the "Bibliotheca Hispana." It has always been regarded as one of the best works of the kind, and continues to enjoy a great reputation among savants. Eelandi, Hadeiani, Dissertationum Miscellanearum Partes Tres. UUrajecti, 1706-7-8. These Dissertations are thu-teen in number, one of them treating " De Liijguis Americanis.'' De la Liingue Americaine. (Pp. 458 — 490 of Vol. II of P. Lafitbau, Meurs dea Sauvages Americains. Faris, Saugraiu aiue et Ch. Hocherau, 1724, 2 vols. 4to.) INTRODUCTOBY BIBLIOaRAPHICAL NOTICES. Xvil Eev. Dr. Mai,coi,me, Letters, Essays, and other Tracts, illus- trating the Antiquities of Grreat Britain and Ireland ; together with many curious discoveries of the affinities between the language of the Americans and the ancient Britons in the Grreek and Latin, etc. Also, specimens of the Celtic, Welsh, Irish, Saxon, and American languages. JEAinbrngli, 1738, 8vo. Some copies, London, 1744, Svo. Essai sur les Eapports des Mots, entre les Langues du Nouveau Monde et celles de TAncien (pp. 489—560 of Vol. VIII of Monde Primitif analise et compare avec le Monde Moderne, considere dans divers objets concernant I'Histoire, le Blason, les Monnoies, les Jeux, les Voyages des Pheniciens autour du monde, les Langues Ameri- caines, etc., ou Dissertations Melees remplies de Decouvertes in- teressantes ; avec une carte, des planches, et un Monument de 1' Ame- rique. Par M. Cottht de Gbbelin. Paris, 1773 — 1782, 9 vols. 4to. On the Connection of the Indian Languages with the Hebrew. (Arguments V. and VI. pp. 37 — 80 of: James Adaib, The History of tbe American Indians, particularly those nations adjoining to the Mississippi, East and "West Florida, Georgia, South and North Carolina and Virginia, etc. etc. London, Edward and Charles Dilly, 1775, 4to.) D. LoEENZo Heevas, Idea del Universo. Cesena, Gregorio Biasini, 1778—1781, XXI vols. 4to. Vol. XXII, Fioligno, 1792, 4to. The principal interest of this work consists in the hnguistio notices given in the same. They are contained in the following volumes : — Vol. XVII (1784), Catalogo delle Lingue conosciuti e notizia della loro af&nita e diversita. Of this volume, the following enlarged Spanish edition was published by the author : Catalogo de las Lenguas de las naciones conocidas y numeracion, division y clases de estas segun la diversidad de sus idiomas y dialectos. Madrid, Imprenta de la Administracion del real Arbitrio de Beneficencia, 1800 —1805, 6 vols. 4to. Vol. XVIII (1785), Origine, Pormazione, Mecanismo ed Armenia degli Idiomi. Vol. XIX (1786), Aritmetica delle Nazioni. Vol. XX (1787), Vocabulario Poliglotto con Prolegomeni sopra piu di CL Lingue. Vol. XXI (1787), Saggio pratico delle Lingue con Prolegomeni ed una raccolta di orazioni dominicali in piii di trecento lingue e dialetti. Xviii INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRATHICAL NOTICES. Storia Antica del Messico cavata da' migliori storici Spagnuoli, e / da' manoscritti, e dalle pitture antiche degl' Indian! : divisa in dieci / libri, e corredata di carte geografiche, e di varie figure : e dissertazioni sulla terra, sugli animali, e sugli abitatori del Messico. Opera dell' Abate D. rEAircisoo Sateeio Clatigeeo. 4to, 4 vols., plates. Cesena, 1780. Clavigero was bom about the year 1720, at Tera Cruz, in Mexico, and at the age of seventeen entered into the order of the Jesuits. When the order was suppressed, in 1767, he retired to Cesena, like most of the other Jesuits of Spanish America, to whom the Pope had given an asylum, where he under- took this important work, which was received by the learned of Europe with great applause. It contains in the last volume a hst of the authors of gram- mars and dictionaries in the languages of Anahuac. The work was trans- lated into the foUowing languages : — Into English under the following title — CLATiaEEO. The History of Mexico, collected from Spanish and Mexican Historians, from Manuscripts and Ancient Paintings of the Indians, illastrated by Charts and other Copperplates ; to which are added Critical Dissertations on the Land, the Animals, and Inhabitants of Mexico. "By Abbe D. I'ea>'Oisco Sateeio Clatigeeo. Translated from the original Italian by Charles Cullen, Esq., in two volumes, pp. xl and 940, 4to. London, 1789. Into G-erman, from the English translation of Cullen — G-esohichte von Mexico, aus Spanischen und Mexicanischen Greschichtschreibern, Handschriften und G-emalden der Indianer zusammengetragen und durch Karten und Kupferstiche erlautert, nebst einigen kritischen Abhandlurigen iiber die BeschafFenheit des Landes, der Thiere und Einwohner von Mexico. Aus dem Italian- isohen durch den Hitter Karl Cullen ins Englische und aus diesem ins Deutsche iibersetzt, 2 Bde. mit Kupfern und Karten. Leipzig, 1780 —90, Schwickert, Svo. Into Spanish — Clatigeeo. Historia Antigua de Megico : sacada de los mejores historiadores Espaiioles y de los manuscritos y de las pinturas Antiguas de los Indies ; dividida en diez libros ; Adornada con Mapas y Estampas, E illustrada con Dissertaciones sobre la tierra los Animales y los Habitantes de Megico escrita por D. Feancisco Sateeio Clatigeeo ; y traducida del Italiano por Jose Joaquin de Mora. Two vols., pp. xxxvi and 882, Svo. London, 1826. Saggio di Storia Americana o sia storia naturale, civile e sacra de' regni, e delle provihcie spagnuole di terra finna nell' America INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. • SIX meridioaale, descritfca dell' Abate Tileppo Saltaboee Gilii. Boma, Perego, erede Salvioni, 1780 — 178-1, 4 vols. 8vo. Gilii was one of the Jesuits banislied, like all the other members of his order, from America. The third volume of his work, bearing the title, " Delia Beligione e delle Lingue degli Orinochesi e di altri Americani," pubhshed in 1782, contains interesting details and notices concerning Ajnerican Indian Theodoe JAN KiEwiTCH DB MiEiEwo, Sravuitcl niy Slovar, etc. (Comparative vocabulary of all tbe languages aud dialects.) St. Petersburg, 1790 — 1791, 4 vols. 4to, in Russian. Pallas having published, in 1786 and 1789, the first part of the Tocabu- larium Catharinseum (a comparative vocabulary of 286 words in the languages of Europe and Asia), the material contained therein was published in the above edition in another form, and words of American languages added. The book did not come up to the expectations of the Government, and was there- fore- not pubUshed, so that but few copies of it can be found. William M.vesdejst, A Catalogue of Dictionaries, Grammars, and Alphabets, in two parts. I. Alphabetical Catalogue of Authors. II. Chronological Catalogue of Works in each Class of Language. London, 1796, 4to, pp. vi. 156. Privately printed, and very scarce ; contains but Uttle about American languages. See also the Bibbotheoa Marsdeniana. London, Printed by J. L. Cox, 1827, 4to. B. Skith Baeton, New Views of the Origin of the Tribes and Nations of America. FhiladelpJiia, 1797, 8vo. Reprinted (second edition, corrected and enlarged), ibid. Printed for the author by John Bjoren, 1798, 8vo. Pp. oix (preliminary discourse) ; 133 (comparative vocabularies of 70 words) ; 32 (appendix, containing notes and illustrations). Mithridates, oder allgemeine Sprachenkunde rait dem Vater- Unser als Sprachprobe in beiuahe 500 Sprachen und Mandarteu, von JoiiANN Cheistoph Adelung. Vol. I. Berlin, A'oss, 1806, 8vo. Continued (from Adelung's papers) by Dr. Johann Seveein Vatee. Vols. II, III, and IV. Ibid, 1809—1817, 8vo. The second and third parts of the third volume (1813 and 1816) contain the languages of America. A. J. TOB" Keusensteen, Woertersammlungen aus den Sprachen einip-er Voelker des oest lichen Asiens und der Nordwestkueste von Amerika. St. Petersburg, Academie der Wissenschaften, 1813, 4to, pp. xi. 68. XX INTKODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. Jo. Seteein Vateb, Linguarum totius orbis Index Alphabeticus, quarum Grammaticse, Lexica, Colleotiones Vocabularumrecensentur, patria significatur Historia adumbratur. Berlin, Nicolai, ISlo, 8vo, pp. X. 259. Text in German and Latin. Embraces aU the known languages of tlie world, and gives the bibUographical notices contained in the first two volumes, and the first part of volume III of the Mithridates. A new and enlarged edition, in German only, was published under the following title: — Literatur der Grammatiken, Lexica und "Woertersammlungen aller Spraoben der Erde, von Johann Setebis- Vatee. Zweite vollig umgearbeitete Auagabe von B. Jiilg. Berlin, Nicolai, 1847, 8vo, pp. xxii. 592. An Enquiry into the Language of the American Indians. (Cbap. Ill, pp. 89 — 107 of: Elias Boudinot, A Star in tbe "West, or an humble attempt to discover the long lost ten tribes of Israel. Tren- ton, ]Sr. J. Eanton, Hutcheson, and Dunham, 1816, 8vo, pp. 312.) Biblioteca Hispano-Americana Septentrional. Catalogo y Noticia de los literatos, que o nacidos, o educados, o florecientes en la America Septentrional Espafiola, ban dado a luz algun escrito, o lo ban dexado preparado para la prensa. La escribia El Doctor D. Jose Maeiano Beeistaiit de Sotjza, del claustro de las universidades de Yalencia y Valladolid, Caballero de la orden Espafiola de Carlos III, y Commendador de la Heal Americana de Isabel la Catolica, y Dean de la Metropolitana de Megico. Megico, 1816 — 19, 3 vols, folio. I>e Souza's is by far the most important wort for the ht«rature of New Spain that has ever been composed. It comprises 3687 biographies, and although, like most Spanish worts of the Mnd, singularly uncritical, yet it is » INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. XXI John Pickering, Essay on a Missionary Orthograpliy for the Indian Languages of North America. Cambridge, 1820, 4tQ. Archeeologia Americana. Transactions and Collections of the American Antiquarian Society. Published by direction of the Society. Vol. I (pp. 436), Worcester, Massachusetts, 1820 ; Vol. II (pp. XXX, 573, map), Cambridge, Massachusetts, 1836. Sat, T., Vocabularies of Indian Languages (pp. Ixx — Ixixviii of Astronomical and Meteorological Eecords and Vocabularies of Indian Languages taken on the Expedition for Exploring the Mississippi and its Western "Waters, under the command of Major S. H. Long, 8vo. Philadelphia, 1822.3 AuEiEN Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique du Globe, ou classiiication des peuples anciens et modernes d'apres leurs langues ; precede d'un discours sur I'utilite et I'importance de I'etude des langues, etc. Paris, Eey and Gravier, 1826, fol. Table XXY contains the " DiTision ethnogi-aphique de rAm^ique et tableau general des langues Americaines ;" and Table XLI, " Tableau polyglotte des langues Americaines," gives a vocabulary of 26 vrorda in about 120 American languages and dialects. " Of the Language of the Indians," Chapter VI (pp. 105 to 114) of: A View of the American Indians, their general Character, Customs, ^Language, Public Eestivals, Eeligious Rites, and Tradi- tions: showing them to be the descendants of the Ten' Tribes of Israel ; the language of prophecy concerning them, and the course by which they travelled from Media into America. By Israel "WoRSLET. London, 1828, 12mo, pp. xii and 186. On the Languages of the American Indians. (Chap. II, pp. 33 ■ — 631 of: J. II. M'CuLLOH, jun., Researches, Philosophical and Antiquarian, concerning the Aboriginal History of America. Fielding Lucas, jun., 1829, Svo.) John Pickering, Indian Languages of America. Appendix (pp. 581 — 600) to Vol. VI of the "Encyclopaedia Americana," Philadelphia, 1836, Svo. Also, with separate title, " Eemarks on the Indian Languages of North America," s. 1. Philadelphia, 1836, Svo. Grennan translation (by Mrs. Prof. Eobinson), Ueber die Indianischen Spracben Ameritas. Aus dem Engliscben des Nord-Amerikaners Herrn John Pickeeinq-, iibersetzt luid mit Anmerliungen begleitet von Talvj. Leipzig, Vogel, 1834, Svo, pp. viii, 7li, 1. XXll INTRODUUTOEY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. A LBEET GrALiATiir, A Syiiopsis of the Indian Tribes within the United States, East of the Eocky Mountains, and in the British and Eussian possessions in North America. Pp. 1 — 422, of \ol. II of the Archaeologia Americana. Transactions and Collections of the American Antiquarian Society. {Camlridge, printed for the Society at the University Press, 1836, 8vo.) Sect. VI, Indian languages, pp. 1 — 208. Appendix of grammatical notices, and specimen of transitions and conjugations, pp. 211 — 302. Vocabularies, pp. 305^406. Select sentences, pp. 408 — 421. P. E. BIT PoNOBAir, Memoiro sur le Systeme grammatical des Langues de qiielques nations Indiennes de I'Amerique du Nord. Paris, 1838, 8vo. Aloide d'Obbignt, I'Homme Amerieain (de I'Amerique meri- dionale) considere sous ses rapports physiologiques et moraux. Paris, Pitois-Levrault & Co., 1839, 2 vols. 8vo, and Atlas. Eeise des Prinzen Maximilian ztr "Wied. CoUenz, 1839, 1841, 2 vols. 8vo. Vol. II, pp. 645 — 653, particularly on the lan- guDge of signs. "On this same subject see- Indian Language of Signs, Appendix B, pp. 27 — 1288 of the first volume of: Account of an Expedition from Pittsburgh to the Kocky Mountains, per- formed m the years 1819, 1820, .... imder the command of JVIajor Long, M. T. Say, and others, by Edwin James, Botanist and Geologist to the Expedition. London, Longman, Hurst, etc., 1823, 3 vols. 8vo. Aiid William Dunbae, On the Language of Signs .nmong certain North American Indians. Letter to Th. Jefferson, dated Natchez, June 30, 1800. Pp. 1—8 of: Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, Tol. \l. Part I. {Philadelphia, J. Aitken, 1804, 4to.) Eugene A. Vail, Notice sur les Indians de I'Aiiierique du Nord. Paris, Bertrand, 1840, 8vo, plates, pp. 244. (Des Langues Indiennes, pp. 40- 58.) Particularities of the Indian Languages. (Pp. 92—97, and com- parative view of the Indian and Asiatic Languages, pp. 100—103 of • John M'Iniosh, The Origin of the North American Indians, etc'. d^eio Toi-k, Napis and Cornish, 1843, 12mo, pp. 311.) Transactions of the American Ethnological Society 8vo Vol I (pp. viii and 492), 1843 ; Vol II (pp. clxxxviii, 298, two maps) 1848 ■ Vol. Ill, Part I (pp. 202), 1853. New YorTc. A. Gallatin, Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico Yucatan, and Central America. Pp. 1 — 3,52 of Vol I f tb ' INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. XXlll Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. {New York, Bartlett and Welford, 1845, 8vo. ) Sect. I. Lauguages, pj). 1 — 48. Ajppendix. Grammatical notices, pp. 215 ■ — 30i. Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Ex- pedition, during the -years 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842. Under the command of Charles Willies, United States Navy. By Horatio Hale, philologist of the expedition, 4to (pp. xii, 666, map). Phila- delphia, 1846. (The Languages of North-TVestern America, on pp. 533 to 656.) A. Gallatis', Hale's Indiana of North-West America, and Vocabularies of North America, -with an Introduction. Pp. xxv — clxxxviii, 1 — 130 of Vol. II of the Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. {Wew York, Bartlett and "Welford, 1848, 8vo.) Introduction III, Philology ; Vocabularies, Grammar, pp. CTiii — cxliv. Hale's Indians of North- West America. Philology, pp. 25 — 70 ; Vocabu- laries, 71—130. H. E. Schoolceaet, A Bibliographical Catalogue of Books, Transla,tions of the Scriptures, and other publications in the Indian Tongues of the United States ; with brief critical notices. Washing- ton, C. Alexander, printer, 1849, 8vo, pp. 28. Contains a catalogue raisonnd of the Indian works in the Indian bureau of the department of the interior. It is reprinted with a few additions, pp. 523 — 551 of Vol. IV of the illus- trated work on the Indian Tribes of the United States, pubHshed-by order of the Government of the United States. Historical and Statistical Information respecting the History, Condition, and Prospects of the Indian Tribes of the United States. Collected and prepared under the direction of the Bureau of Indian , Affairs, per Act of Congress of March 3, 1847, by Henrt E. ScHOOLCEAl'T, LL.D. Published by authority of Congress. Parts I to V, 4to (with illustrations). FMladelphia, 1851 to 1855. H. E. ScHOOLOEArT, Indian Languages of the United States. (Pp. 340 — ^345 of History, Condition, and Prospects of the Indian Tribes of the United States,, Vol. II.) Ehanois Liebeh, LL.D., Plan of Thought of the American Languages (pp. 346—349 of History, Condition, and Prospects of the Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. II). H. E. Schoolcraft, Observations on the Manner of correspond- ing Words in the Indian Tongue. (Pp. 371 — 385 of History, Con- XXIV _ INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. dition, and Prospects of the Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. IV.) H. E,. ScHOOLCEArT, Indian Numerals. (P. 712 of History, Condition, and Prospects of the Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. V.) Catalogue of Books in the Astor Library relating to the Lan- guages and Literature of Asia, Africa, and the Oceanic Islands. New York, Astor Library Autographic Press, 1854, 8vo, pp. 8, 424. Contains, on pp. 179 — 187, also books on the languages of the American Indians. An Examination of American Languages, on pp. 53 to 72 of: Archmology of the United States; or. Sketches, Historical and Biblio- graphical, of the Progress of Information and Opinion respecting Vestiges of Antiquity in the United States. By Samuel. F. Haven. Pp. iv. and 168, 4to. Washington, 1856. ■ BIBLIOTHECA GLOTTICA. ABENAKI, WAPANACHKI. Eastern Indians. This is the name given by Europeans to the Indians of New England^ Canada^ and Nova Scotia. Tribes of the Abenakis are the Micmacs, Souriquois, Ameriscoggins, Etchemins, and Penobscols. The Abenakis proper lived on the Kennebek river ; their principal place was Nanrantsouak (Nor- ridgewock). WOEDS AND TOCABrLABIES. Heevas, Saggio, p. 233. Peofessoe T. Sat, Comparative Vocabulary of various Dialects of the Lenape, etc. ; note 15, pp. 135 — 145, to John Pickering's edition of : Dr. Edwards's Observations on the Mohegan Language, in Vol. X (second series) of the : Collec- tions of the Massachusetts Historical Society. Soston, Phelps and Farnham , 1823, 8vo ; reprinted, Hid., Little and Brown, 1843, 8vo. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, Ko. 815. Pathee Sebastian Easles, A Dictionary of the AbenaH Language in North America, published from the original manuscript of the author, with an intro- ductory memoir and notes by John Pickering. Cambridge, Folsom, 1833, 4to ; forms part (pp. 370 — 574) of : Memoirs of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences. New Series, Vol. L Cambridge, Folsom, 1833, 4to. The original MS. in the Harvard Library, Cambridge, Massachusetts. No. IV, 14 of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305 — 367) to A. Q-ailatih's Synopsis, etc., Vol. II of the : Archseologia Americana ; and (partly) under O, IV, 5, p. 109 of the Vocabularies in VoL II of the ; Transactions of the Ameri- can Ethnological Society. Langue des Abenaquis, p. 514 of Vol. VIII of: Ant. Cottet db Gbbehn, Monde primitif. Paris, 1773, 4to, Eeprinted in : J. B. Scherer's Eecherches His- toriques et Geographiques sur le Nouveau Monde. Paris, Brunet, 1777, 12mo, pp. 327, 328. William Willis, The Language of the Abenaquis, or Eastern Indians (extracts from Easles, and list of Indian geographical names), Art. VI, pp. 93 — 117, and - / B 2 ABIPONES— ACCAWAY. E. E. PoTTEE, appendix thereto, Art. Till, pp. 185—193, 195, of Vol. IV of the : Collections of the Maine Historical Society. Portland, 1856, 8to. GEAMMARS AND GEAMMATIOAI, NOTICES. P. P. WzOKHllAilf, Wobanaki kinzowi awighUian. Boston, 1830, 8vo. ABIPONES. Formerly of the Province of Chaco, now of Paraguay, east of the Parana river ; were divided into three tribeSj the Naguegt- gaguehee, the Rucahee, and the Jaconaiga. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Heevas, Origine, Tab. L et seq. Hektas, Vocabolario Pohglotto, p. 161 et seq. Hbetas, Saggio, pp. 105, 106 ; and Toba Abipona, p. 105. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 450. Mabtin Dobbizhopfkk, Presbyter et per XVIII annos Paraguariae mission- arius, Historia de Abiponibus, equestri, bellicosaque Paraguarisenatione,locupletata copiosis barbarum gentium, urbium, fluminum, ferarum, amphibiorun>, insectorum, serpentium prsecipuorum, piscium, avium, arborum, plantarum, aliarumqueejusdem provineia) proprietatum obserTationibus. VienniB, de Kurzbeok, 1784, 3 vols. 8to. Translated into^ a. German : M. DOBEIZHOPFEB, Gresohiohte der Abiponen (by Professor Ereil), Wien, 1784, 3 vols. 8vo. b. English: An Account of the Abiponee, an Equestrian People of Paraguay. Erom. "the Latin of Maetiis Dobeizhofpee, eighteen years a missionary in that country (by Miss Coleridge). London, Murray, 1822, 3 vols. 8yo. The vocabulary and grammar to be found in Vol. II, p. 161 et seq. of the Latin edition. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 478, 497, 505, 506. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. M. DoBBiZHOFFEB, 1. u., Vol. II, p. 161 et seq. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 498—501. A. D'Obbioky, L'Homme Amfericain, Vol. II, p. 117. ACCAWAY. Indian Tribe of Guyana, on the banks of the Demerara, belongs to the Caribi-Tamanakan stock. ACH4GUAS AGLEGMUTES. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Vocabulary of Eighty-two Nouns and Numerals (1 — 10) in the four Indian Jianguages of British Gruyana, Accaway. By WiLi,. Hillhottse, in the : Journal of the Eoyal Greographical Society of London. London, 1832, Vol. II, pp. 24,7, 248. Eeprinted, pp. 155, 156, of Vol. V of : R. Montgomery Martin's British Colonial Library (West Indies, Vol. II). London, 1844, 12mo. Vocabulary of Pive Indian Nations in Guyana, Aokoway, in appendix No. V, pp. 164, 165 of: F. A. VA2f Heuvei, El Dorado. New I'ort, J. Winchester, 1844, 8to. Sib Eoeeet H. Schombtjegk, Vocabulary of Eighteen Words, compared with Eighteen other Gruyana Languages and the Lingoa geral, pp. 97, 98 of the : Swansea Meeting Report of the British Association in 1818. London, Murray, 1849, 8vo. Vocabulary of Eighteen Words (eight not in Schomburgli), compared with Arawak, Caribisi, and Warau, pp 297, 298 of: W. H. Brett, the Indian Tribes of Gruyana. New York, Rob. Carter and Brothers, 1852, 12mo. ACHAGUAS. Wandering Tribe^ on the banks of the Middle Orinoco and the Casanare. ■WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Heetas, Origine, Tabb. XII, LI et seq. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, p. 631. ADAIZE. On the Red River^ near Natchitoches. Only forty men in 1805. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. No. XIII, 18 of the Comparative Vocabulary of Eifty-three Nations, pp. 305 — 367 of the Synopsis of the Indian Tribes within the United States, East of the Rocky Motmtains, etc., by Albert G-aliatin, in Vol. II of tlie : Archseologia Americana. Cambridge University Press, 1836, 8vo ; and Ko. D, XIII, pp. 95 — 97, of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of the : Transactions of the American Ethnolo- gical Society. The Adaize words given after MS. notices of Sibley. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part, 3, p. 278. . AGLEGMUTES, AGOLEGMUTES. In Russian America, at the mouth of the rivers Nuschagak and Naknek. They belong to the Esquimaux. (Tchouktchi Ameri- cans of Balbi.) 12^ ARDA — ARRAPAHOES. The work of Molina, followed in 1787 by : Saggio della Storia ciyile del Chili {Bologna, 8vo), was translated into — a. Spanish, by D. Domingo Jos. de Ajrquellada Mendoza. Madrid, 1788, 2 Tols. small 4to. b. French, by M. Graval, M.D. FaHs, Ifee de la Eochelle, 1787 (or 1789), 8vo. c. English, with notes and appendix, by an American gentleman. Mid- dletown, Connecticut, 1808, 2 toIs. 8to. (By Will. Shaler or Rich. AJsop ?). EepriQted with notes and appendices, etc. London,, Longman, 1809, 2 vols. 8to. The second edition of the original appeared under the title : Saggio della Storia del Chili. Seconda edizione accresciuta. Bologna, 1810, 4to. Portrait and maps. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, p. 397—416. A. D'OEBiaifT, L'Homme Am^rioain, Vol. I, p. 399. ARDA. According to Alcedo, the Ardas are a tribe of Indians living between the Rivers Napo and Maranon, in the province of QuijoSj not far from Quito. WORDS AND VOCABULAKIES. Doctrina Christiana, y explicaciou de sus misterios en nuestro Idioma Espanol y en Lengua Arda. Madrid, 1658, 12mo, pp. 28. The Lord's Prayer in the Arda Language : — Daygue, mito, etepi, eTota, agai, sauotificado, soro, oii vgua, mito me, \ lortome guanuque, oririque, numo, aysague, enumo, agai, oju, mito, Tepa, ve, toe, naueie, ayale, gui, matedo, numo, miu, ayale, a joti misi, erique, mayaibo, nurebo, vreminoe, oig, vodutinau, vrrenui. Amen. AEEAPAHOES. Indians on the Kanzas River. WOKDS AND VOCABULARIES. No. E, VII, pp. 96, 98 of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Jlithuological Society, Vol. II. theTited ItX/oHr^^' ''• '''-''' °'- '*=^°°^-*^ ^"^^- -"^^^^ °^ Vocabulary, headed ^WX in possession of aaUatin ; collated by Dr. Pricha^ 7l : ^;^^'^!'^- ^°"^« °f ^'<^P^^° i-^ ^ol. II of : Transactions of Tlmerican Ethnological Society, apparently made whUst this Vocabulary was out of the nos sessor s hand, as the language is there called Atsina. AKRAWAKS. 13 ARRAWAKS. Indians of Guyana, on the banks of the Berbice and Surinam Eivers. (See J. E. Fabri, Geographisches Magazin. Dessau and Leipzig, 1785, 8vo, Vol. IV, pp. 33—47.) WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Words compared with Yaio and Sliebay, pp. 642, 643, of: Joan, de Laet, KoTUS OrbiB seu Desoriptiouis IndisB Ooeidentalis, libri XVIII. Jjugduni Baiavorum, Elzevir, 1633, folio. Freiwh translation, ibid,., 1640, folio. Deutscli Arawakisclies Woerterbuch, zusanamengestellt duroh Theophiius ScHTJMANlf (between 1748 and 1755) . MS. in possession of the Moravian com- munity at Paramaribo. Smith Barton, New Views — Comparative Vocabularies. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 697, 698. Baibi, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLT, No. 585. Journal of the Rojal G-eographical Society of London. London, 1832, 8vo. Vol. II, pp. 247, 248 : Vocabulary of Eighty-two Nouns and Numerals (1 — 10) in the four Indian Languages of British Guyana, Arawaak, etc., by William Hill- house, Esq., Surveyor. Keprinted in Vol. V of : K. Montgomery Martin's British Colonial Library (West Indies, Vol. II). London, 1844, 12rao, pp. 155, 156. Table comparing Twelve Words of the Arrowaot, Atovay, Maypure, Moxos, and Quichua. Appendix VI, p. 166, of : J. A. Van Heuvel's El Dorado, ifew York, J. Winchester, 1844, 8to. Arrawak Numerals, p. 30 of : Bebnan's Missionary Labours in British Guyana. London, 1847, 8vo. A Dictionary, Arrowack and G-erman — Arrowakisoh Deutsches Worterbuch. Vermehrt, 1803, durch Theodor Sohultz, in 1 vol. of 622 pp., 4to — is de- posited in the Library of the American Bhilosophical Society at Philadelphia. Sib Egbert H. ScHOMBUBaR, Comparative Vocabulai-y of Eighteen Arawaak Words, in his Vocabularies of the Indians of Guyana, pp. 97, 98 of the : Eeport of the British Association. Swansea, 1848, 8vo. Vocabulary of Eighteen Words compared with Warau, Caribisi, and Accaway, pp. 297, 298 of: W. H. Brett's Indian Tribes of Guyana. Nem York, 1852, 12mo. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. C. Quandt, Moravian Missionary among the Arrawacks, from 1769 to 1780, Naohricht von Suriname und seinen Eiuwohnern, sonderlich den Arawaken, Warauen und Karaiben und von der Sprache der Arawaken, von der Gewachsen und Thieren des Landes, und Geschaften der dortigen Missionarien. OoerliU, a. a. (1807), 8vo. With map and two plates. 14 ATHAPASCA ATNa's. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 666—674. H. C. 'FocKE, Jets over de Arrowakten en hunnetaal, pp. 42—53 of: WeBt-Indie; Eijdragen tot de BeTordering van liet Kennis der Nederlandscli West-Indische Kolonien. Vol. I. Haarlem, 1855, 8vo. Deutsche Arawakkisohe Spraohlelire, zusammengestellt duroli THEOPHiltrg Schumann, Missionair zu Klosterbergen (between 1748 and 1755). MS. ia possession of the Moravian community at Paramaribo. Grammatikahsche Satze yon der Arawakisohen Sprache von Theodoe Schultz. MS. in 12mo, pp. 173. Deposited by the author in the Library of the American PhUosophioal Society at Philadelphia. ATHAPASOA, ATHABASCA, TINNE, DTINNE. This great family of nations, to which the Kenaize are nearly related^ occupies the whole of the northern limits of North America, together with the Eskimos. The principal nations belonging to the Athapasca family are the Chepewyans, Tahkals, Kutchin, Sussee, Dogrib, Tlatskanas, and TJmpquas. The Navajos and Ticorillas seem to belong to the same stock. WORDS and vocabularies. Phrases and G-rammatical Forms (Chippewyan from Dv PONCEATj's collection), pp. 215, 216, of Vol. II of the : Archseologia Americana. Vocabulary (TacuUies, Cheppeyans, Sussees), Hid., pp. 305 — 367. J. C. E. BusCHMANN, IJber die Verwandschaft der ICinai-idiome mit dem groasen Athapaskischen Sprachstamme (mit Worttafel) , pp. 231 — 286 of the : Monatsbe- richte der Berliner Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1854. J. C. E. BuscHMANN, Der Athapaskische Spraohstamm. . Berlin, E. Diimmler, 1856, 4to, pp. 149—319. (From : Abhandlungen der Philosophisch-Historisoheu Klasse der KonigHohen Akademie der "Wissenschaften, 1855.) Contains: Wort- verzeiohuiss der athapaskischen Sprachen, pp. 174 — 222 ; and : Grosses Wort- verzeichniss des athapaskischen Spraohstammes oder der Kinai- athapaskischen Sprachen (compared with Koloschian), pp. 223 — 320. ATNA'S. On the Atna^ or Copper River, in Russian America. WORDS AND VOCABrLAEIES. Some (1 1) Words compared with TJgalenze and Kolosch, p. 99 of Vol. I of • E E VON Bae, and Gb. von Helmeijsen, Beitrage zur Kenntniss des Russischen Reichs ATNAH ATTAKAPAS. 15 und der angraenzenden Laender Asiens. St. Feiersbwg, Press of the Academy, 1839, 8to. ATNAH, OR KINN INDIANS. Chill Indians (Shousliwap, Plat-head). On the Caledonia River, west of the Rocky Mountains. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Pp. 257, 258 of: Aiexandee Mackenzie's Voyages from Montreal to tte Pacific Ocean, &c. London, 1801, 4to. And p. 418 of the German translation of the same. Published at Hamburg, 1802, 8vo. Eeprinted in A. Gallatin's Synopsis, Vol. II of the : Archseologia Americana, p. 378, under XXIII (58) . Also Vol. II of the : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vocabularies I, XXIII, p. 118, And partly in : Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 216. Baibi, Atlas Ethuographique. Tab. XLT, No. 773. Atnah and Noosdalum Words compared, p. 157 of E. Gc. Latham's Languages of the Oregon Territory. Pp. 154—166 of Vol. I of the : Journal of the Ethno- logical Society of Loudon. Edinburgh, 1848, 8to. Atna, or Shoushwap Vocabulary in J. Howse's Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Languages — Kutani, Elathead, Otanagan, Atna, pp. 199 — 206 of: Proceedings of Philological Society, Vol. IV. io»do», 1850. Elathead (as dialect of Atnah) Vocabulary, ibid. Okanagan (as dialect of Atnah) Vocabulary, ibid. Comparative Vocabulary of the Athapaskan and Kinai (among them the Atnah) Languages, pp. 269 — 318 of: Busohmakn'S Athapaskischer Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856, 4to. ATTAKAPAS, OTAKAPA. Indians of Louisiana. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. No. XV, 50 of: Comparative Vocabulary of Fifty- three Nations, pp. 305 — 867 of A. GtALIATIN's Synopsis in Vol. II of the : .Archseologia Americana ; and in D, XV, pp. 95, 97 of Vol. II of the : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. J. S. Vatbe, Analekten der Sprachenkuude. Leipzig, 1821, 8vo, No. 2, pp. 63 — 72. Baibi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 758. Vocabulary of the Atacapas, by Maetin Duealde, MS. in the Library of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia. An Attakapa Vocabulary has been collected by John E. Babtleit, United States Boundary Commissioner. , 16 ATUKE — AYMARA. ATURE. Indians of Venezuela, speaking the Saliva language; now nearly extinguished. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. T. S. GriLii, Saggio di Storia Americana. Homa, 1780—1784, Vol. Ill, 8vo. AYMARA. Indians of Bolivia, the north-westerly provinces of the Argentine Republic, and of Southern Peru. The Aymara language bears a close resemblance to the Quichua; many words are the same in both languages, and their grammatical construction is likewise very similar. Of the various dialects of the Aymara language spoken by the Kanchis, Kasnas, Kollaguas, Karanhas, Charcas, Pacasas, and Lupakas, the two latter are the most cultivated. WORDS AND VOCABULAKIES. P. LtTDOvioo Bektoitio, Vocabulario en la Lengua Aymara. Impresso en la casa de la Compania de Jesus en Juli Fueblo, en la Prorincia de Chucuito, por Francisco del Canto, 1612, 4to. « WoLPOAua Payee, Oratio Aymara cum versione Latina (et oontinuatione). In : G-. G. Ton Murr, Journal fiir Kunst und Litteratur. Nurnlerg (1775 — 1789, 17 vols. 8to), Vol. I, pp. 112—121; Vol. II, pp. 277—334; and Vol. Ill, pp. 55 — 104. Wolfgang Bayer was a Jesuit missionary among the Aymaras of southern Peru, Heetas, Origine, pp. 37, 177, and Tabb. XLIX, L, LI et seq. Heevas, Aritmetica, pp. 101, 102. Heevas, Saggio, pp. 89, 90. Hektas, Vocabulario, pp. 161 et seq. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 2, pp. 537, 538, 547. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 460. Vocabulary of Twenty-three Words, pp. 162, 164 of Vol. I of: A. D'Oebigny, L'Homme Americain. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAI, NOTICES. P. LITDOTICO Beetonio, Arte y Grammatica copiosa de la Lengua Aymara. Moma, Zannetti, 1608, 8to. Ngw edition, enlarged (by D. de Gualdo p) LuD. Beetohio, Arte de la Lengua Aymara, con una sylva de phrases de la misma lengua, y su declaraoion en romance. Impressa en la casa de la BANIWA BATEM-BA-KAI-EE. if Compania de Jesus en Juli FuMo, en la Proyincia de Chucuyio, por Fran- cisco del Canto, 1612, 4to, pp. X, 1618. Brtjket, Vol.-I, p. 305, mentions : Libre de la vida ymilflgijos de nuestro Sefior Jesu Christo, en la Lengua Aymara y romance. Impressa en la casa de la Compania de Jeaus, etc., 1612, 4to. P. LuDOVico Bbbtgnio, Arte Breve de la lengua Aymara, para introduction del arte grande de la misma lengua. Soma, 1603, 8vo. P. DiEao DB ToEBES RuBio, Arte de la Lengua Aymara. Lima, 1616, 8vo. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 2, pp. 535—546. A. D'OEBiaifT, L'Homme Amerioain, Vol. I, pp. 320—323. BANIWA. Indians on the Amazon and the Rio Negro. Wallace names Baniwas, of the Rio Isauna^ of Tomo-Maroa^ and of Javita : of whom the first two speak kindred languages ; the third, however, a language totally different from the others. Maetius " (VII, 333) calls them Manihas, Batiibas, and Manivas. WORDS and VCCABDLAKIES. Vocabulary (of ninety-eight -words), pp. 521 — 541 of: Alpbed K. Wallace, A Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Kio Negro. London, Eeeve & Co., ■ 1853, 8vo. BAERE. Indians on the Amazon. They speak a language similar to that of the Baniwas of Isanno and Tomo-Maroa, and also of the TJainambuas and Tariana. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Vocabulary (of ninety-eight words), pp. 521 — 541 of: Alebed R. Wallace, A Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Eio Negro. London, Eeeve & Co., 1853, 8vo. BATEM-DA-KAI-EE. Indians of the north-western part of California, on the head of Eel River. The name above given is that of the valley in which this and other bands reside. WORDS AND vocabularies. Vocabulary, by G-eoeqe Qibbs, in : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes, Vol. Ill, pp. 434—440. 18 BAYANO — BETOI. BAYANO. Indians of the Isthmus of Panama, about the Eiver Chepo. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. BBETHOiD Seemann, Vocabulary in his article on the AborigineB of the Isthmns of Panama. Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. lU, part 1, pp. 179—181. BEAVER INDIANS. In the Hudson's Bay territory. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Vocabulary, pp. 323—328 of Vol. II of: John M'Lean's Notes of Twenty-fire Years' Service in the Hudson's Bay Territory. London, Bentley, 1849. 2 vols. 12mo. DupKoate Vocabulary in J. Howse's Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Languages — Beaver, I and II ; Chipevpyan, I and II ; Sikanni dialect of New Caledonia, pp. 192 — 198 of Proceedings of : Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1850. BETHUCK. Language of an extinct tribe of Indians of the Algonkin stock. Dr. R. Gr. Latham had a vocabulary lent to him by Dr. King, Secretary of the Ethnological Society, but without an account of its origin. From internal evidence he satisfied himself that it was Bethuck, i. e., aboriginal — not Eskimo, nor yet Micmac, but a branch of the Algonkin, per se. See Report of British Association for the Advancement of Science — Southampton meeting. BETOI. On the River Cassanare, in New Granada, of the same stock as the Ele and Yaruro Indians. The Situga and Airiko speak dialects of the Betoi. WORDS AND VOOABULARIKS. Heevas, Vocabulario poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq. Hebvas, Saggio, p. 109. Heevas, Origine, Tab. XLIX. BLACKFEET. 19 Hestas, Aritmetica, p. 106. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 2, pp. 645, 650. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI. No. 647. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. P. JoSBPH G-TIMILLA gave his grammatical notes on the Betoya language to his successor, P. Jos. PadiUa. Hervas prevailed upon PadiUa, when retired from his missionary labours, to write down what he knew of the grammatical structure of this language. Adelung has used the letter of PadiUa to Herras. Mithridates, Vol. III., part 2, pp. 640—647. BLACKPEET, SATSIKAA. Pieds fioirs ; Blood or Paegan Indians of the Algonkin stock ; the most powerful tribe of the north-western prairies on the sources of the Missouri and the Rocky Mountains, They are divided into — 1. Satsikaa, or Blackfeet proper. 2. Kahna, or Blood Indians, " Indiens du Sang." 3. Piekans, Paegans, Pica- neux. 4. Small Robes. ■WORDS AND VOCABULAKIES. Edw. Umebbville, The Present State of Hudson's Bay. Containing .... a specimen of five Indian languages. London, Walker, 1790, 8vo. Table to p. 202. German translation — Mit Erauterungen, von E. A. W. Zimmermanu. SeVmstedt, Eleckeisen, 1791, 8vo. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 254 (from Umpeetille). Baibi, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 770. Paegan j Pied noir. No. XXI, 56 (p. 373) of the Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc., in Vol. II of the : Archseologia Americana (from Umpeetille) . Eeise des Peinzen Maximillan ztj Wied. Cohlentz, 1839 — 1841, 2 vols, 4to. Vol. I, pp. 584 et seq. ; Vol. II, pp. 480—486. Blackfeet Vocabulary, Appendix, pp. 262 — 265 to Vol, II of: G-BO. Catlin, Letters and Notes on the Manners, Customs, and Condition of the North Americai) Indians, London, 1841, 2 vols. 8vo. Blackfeet Vocabulary (and Lord's Prayer), on the last two pages of the last two leaves of: Oregon Missions and Travels over the Kocky Mountains, 1845-6, by Fathbb p. J. de Smet, e. S. J. New York, Edw. Dunigan, 1847, 12mo. pp. 408, 4to. Vocabularies of Languages of North-western America, No. 13, Z. Satsikaa (Blackfeet), pp. 569 — 629 of : Hoeatio Haxe, Ethnography and PhUology , United States Exploring Expedition. PhiladelpMa, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio, and 20 BODEGA — BRAZILIANS. C. rV, pp. 88, 90, 92, 94, of the Vocabularies in Vol. Ilof : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. Affihities of the gatsika or Blackfeet Language with those of the Algonkins, pp. CXIII, CXIV of Vol. II of : Transactiohs of the American Ethnological Society. Satsika, or Blackfeet Vocabulary (Upper Missouri), by J. B. MoNOEOTrE, on pp. 494—505 of Vol. II of: Schoolcraft, Indian Tribes of the United States. Miscellaneous vocabularies. J. HowsE, Vocabularies of certain North- American Indian Languages— Black- foot I and II— Nipissing, Shawnee, Brunswick. Pp. 102—1 13 of : Proceedings of the Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1850. Duplicate Vocabulary of Blackfoot. The words of forms of speech were collected partly by Howse himself, and partly by such missionary and commercial agents as were known to have the requisite opportunities ; the same list of names and phrases being transmitted to an. BODEGA. Indians of California, who call themselves Olamentke. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. KoSTEOMlTONOV, Woerter aus zwei Spraehen Neucalifomiens (Bodega and Sever- novzi),pp. 234 — 254 of Vol. I of: K. v. Bae und G-E. v. Helmeksen, Beitrage Zur Kenntniss des russischen Keichs und der angranzenden Lander Asiens. St. Petersburg, 1839, Svo. (Russian, German, and Bodega. Printed in Bussiau type.) BRAZILIANS, Or rather, Tupis. The different tribes of the Tupis are named, and a map of the wanderings and extension of this once numerous and mighty people given, in : Dr. C. F. Ph. von Mautius, Abhandlung von dem Rechtszustaude unter den Ur- einwohnerii Brasiliens. Miinchen, F. Fleischer, 1833, 4to, map, pp. 86, 20. (The Appendix gives, on 20 pp., a view of the different Indian peoples, tribes, and hordes of Brazil.) Their language was called " lingoa geral" (general language) by the Portuguese, and eight different dialects of this language are enumerated by Vateb, viz., the dialects of the — 1. Tappen, in the province of Rio Grande do Sul. 2. Petiguaren (anthropo- phagi), in the provinces of Paraiba and Ceara. 3. Tupinaba, on the shores of the Rio Real, in the province of Sergipe. 4. Kaheten, on the shores of the river S. Francisco, in the BRAZILIANS. 21 province of Pernambuco. 5. Tu-pimnquins (the people first met with by Cabral), in the interior and on the coast of the province of Espiritu Sancto, at Porto Seguro and Ilheos. 6. TapigucB, on the sea-coast from St. Paolo to Pernambuco. 7. Tummimioi and Tamoice, near Eio Janeiro. 8. Tupinambas, the largest of the tribes, in the provinces of Maranhao and Gran Para, speaking the most generally diifused dialect. Martius divides the Tupis into north, south, west, east, and central Tupis, and names, besides this people, 245 different larger or smaller tribes living within the Brazilian empire. Adelung calls the Tupis the North Guarany, and considers their language as a part of the Guarany language. WORDS AND vocabularies. "Aucuns Slots des Peuples de I'lsle de Brezil." On four pages at the end of Ant. Pabre's Extract of the MS. of Pigafetta's Voyage, in the Ambrosian Library of Milan. This extract bears the title : Le Voyage et Navigation, faict par las Espaignoles es isles de Mollucques, des isles quilz ont trouve au diet voyage, des roys dicelles, etc. Park, Simon de Colines, s. a., small 8vo. Black letter (see Beunet, Vol. Ill, p. 743). The manuscript of Pigafetta was published in 1800, by Dr. Charles Amoretti : Primo Viaggio intomo al globo terracqueo, ossia ragguaglio della navigasione aEe Indie oriental! per la via d'occidente, fatta suUa squadra del Capitano Maggalianes negli anui 1519—: 1522, del Cavaliero AtfTONio Piga- fetta. Milano, 1800, 4to. French translation — Premier Voyage autqur du Monde par le Chevalier Pigafetta, sur I'eaeadre de Magellan, pendant les annfos 1519 — 1522 ; suivi de Textrait du traite de navigation du meme auteur et d'une notice sur le Chevalier Martin Behaim, avee la description de son globe terrestre. Paris, Jansen, 1801, 8vo, pp. 64, 415, maps and plates (the vocabulary, p. 241). The extract of Fabre has been translated into Italian, and published in the rare collection — II Viaggio fatto dagli Spagniuoli atomo al moudo, o. 1. 1536, 4to (Bkunbt, Vol. IV, p. 603— before : Venezia, 15B4, 4to ?), vrherein it is printed on the last leaf. It is also reprinted in the first volume of Giam' battista Eamusio Eaooolta di Navigazioni e Viaggi. Venezia, Giunti, 1550, 1559, 1556, 3 vols, folio, and often afterwards. Brazilian words and a conversation in Brazilian are given by : Jean de Leey, Histoire d'un Voyage fait en la Terre du Bresil, dite Am^rique ; contenant .... les moeurs et fa^ons de vivre etranges des sauvages Am^riquains, avec un coUoque de leur langue, s. 1. (a la Rochelle) . Printed by Anthony Chuppin, 1578, . 8vo, engravings. Keprinted very often. Translated also into Latin, English, Dutch, and German. ^ The BrazHiau words and conversation are reprinted in the : Allgemeina. 23 BRAZILIANS. Historie der Reisen zu Wasser lind zu Lande. Amsterdam, 174!J — 1774. 21 vols. 4to, maps, plates, in Vol. XVI, pp. 263 et seq. Words from Lery and from Dutnh notices, page 599, of: Joan de Laet, ISTovus orbis seu descriptionis Indiae oooidentalis, Libri XVIII. Imgdmii Batavorum, Elzevir, 1633, folio. Translated into French {Leyden, Elzevir, 1640, fol.), and Dutch (Ze^/den, Elzevir, 1644, folio). Dictionariolum nominum et verbormn Knguse Brasiliensis maxime comunis (collected by Emanttel de Mobaes), cap. XI of: 1. Georgii Marggravii de leibstad, Tractatus topograpbicus et meteorologicus Brasilise, cum eclipsi solari, quibus additi sunt illius et aliorum commentarii de Brasiliensium et Chilensium Indole et lingua — in: HistoriaNaturalis Brasilise (edid. Joan de Laet). Lugduni and Amstelodami, P. Hackius, 1648, folio, pp. 276 et seq. And in : Gr. Pisonis De Indise utriusque re natural! et medica, Libb. XIV. Jjugduni Batavum, Elzevir, 658, fol., pp. 22^24. 2. O. Dapper, Die unbekannte neuwe welt. Amsterdami, 1673, fgl., p. 412. (In Dutch, translated by Arnoldus Montanus : De nieuwe en onbekende weareld. Amsterdam, 1671, {o]io). 3. John OgUby, America. London, 1671, see pp. 4€5 — 487. 4. Had. Relandi, Dissertationes misceUaneae. Trajecti ad Shenitm, 1706, 1707, 3 vols. Svo, Vol. Ill, p. 173. Brazilian words are given by AifS. Eokabt, in bis Additions to : Pedro Cudenas, Description of Brazil, in: Christopb Gottlieb von Murr, Reisen einiger Mis- eionarien der Gesellschaft Jesu in America. Niiimberg, Zeh, 1785, Svo, pp. 614, map and plates, pp. 419 et seq. Hbbtas, Origine, Tab. XLIX et seq. Heetas, Vooabulario poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq. (Tupi and Brasile volgare.) Hebtas, Saggio, p. 98. (Tupi.) Smith Baeton, New Views — Comparative Vocabularies. Mitbridates, Vol. Ill, part 2, pp. 450, 451, 458, 460, 603 (from Hervas, Laet, Moraes, and Eckart). Balbi, Atlas Ethnograpbique, Tab. XLI, No. 492. Brazilien, Lingoa geral, Tupinamba, Tupi. Diccionario Portuguez e Brasiliano ; Obra necessaria aos ministros do altar que empreheuderem » conversao de tantos milhares de almas que ainda se achao dis- spersas pelos vastos certoes do Brazil, sem o lume da Fe, e Baptismo, etc. Por * t * Primeira parte. lAsboa, 1795, small 4to, pp. 79. Some Brazilian songs are given in : Relacion de la Real Tragi-comedia con que los padres de la Compania de Jesus de Lisboa reoibieron a EeHpe II de Portugal. Lisboa, 1620, 4to. A Glossary of Tupi Words, pp. 629—639 of: John LuccocK, Notes on Rio de Janeiro and the southern parts of Brazil, taken during » residence of ten years in that country, from 1808 to 1818. London, printed for Sam. Leigh, 1820, 4to (some copies have the date altered into 1822), plates, pp. 639. The author announces at the end of his book, that he is about to publish a BRAZILIANS. 23 " Grrammar and Dictionary of the Tupi Language." These works were never published. The MSS. are deposited in the Library of the Greographieal and Historical Institute at Eio de Janeiro. Sib Eobeet H, Sohomeuege, Comparative Vocabulary of Eighteen Words of the Lingua geral, in his Vocabularies of the Indians of Guyana, pp. 97, 98 of the : Beport of the British Association, Swansea Meeting, 1848. Juondon, 1849, 8vo. A Vocabulary of the : Langue de Nouros, Idiome de la Lengua geral, given in : Peancis de Castelnatt, Expedition dans les Parties Centrales de I'Amerique du Sud. Paris, A. Bertrand, 1850, 1851, 6 vols. 8vo. Vol. V, Appendix Vo- cabulary, No. 13, pp. 285, 286. Vocabulary of the Lingoa geral. Tableau and Kemarks on the Vocabularies, by E. G-. Latham. Appendix, pp. 529 — 534 (534 — 536, Comparison of the Lingua geral with the Tupi, Tupinamba, Mundrucu, Omagua, Guararri, and pp. 539 — 541, with Languages of Guyana), of : AiEBBD E. Wallace, A Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Bio Negro, with Account of the Native Tribes. London, Beeve & Co., 1853, pp. viii, 541. Lista de Voces de la Lengua general del Brasil. Appendix to the MS. Zeona Dictionary, in the possession of Colonel Joaquin Acosta, of Nueva Granada. A MS. " Vocabulario das Linguas Brasilica e Portugueza," on 200 pp., together with a " Doutrina e perguntas dos Mysteries principaes de nossa santa Ee na Lingua BrazUa," in Portuguese and Brazilian dialogues, stated to be written by the Eev. P. Maecos Antonio about 1750, is in the British Museum, collection of King George IV, No. 223. (See Ebed. Ebanc. be ia FiaANiEEE, Catalogo dos Mauuscriptos Portuguezes existentes no Museu Britauuico. Lisboa, imprenta nacional, 1853, 12mo, pp. 184, 185.) Vocabulario Brazileiro para servir de Complemento dos Diccionarios da Lingua Portugueza, por Braz da Costa Bubim. Rio de Janeiro, 1853, 1 vol. 8vo. Vocabulario Portuguez e Brazileiro, por Sr. Leonardo da Silveira das Dores Castello Branco. MS. in the Library of the Historical and Geographical Institute of Bio de Janeiro. Vocabulario da Lingua geral, ueada hoje em dia no Altos Amazonas. Por Se. De. Antonio G0N9ALVBS Dias. Pp. 553 — 576 of: Bevista Trimensal do Biode Janeiro, Tom. XVII. Words in ; luforma^ao dos Casamentos dos Indies do Brazil, pelo Padee Jose de Anchieta, pp. 254 — 263 of: Bevista Trimensal do Eio de Janeiro. Second series, Tom. I, No. 2. Forty-three Words of the Language spoken by the Indians das Brenhas de Mu- cury, pp. 451, 452 of : Bevista Trimensal do Eio de Janeiro. Second series, Tom, I, No. 4. Paraviana Words, pp. 252 — 256 of: Eelafao Geographica-TIistorica do Eio Branco da America Portugueza. Composta pelo Bachaeel Eeancisoo Xavieb Bibeieo de Sampaia, in : Bevista Trimensal do Eio de Janeiro. Second series, Tom. VI, No. 18. 24 BRAZILIANS. Diccionario da Lingua geral dos ludios do Brazil; reimpresso e augmentado con diversos Vooabularios e offorecido a S. M. Imperial, por JoAO Joaqttim da SiLTA GuiJiAEES. BaUa, 1854, pp. 106, 8vo. Diccionario Portuguez e Brazileiro, contendo o Vocabulario dos Indigenas Cayuas. Por Sr. Baeao de Antonina. MS. in the Library of the Historical and Geographical Institute of Eio de Janeiro. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Jose db Anchieta, Arte de Grammatica da Lingoa mais usada na Costa do BrasU. Coimhra, 1595, small 8vo., pp. 120. ' Extracts therefrom are given in Chapter X of the : Traotatus Brasiliae of Marggravius, in : De Lingua Brasiliensiiim e Grammatica P. Jos. de Anehieta, e. s, J., and in Eelaudus, in their aboTC-mentioned worts. A Brazilian Grammar, Yocabulary, and Gateohism, by Emanuel Veoa, a Mis- sionary, is mentioned by Adelung, in his Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 2, p. 442, as written but not printed. P. Luiz FlGUEiEA, Natural de Almodovar, Arte da Grammatica da Lingua do Brasil. Lisboa, 1681, 8to. Reprinted by Miguel Deslandes. lAsboa, 1687, 8to, and . . . . 4 th edition. Lishoa, 1795, small 4to. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 2, pp. 422—446, 452—457. Langue BrfesUienne, Monumens de la Linguistique du Br^sil composes au XVll Sifecle. Note 6, pp. 355 — 359, to : TJne T^te BresiUenne cfel^r^e h, Rouen, 1550 ' (Article de Feedihand Denis), in the: Bulletin du Bibliophile, 9me serie, H"os. 10, 11, 12. Paris, Techener, 1849, Svo, pp. 355—359. See also the 9th note to the same article : La Chanson de Montaigne, Poesie des Tupinambas. Drames des Missionaires, vers Tupiques composes par eux, pp. 364 — 379. Also printed separately. Paris, 1S50. And : Parecer da Commissao da Historia sobre o opusculo : TJne F^te Brfezilienne, etc., pp. 443 — 449, Vol. XIV of: Revista Trimensal de Rio de Janeiro. Grammatica da Lingua geral dos Indios do Brazil, pelo Padbe Liriz FlGTJBrEA, reimpressa por Joao Joaquim da Silva Guimares. BaMa, 1851, 1 Tol. Svo. Memoria sobre a neoesidade do Estudo e Ensino das Lenguas Indigenas do Brazil. Por Peancisoo Adolpho de Vaenhagen. MS. in the Library of the Historical and Geographical Institute of Rio de Janeiro. Remarks on the Language of the Tupis, in Section IX of: Historia geral do Brazil, por Feancisoo Adolpho de Vaenhagen. Vol. I. Itio de Janeiro, Laemmert, 1856, Svo. Remarks on the Lingua geral and on Tupinamba, in Section VIII of: Historia geral do Brazil, por Feahoisco Adolpho de Vaenhagen. Vol. I. Bio de Janeiro, Laemmert^ 1856, Svo. Ethnographia Indigena, Linguas, Emigra9oes, e Aj-chteologia. Por Sr. P. A. DE Vaenhagen. Pp. 366—376 of: Revista Trimensal do Rio de Janeiro. Second series, Tom. V, No. 15. BUGRE — CADDOES. 25 CoUec^ao de Etymologias Brazilicas, por Pb. Fbanoisco Doa PsAZBEEa Maeanhao. Pp. 69—80 of : Eevista Trimensal do Rio de Janeiro. Second series, Tom. 1,^0. 1. BUGRE. Brazilian Indians. Balbi, who calls them Bougresj says that they are cannibals. WORDS AND VOCABDLAEIES. Vocabulario da Lingoa Bugre (in Portuguese and Bugre), pp. 60—77 of Vol. XV of: Eevista do Instituto Historioo e Geographico do Brazil. Sio de Janeiro, typ. Laemmert, 1852, 8¥o. CABAROS. Brazilian Indians of the Aldeas on the River Tocantins. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Langue dee Cabaros (Aldeas du Tocantins). Vocabulaire, No. VI, pp. 273, 274 of: Castblnatt, Vol. V J Appendice. CADDOES. OADODAQUIOUS. Indians on one of the branches of Red River. Their language is spoken by the Nandakoes, Nahadaches, and Inies or Tachies. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Mithridates, Vol. HI, part 3, p. 277. No. 51, XVI, of the Comparative Vocabulary of ITifty-tbree Kations, pp. 305 — 367, and Supplementary Vocabulary of Caddo (six languages), pp. 381—397, by Geoe&e Gi-eat. Also, " Conjunctions," p. 272, and " Select Sentences," in Caddo, pp. 409, 411, 413 of A. G-AT.T.ATiy'g Synopsis, in Vol. II of the : Archseologia Americana. Part of XVI, 51, reprinted under E, XVI, pp. 96—98 of the Vocabularies in Vol. n of the : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. Captain E. B. Maect, U.S.A. Specimen of the Caddo and Witchita Languages, pp. 709 — 712 of Vol. V of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States. Caddo Vocabulary of Twenty Words, taken by Lietjtehano? A. W. WhippM, p. 70 of the Eeport upon the Indian Tribes, added to his Eeport on the Eoute near the 35tli Parallel, in Vol. II of the : Pacific EaUroad Eeports. WasUngton, 1855, 4to. E 26 CAHITA — CALiroaNIANS. CAHITA. In the northern parts of Mexico. WORDS AND VOCABULAEIES. NouTelles Annales des Voyages. Paris, 1841, 8vo. Vol. IV, pp. 262 — 287. GKAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Aite de la Lengua Cahita. Mexico, 1737, 12ino, CAHUILLOS. CA-WI-OS. Californian Indians residing near the Pacific, between the sources of the San Gabriel and Santa Anna. Cahuillo Vocabulary, taken by Libftenant A. W. Whipple, pp. 71 — 76 of the Report upon the Indian Tribes, by Lieutenant Whipple, Thomas Ewbank, and Professor W. W. Turner, added to Lieutenant Whipple's Eeport on the route near the 35th parallel, in Vol. II of the : Pacific Railroad Reports, Wash- ington, 18SS, 4to, and Twenty-eight Cahuillo Words compared with Eeohi, Netela, and Eizh. Ibid., p. 77. CALIi'ORNIANS In general. See-~ R. Or. Latham on the Languages of New California, pp. 72—86 of Vol. VI of : Proceedings of the Philological Society, London, 1850 ; Q-. Gibbs' Obserrations on some of the Indian Dialects of Northern California, pp. 420 — 423 of Vol. Ill of : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States. See also, pp. 99 — 177 of the same volume, the Journal of the Expedition of Colonel Redick M'Kee, United States Indian Agent, through North-western California^ performed in the summer and fall, 1851, by G-ege&e Gibbs. The United States Boundary Commissioner, John R. Baetlett, has taken the following Tooabularies in California : — Deguino or Comeya, at San Diego. Kechi, Mission of San Luis Rey. Ban Luis Obispo. Mission of same name. B'h ^"'"^ [in the Country watered by the Sacramento River. Noana ., Diggers,, Diggers of Napa Valley. Makam of Upper California. CAMACANS — CANADA. 37 In a letter, lie says : " Tlie name of Diggers is applied to all the California Indians by the people (whites) generally, and it is difflcult to get the real names of the tribes. Half the time the natives will give one the name of their chief or captain." Languages of California, by Adam Johnson. Pp. 406 — 4X5 of Vol. IV of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, gives vocabularies and words of the following tribes : — Tuolumne tribes, pp. 407 — 412. Co-co-noons on Mercedes River, p. 413. Indians at King's Eiver and about Tulare Lake, pp. 413, 414. Indians near to Mag Reading, on the upper waters of the Sacramento Biver, pp. 414, 415. CAMACANS. Camacaes Mongoyoz, or Monxocos Indians of the Capitania d6 Bahiaj Brazil (MartiuSj No. 11). ■WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Eeise des Peinzen Maximilian zu Wied Neuwied nach Brasilien. IVanTcfwrt am Main, 1820, 1821, 2 vols. 4to, Vol. II, p. 327—330. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, Nos. 505, 507 (C^macsins, Spix- Martius). CANADA. Early travellers give words of the Indian tribes inhabiting Canada under the name of Kanadians. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Samuel be Chamelain, Les Voyages de la KouveUe France oecidentale, dite Canada, faites par De Champlain et toutes les decouvertes qu'il a faites eu ce pays depuis 1603 jusqu'au 1629, ensemble la relation de tout ce qui s'est passe ^ la Nouvelle France en 1631. Paris, S. Lemure, Collet, 1632, 4to. Contains the translations of: P. Ladesme's Doctrine Chretienne, in Canadian, by Brebceuf ; and of Prayers, by Masse. Brebceuf s translation had been printed at Rouen, 1610, 8vo. Vater states that the edition — Paris, Collet, 1627, 8vo — contains the same linguistic pieces. Hebtas, Vocabulario Poliglotto, pp. 239, 240 (numerals). Smith Baeton, New Views, &c. — Comparative Vocabularies. Langues du Canada, pp. 499—504 of Vol. VIII of: Cofet de Gebelin, Monde Primitif. Paris, 1772, 4to. Vocabularies taken from Sagard, Lahontan, Lafiteau, and Louis Vincent. Reprinted, pp. 313 — 319 of: J. B. Scherer's Ee- cherohes Historiques et G^ographiques sur le Nouveau Monde. Paris, Brunet, 1777, 12mo. 28 CANISCHANA— CARIBS. CANISOHANA. Warlike tribe of the Moxos stock, on the rivers Mamore and Machupo, in Bolivia. WOEDS AND VOCABULAUIES. A. D'Oebigny, L'Homme Am^ricain, Vol. I, p. 164 ; II, p. 208. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. A. D'Oebignt, L'Homme Am&icain, Tol. II, pp. 245, 246. CARAJAS. Brazilian Indians on the banks of the Araguay {Carayas of Marxius, No, 78). words and vocabularies. Langue des Carajaa (Rio Araguay), Vocabulaire, Ko. 4, pp. 268 — 270 of: Cas- TBLNATT, Tol, V, Appendice. CAUIBS. Originally inhabiting the lesser Antilles, they settled, after their expulsion, on both sides of the Orinoco, particularly in the Sierra Paryme. There are — 1. Carihs proper, who call them- selves Karina, Kalina, or Kalinago ; the Galihis of French Guyana are the principal tribe ; the Tuapoka and Kunaguara, on the lower Orinoco, are closely related to the Galihis. 2. Yaoi, on the Island of Trinidad and the opposite shores of Venezuela. 3. Guachire or Guaiqueries, on the Island of St. Margarita and around Cumana ; they are the most advanced in civilization. The Avarigotes, Furugotos, and Acherigotes are said to speak the Carib language likewise. Humboldt calls the Caribs the "Buchares of the New World." The words used by the men are often different from those used by the women. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Veritable Kelation de tout ce que s'est fait et pass6 au Voyage que Mons. de Bretigny fit £t I'Amerique occidentale. Avee uue description des Moeurs et dea ProTuices de tous les Sauyages de cette grande partie du Cap de Nord ; un Dic- tionnaire de la Langue, et un avis tres necessaire k tous oeux qui veulent habiter ou CARIES. 29 faire habiter ce Pays-1^, ou qui deairent d'y etablir des Colonies. Le tout fait sur ces lieux par Paul Boyek, Escuyer, Sieur de Petit Puy. Faris, 1654, small 8to. The " Diotionnaire," pp. 193 et seq. P. PiBEBE Pellepbat, Relation des Missions des E. P. de la Compagnie de J6sua dans les Isles et dans la Terre ferme de I'Amferique meridionale. Avec une introduction S, la Langue des Galibis, sauvages de la Terre ferme de TAmerique mferidionale. Paris, Cramoisy, 1655, 12mo. Brimet ^Tol. Ill, p. 664) says that the "Introduction is sometimes found separate from the Relation." Voyage de la France eqainoxiale en I'isle de Cayenne, entrepris par les Prangois en I'annee 1652. Divisfe en trois livres. Le premier contient I'^tabhssement de la Colonie, son embarquement et sa route jusqu'es k son arrivee en I'isle de Cayenne. Le second, ce qui s'est passe pendant quinze mois que I'on a demeure dans le pays. Le troisieme traitte du temperament du pays et de la fertility de la terre et des moeurs et fa9onB de faire des sauvages de cette contrfe ; avec uu dictionnaire de la langue du meme pays. Par M. Antoine Biet, Superieur des Pr^tres qui ont pass^ dans le Pays. Faris, Clousier, 1664, 4to. Adelung, in his Mithridates (III, 684), says that the vocabulary of Biet is, with a few exceptions, the same as the cue given by Boyer. Histoire naturelle et morale des Isles Antilles de I'Amerique ; enrichie de plu- sieurs belles figures de raretez le plus considerables que y sont fecrites ; avec un Vocabulaire Caraibe. Rotterdam, A . Leers, 1658, 4to. This book, which has been several times reprinted and translated, is known as : M. DE Rocheeoet's History of the Antilles. Brunet (II, p. 585) names LoTiis DE PonfOT and Cesab de Rocheeobt as the authors. Du Tertre, who, at the same time prepared a history of the AntiDes (pubKshed afterwards at Faris, Jolly, 1667 — 1671, 4 vols. 4to), says that General Louis de Poincy placed his notes and a vocabulary, made by P. Raimond Bbeton, in the hands of a young clergyman, M. de Eochefort of Rotterdam, who had been twice in the West Indies. The dedication of the work is signed " L. DE P.," which Barbier explains as Louis de Poincy. Reprints — ■ Seeonde edition : revue et augmentfee. Fotterdam, 1665, 4to. Histoire Naturelle des lies Antilles, par M. DE Rocheeobt. Zt/on, 1667, 2 vols. 12mo. Dernier edition : augmentfee par I'autheur d'un R&it sur .... la Virginie, le Marie Land et la Caroline. Sotterdam, 1681, 4to. Is the edition of 1665, with but a new title and the "!Recit" annexed on p. 44. Translations — a. JSnglish: The History of the Caribby Islands, with a Caribbian Vocabulary. Ren- dered info English by John Davis, of Kidwelly. London, printed for Thomas Dring and John Starkey, 1666, foUo, pp. 8, 351, 10, 5, Scarce, because a great proportion of the copies was consumed in the great conflagration of London. The vocabulary, on teu not-numbered pages, after p. 351. 30 CARIES. b. German i Frankfurt-onrfhe-Main, 1668, 2 vols. 12mo. Ihid., 1688, 2 vols. 12mo. c. Dutch : Rotterdam, 1662, 4to. Dictionnaire CaTaibe-I"ran9oi3 et Francois- CaraHje, mesle de quantite de remarques historiques pour I'eclaircissement de la langue, par le P. KtAYMOND Beeion, de rOrdre des Frferes PrScheurs, Missionnaire. Auxerre, Grilles Bouquet, 1663, 1664, 1665, 3 tomes in 2 toIs. 8to. (Annexed is — forming the volume of 1664 — ^the same author's: Petit Catechisme, on Sommaire des trois premieres parties de la doctrine chre- tienne, traduit du Fran9ois en la Langue des Caraibes Insulaires. Auxerre, Gilles Bouquet, 1664, 8to.) New titles. IIUL., 1665, 1666, 2 vols. 8vo. N.B. Temaux Compans, in his : Bibliothfeque Am^ricaine (Pom, A. JBertrand, 1837-8), No. 830, p. 143, names a : Dictionnaire Caraibe-Franjais, par le Pebe LecleeC(1 — -Rennes, 1665 — which must be a mistake. Dictionnaire Galibi, pr^sente sous deux formes — I. Commen^ant par le mot Fran9ois ; II. Commen^ant par le mot Gahbi ; precfed^ d'un Essai de Grammaira par M. D. L. S. (De la Safvage). Paris, Banche, 1763, 8to. Good compilation &om the above dictionaries. Makes part of: M. SE Peejontaine, Maisou rustique, h, I'usage des habitants de la partie de la Franoe equinoxiale connue sous le nom de Cayenne. Langues des Caribes et des Galibis, pp. 505—514 of Vol. VIII of: Cottet de Gebelik, Monde Primitif. Paris, 1772, 4to. From Eochefort and P. Breton. Keprint, pp. 319 — 327 of: J. B. Sokeeee, Becherches Historiques et Geogra- phiques surleNouveau Monde. Paris, Brunet, 1777, 12mo. Vocabulaire Frau9ais et Galibi, h, I'usage de ceux qui voyagent dans les contrees de la Guyane et h, Cayenne, pp. 371 — 400 of: Voyage ^ la Guyane et h, Cayenne, fait en 1789 et dans les amines suivantes, par L. M. B., Armatexir. Paris, Tom. VI (1798), 8vo, pp. 400. No actual voyage, but a mere superficial compilation made by Louis Prud- homme, from other writers. Heevas, Vocabulario poliglotto, pp. 237, 241 (numerals). Heetas, Saggio, p. 112. Heevas, Origine, Tabb. L et seq, SmithBaeton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies. (Galibi, Caraibes.) WlLi.. HiLiHOirsE, Vocabulary of Eighty-two Nouns and Numerals (I 10) in the four Indian Languages of British Guyana. Caribisce, pp. 247, 248 of VoL II of the : Journal of the Eoyal Geographical Society of London. London, 1832, 8vo. Eeprinted in Vol. V of : Montgomery Martin's British Colonial Library (History of the "West Indies, Vol. II). London, 1844, 12mo, pp. 155, 156. CoLONEl Galmbo, Carib Vocabulary (of Central America), seventeen words CARIES. 31 and numeralsj 1 — 10, p. 291 of Vol. Ill of the : Joiimal of the Eoyal G-eographioal Society of London. London, 1833, 8to. AiciDE D'OebiQnt, L'Homme Am&ioain. Faris, 1839, 2 vols. Svo, Vol. II, pp. 276—399. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 655, 681, 696, 698. (From Boyer, PeUeprat, Breton, and Biet, -with comparison of the Yaoi from Laet, and the Arowaclc from Laet and Quandt.) Baibi, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 576 (Caribe prfes du Cap Nord — Guyane Fran9aise — He Dominique — He Gruadeloupe). GiTBTATE DB EiOHTHAii, Eapport des Languea Caribe et Polyn&ienne (pp. 253 —269), and : Eapport des Langues Caribe et Ouolofe (pp. 990—304), of Vol. II of the : M^moirea de la Soci^te Ethuologique. Paris, Veuve, Dondey-Dupr^ 1845, Sto ; with comparative vocabularies, viz., Caribe and Guarani, p. 256, note 1 ; Caribe and Polyndsien, pp. 261, 262 ; Caribe, Sioux, and Polynesien, p. 264 ; Caribe and Ouolofe, pp, 303, 304. Some Charihbee Words compared with Mohegan and Hebrew. Pp. xxviii — xxx of: EzEKiEi Sanpoed, a History of the United States before the Revolution, with some account of the Aborigines. Philadelphia, Anthony Finley, 1819, Svo. Same, compared with Mohegan, Greek, and Hebrew. Pp. 102, 103 of: BliaS BouDiMOT, A Star in the West, etc. Trenton, W. J., 1816, Svo. A. D'Obbignt, L'Honune Americaiu. Vol. I, p. 162 (Galibi, Kitemoca, Taoia), Vol. II, p. 274 (Caribs), and Tab. to p. 276 (Galibi and Caribs of the AntiUes). A short Taoi Vocabulary, compared with Shebay and Arrowao. Pp. 642, 643 of : Joan, de Laet, Novus orbis. Lugduni Batavorum, 1633, folio. Sib Robebt H. Schometjegk, Ccmparative Vocabulary of Eighteen Words of Twelve Dialects of the Caribi-Tamanakan stock, viz., Caribisi, Accaway, Macusie, Arecuna, Soerikong, Waiyamara, Guinau, Maiongkong, Woyawai, Mawakwa, Pianoghotto, and Tiverighotto. Pp. 97, 98 of his Vocabularies of Eighteen Lan- guages and Dialects of Indian Tribes inhabiting Guyana. (British Association Eeport, Swansea meeting, 1848.) London, 1849, Svo. SiE EoBBBT ScHOMBUEGE, A Vocabulary of the Maiongkong Language. Pp. 217—223 of Vol. IV of the : Proceedings of the Philological Society. London, 1850, Svo. Sib Eobeet Schombitb&k, Gninau Vocabulary, and affinity of words in the Guinau with other languages and dialects in America, in his " Contributions to the Philological Ethnography of South America." Pp. 208—237 of Vol. Ill of the : Proceedings of the Philological Society. London, 1848, Svo. Vocabulary of Eighteen Words compared with Arawak, Accaway, and Warau. Pp. 297, 298 of: W. H. Beett, Indian Tribes of Guyana. New Tor^, 1852, 12mo. GKAMMAKS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES; P. PiEEBE Peilepeai. See Vocabularies above. 32 CATAWBA — CAYAPOS. P. Eatmoni) Beeton, Grammaire Caraibe. Auxerre, Grilles Bouquet, 1668, 8to. D. L. S., Essai de G-rammaire G-alibi's. Sje Vocabularies above. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 685—696. (from the extracts made by P. Sebast. Garcia from the MS. Grammar of P. Feen. Ximenez.) On the Carib language as spoken by females, see : Cheistoph Meinbes Ges- ohichte des weibliohen Gesohleohts. Hcmover, Helwing, 1V88 — 1800, 4 vols. 8to, Vol. I, pp. 47— CATAWBA— KUTAHBA. Indians of Tennessee and South Carolina. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Smith Bahton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 308 (from Smith Barton). Baiei, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 794. No. VII, 41, of the Comparative Vocabulary, pp. 305 — 367 to : A. Gallatin's Synopsis (Arohseologia Americana, Vol. II). (From Smith Baeton and MS. authority of J. L. Miilee.) And No. D, VIII, pp. 94 — 96 of the vocabularies in Vol. II of the : Transactions ] of the American Ethnological Society. i Comparison of the Languages of the ancient Waceoa of North Carolina, and > the Catawba of South Carolina. Pp. f 57, 558 of Vol. V of : SCHOOiiOEArT's Indian 3 Tribes of the United States. \ CATHLASCONS. On the Columbia Eiver^ Oregon. Nearly related to the Chinooks and Haeltzucks. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Vocabulary by John Scottlbb, M.D. Pp. 243, 245, 247 of Vol. XI of the: Journal of the Boyal Geographical Society of London. London, 1841, 8vo. CAYAPOS. Indian tribe of the Aldeia S. Jos^ de Messamedes, in the Bra- zilian province of Goyaz. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. J. E. PoHli, Beise im Innern von BrasUien. >FeM»ar, 1832, 2 vols.4to. Vol.1, p. 447. CAYUBABAS CAYUGA. 33 CAYUBABAS. Indians of " los Moxos," in north-eastern Bolivia, on the Rivers Mamore and Yacuma, Mission Exaltacion. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Hebtas, Origine, Tabb. L et seq, Heetas, Vocabulario poliglotto,pp. 161 et seq. Hebtas, Saggio, pp. 63, 64. Heetas, Aritmetica, pp. 102, 103. Mithridates, Yol. Ill, pp. 571, 576, Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 466. A. D'Obbi&nt, L'Homme Amerioain, Vol. I, pp. 162, 164 ; Vol. II, p. 208. GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. A. D'Obbignt, L'Homme Americain. Vol. II, pp. 255, 256. CAYUGA, GOGOYANS, QUEUGUES. Tribe of the Iroquois, and one of the original five nations. WORDS AND VOCABULARlJiS. Hebtas, Vocabulario Poliglotto, p. 239 (numerals;. Smith Baeton, New Views — Comparative Vocabularies, and p. 20 of the Appendix to the edition of 1798. And from him, No. V, e, of the ; Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis (Archeeologia Americana, Vol. II, p. 376). Mithridates, Vol. Ill, Part 3, pp. 318, 334, 335 (from Baetou and Dean). Baibi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 799. Cayuga Vocabulary, by Bev. Adam Eiliot, of Tuscarora. Appendix L, pp. 271 — 277, to : Henry R. Schoolcraft's Notes on the Iroquois. Hew York, Bartlett and Welford, 1846, 8vo. Also: New York State Documents, No. 24, in Senate, January 22,1846; and pp. 393—400 (Comparative Vocabulary of the Iroquois) of the same work, edited as a book : Albany, Pease and Co., 1847, 8vo. And pp. 482 — 493 of Vol. II of : Sohooicbaet's Indian Tribes of the United States. An extract from this Vocabulary is given under E. V. 4, p. 115, of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of; American Ethnological Society's Transactions, F 34 CJSKIS — CHAYMA. CERIS. Indians of Sonora, occupying the Island of Tiburou, in the Gulf of California. WORDS AND VOCABULARIKS. A Vocabulary has been taken by John R. Baetlett, United States Boundary Commissioner (see : Personal Narrative, Vol. I, pp. 463 — 466). CHAPAOURA, HUAOHI. Indians of Bolivia, near the Mission Carmen, on the Rio Blanco. The Quitemoca tribe speak a different dialect. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. A. D'OnEiajiT, L'Homme Americain, Vol. II, p. 208. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. A. D'Obbight, L'Homme Amfericain, Vol. II, pp. 220, 221. CHAYMA. Indian nation of Venezuela, department of the Orinoco, on the rivers Guarapiche, Areo, and Caripe, province of Cumana ; once powerful, now nearly extinct. Their language is closely related to the Tamanaca. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. P. Feancisoo de Tatjste, Arte y Vooabulario de la Lengua de los Indios Chaymas, Cumauagotos, Cores, Parias y otros dirersos de la provincia de Cumana 6 ueuva Andalusia : con un tratado a lo ultimo de la dootrina Christiana y catecismo de los misterios de nuestra Santa Fe ; traducido del Castellano en la dicha Lengua Indiana. Madrid, Bern, de Villa Diego, 1680, 4to, pp. 16, 187. A. TON Humboldt and A. Bonplahd, Voyage aux Eegions Equinoxialea du NouTeau Continent. Faris, SchoU and Dufoui-, 1799-1840, 4 vols. 4to ; and Atlas in folio. Edition in 8vo, ibid, 1816-1831, 13 vols. German translation : A. TON Humboldt and A. Bonpland, Eeise in die Aequinoctial Gegenden des Neuen Continents. Stuttgart and Tubingen, 1818, 8vo, pp. 213—229, 258—261. A. D'O'ebiont, L'Homme Americain, Vol. II, p. 136. CHEMEIINEVIS CHEPEWYAN. 35 GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. P. Feancisco de Tattstb, see Vocabularies. Humboldt and Bonpiand, see Vocabularies. CHEMEHNEVIS. A band of Pah-utaJis (Utahs of the River), belonging to the great Shohonee family. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. CheraelmeTi Vocabulary, taken by Lietit. A. W. Whipple, pp. 71 — 76 of the Eeport- upon the Indian Tribes, added to his : Report on the Route near the 35th Parallel (Vol. II of the ; Pacific Bailroad Eeports. ^ow/iJMy^ore, 1855, 4to) . CHEPEWYAN. Vateb, calls this language the foundation of all the North American dialects — a kind of court tongue spoke q by the chiefs of the different nations. The first attempt at a grammar is said to have been made at Cazenovia, by a chief of the name of Sahgah-jewagah-Bahweh. Gallatin ranks theChepewyan among the Athapascan family of languages — a theory adopted likewise by Pmchard, Latham, and Buschmann. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Vocabulary of the Indians on the north-west part of the Hudson's Bay, p. 206 — 211 of: Aethtte DoBBg, An Account of the Countries adjoining to Hudson's Bay in the north-west part of America ; containing, etc. etc. — to which are added .V Vocabularies of the languages of several Indian nations adjoining to Hudson's Bay. London, 1744, 4to, map, pp. 211. Eeprint, pp. 181, 182, 183 of: Buschmann's Athapaskischer Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856, 4to. Example of the Chepewyan Tongue, pp cxxix — cxxxii of : Albz. Mackeitzie, Voyages from Montreal through the Continent of North America I/ondon, Cadell, jun., and Davis, 1801, 4to, maps, pp. viii, cxxxii, 412, 2. Keprint, pp. 180, 181 — 183 of: Buschmann's Athapaskischer Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856, 4to. P. 145 of the German translation printed at Sambwrgh, 1802, 8vo. Pp. 304 — 310 of the French translation, by Castera. Paris, Dentu, 1807, 8vo. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 424 (from Mackenzie). Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 821. Vocabulary after Mackenzie, No. 6 (III) of the Comparative Vocabulary of 36 CHEllENTES. Fifty-three Nations, in A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc., pp. 305 — 367 of Vol. II of : Archseologia Americana. Keprinted under M. Ill, 1, p. 105 of the Vocabularies, in ; Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II. Peopessob W. W. Tuenee (from Mackenzie), Comparative Vocabulary of Twenty-five Words of Chepewyan, Hudson's Bay, Dogrib, TJmkwa, Hoopah, Taoully, Navajo, and Apache, pp. 84, 85 of the : Report upon the Indian Tribes, added to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Ileport (Vol. II of the : Pacific Bailroad Keports). Washington, 1855, 4to. Vocabulary of the principal Indian Dialects in use among the Tribes in the Hudson's Bay Territory — Chippewayan, pp. 323 — 328 of Vol. II of: John M'Lean, Notes of a Twenty-five Years' Service in the Hudson's Bay Territory. London, K. Bentley, 1849, 3 vols. 8vo, pp. 308 and 328. J. HowSE, Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Languages — Chepe- vpyan, I and II ; Beaver, I and II ; Sitanni Dialect of New Caledonia (pp. 191 — 198 of: Proceedings of Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1854). Sir John Richardson, Arctic Exploring Expedition (London, 1851, 2 vols. Svo), contains in Vol. II the following Vocabularies : — Vocabulary of the Chepewyan Tongue (by Mes. M'Pheeson), with Cree and English Translations, pp. 387 — 395. Kutchin and Chepewyan Vocabulary, pp. 382 — 385. J. H. Lepeot, a Vocabulary of Chepewyan and Dogrib Words, pp. 400, 401. Mes. M'Pheeson's Vocabulary reprinted, pp. 174—177, 182, 183 of: Busch- mann, Athapaskischer Sprachstamm. Serlin, 1856. 4to. Chepewyan, compared with Tahcully, Eutchin, ' Dogrib, Sussee, Tlatikanai, and tTmpqua (pp. 174 — ^222) ; and, compared with the same, the Eiuai languages, Kolosohian, Navajo, and Ticorilla, pp. 269 — 318 of: BusCHMANir, Athapaskischer Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856, 4to. GKAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Grammatical Notices on the Chippewyan Language, as Athapasca, are given by A. Gallatin, pp. 215, 216, 269 (Cheppeyan) of Vol. II of: Archieologia Americana. CHEEENTES, CHAVANTES. Brazilian Indians on the banks of the Eiver Tocantins (and the Araguay)— Maktitjs, No. 75, 76, Xavantes, Xerentes. They are total savages, and hostile to the other tribes of Brazilian Indians. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Langue des Chferentes ou Xerentes de la Eivifere de Tocantins, province de Goyaz (Chavantes). Vocabulaire II, pp. 262—264 of: Castelnatj, Vol. V, Appendice, and ! CHEROKEE. 37 Langue des Chavantes du Eio Tooantins (dialeote de oelles des CWrentes), pro- yince de Gojaz. Vooabulaire III, pp. 26i — 268. Hid. CHEEOKEE, CHILAKE. The Cherokeesj at the beginning of this century, still lived south of the Ohio, in sixty-four towns or villages, divided into Ottare (Mountain Cherokees) and Ayrate (Cherokees of the Valley). They are now west of Arkansas. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. J. Adaib, History of the American Indians. London, VHB, 4to, pp. 43, etc. German translation — Breslau, 1782, 8to. Smith Babton, New Views, etc. — Comparative TJocabularies. T. Sat, Voealiularies of Indian Languages, pp. Ixx — Ixxxviii of : Astronomical and Meteorological Eecords and Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken on the Expedition for Exploring the Mississippi and its Western Waters, under the command of Major S. H. Long. FMladelpMa, 1822, 8vo. Lui&i Castiglioni, Viaggio negli Stati Uniti dell' America Settentrionale, fatto . negli anui 1785, 1786, e 1787. Milano, 1790, 2 Tols. 8vo. Vol. I, pp. 259—266. Oerman translation, by A. M. Petersen. Memmingen, 1793, 2 toIs. 8vo ; Vol. I, pp. 322—328. Annual Report on the Civilization of the Indian Tribes. Kewhaven, 1824, 8vo, pp. 58-62. No. VIII, 42, of the Comparative Vocabulary of fifty-three nations, pp. 307 — 367 of Vol. II of: Arohseologia Americana (by Boudinot and Woecestee). Eeprinted under B, IX, pp. 82, 84, 86, 88 of the vocabularies in Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. • Pp. 398—404 Supplementary Vocabulary in Cherokee (893 Words, by Eev. S. A. Woeobsteb) ; and pp. 914 - 420, Select Sentences, ibid. Mithridatcs, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 292, 304, 305. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 791. The Library of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia possesses the following MSS., presented to it by Thomas Jefferson : — Vocabulary of the Cherokee, by Jitdge Campbell. Vocabulary of the Cherokee (over Hill) and Choctaw, by Benjamin Hawxins. Vocabulary of the Creek, Chicasaw, Cherokee, and Choctaw, by the same. Cherokee numerals (1—300 millions) by William Buileb. Pp. 209 — 211, Vol. II. of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States. 38 CHRTIMACHA. GEAMMAUS AND GBAMMATICAL KOXICES. Cherokee Alphabet. Boston, s. a., folio. John Pickeking-, EemaAa on the Indian Languages of North ianerica, s. 1., 1836, 8vo. Eeprint of an article in the : Encyclopaedia Americana, Tol. VI (1831). German translation — TJeber die Indianisehen Sprachen Amerika's iibersetzt und mit Anmerkungen begleitet Ton Talvj (Mas. Bobikson, wife of Dr. Robin- son, of New York). Leipzig, Vogel, 1834, 8to, pp. viii, 80. (Cherokee, pp. 44 — 51, and note 5, pp. 58^72 on Sequoyah's Alphabet.) John Piceeeik&, A Grammar of the Cherokee Language. Boston, Mission Press, 1830, 8vo. Only four sheets (pp. 9 — 40) printed ; by the inrention of Sequoyah's new alphabet, the work was stopped in its further progress. Kurre Grammatik der Tscherokesisohen Sprache. Von Dr. H. C. TON DEE G-AEEIENTZ, pp. 257 — 300 of: Hoefer's Zeitschrift. Extracts from John Pickering's Grammar, and answers to grammatical queries, by BeT. S. A. Wokoester, missionary to the Cherokees, pp. 239—250. Cherokee Transitions, p. 276; and Notes to the Transitions, pp. 291 — 294. New Cherokee Alphabet, p. 301 of A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc., in Vol. II of: Archseologia Ame- ricana. Ber. S. A. Woeoester's Bemarks on the Principles of the Cherokee, in answer to questions transmitted under the direction of the Bureau of Indian Affairs. Pp. 443—456 of Vol. II of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States. Cherokee Primer. Fark Sill, Ark. Mission Press, John Candy, printer, 1840, 18mo, pp. 24. Beprinted, Hid., 1846, 18mo, pp. 24. Cherokee A-lphabet, p. 11 ; brief specimens of Cherokee Grammatical forms. Pp. 12, 13, 30-32, 95, 96, 111, 112, 142—144 of Vol I of: The Cherokee Mes- senger (Nos. 1 — XII, August, 1844, to May, 1846), Cherokee Baptist Mission Press, 8vo. Cherokee Alphabet, one sheet in piano. Printed at the same press. H. Upham, printer. OHETIMAOHA. Indians of Louisiana. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Vocabulaire de la Langue des Chetimachas, pp. 73—84 of: J. S. Vatee Analelten der Sprachenkunde. Leipzig, 2' Heft, 2te Haelfte, 1821, 8vo. Baoti, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 759. No. 49, XIV, of the : Comparative Vocabulary of Fifty -three Nations, pp. 305— CHIAPANBCAS — CHIMaNO. 39 367 of A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc., in Vol. II of: Arcbseologia Americana (from DuKAiDE), and No. D, XIV, pp. 95—97 of Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. A Vocabulary of the Chetimachas by Maetin Dubalde. MS. in the Library of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia. OHIAPANEOAS. Indians of the Mexican province of Chiapas. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Fb. db Cepeda, Artes de las Lenguas Chiapa, Zoque, Celdales y Cinaoanteca Mexico, 1560, 4to. CHIKKASAS, CHICACITAS. Indians of Alabama^ on the Mobile Eiver, now of Arkansas. The Conchas of Florida West spoke the same language; also the Mohilians. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Pp. 38 et seq. in : J. Adaik, History of the American Indians. London, 1775, 4to, pp. 464. Oerman translation — Breslau, 1782, 8to. Smith Baeton, New Views, etc. — ComparatiTe Vocabularies. (Chikkasah, Conehac, Mobilian.) Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 292, 304, 305. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, Wo. 789. No. IX, 44, of the : Comparatiye Vocabulary of Fifty-three Nations, pp. 305 — 367 of A. Gallatin's Synopsis in Vol. II of : Archaeologia Americana. (By A. Gailatin, from a Chicasa boy.) Benjamin Hawkins, Vocabulary of the Creek, Chickasaw, Cherokee, and Choctaw. MS. in the Library of the American Philosophical Society at Phila- delphia. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 295—302. CHIMANO, KULINO, TIKUNA. Indian tribes in the southern part of Hyabary, province of Solimoes, Brazil. A part of the Chimanos live in the south of Nueva (xranada^ on the shores of the Putumajo River, and are called Tikuna. 40 CHIMMESYANS— CHI?IUK. WOKDS AND VOCABULARIES. Balbi, Atlas Ethnograpliique, Tab. XLI, No. 539. CHIMMESYANS. Indians of the north-west coast, from 55° 30' to 53° 30' north latitude. Their language is similar to that spoken by the TacuUies or Carriers. WOEDS AND TOOABXTLAEIES. Vocabulary, by John Scotoee, pp. 231, 233, 235 of: Journal of the Koyal Geographical Society of London, Tol. XI. London, 184X, 8vo ; and H. XX, p. 103, of the Tooabularies in Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. CHINANTEKA, OINAICANTEQUA. Indians of Oajaca, Mexico, in the partidos of Quiechapa, Jala- log, and Chuapan. GEAMMAHS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. I"e. be Cepeda, Artes de las Lenguaa Ohiapa, Zoque, Oeldales y Oinacanteca. Mexico, 1560, 4to. OHINUK. Indians of Oregon, on the right bank of the Columbia Eiver. WOEDS AND VOCABULARIES. C. S. KArnrasQtrE, Atlantic Journal and Friend of Knowledge. PUladeVpUa, 1832, 1833, 870, p. 134. Gaee. Feahcheee, Eelation d'un Voyage S, la C6te Nord-ouest de I'Am&ique aeptentrionale dans lea ann&s 1810—1814. Montreal, 1820, 8vo. English translation, by J- V. Huntington — New York, Kedfield, 1854, 12mo ; and in A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.. Appendix, Miscellaneous Vocabu- laries, No. XXVIII, 63, p. 379 of Vol. II of: Arohaeologia Americana. Journal of the Boyal Geographical Society of London, Vol. XI. Zondon, 1841, 8vo, pp. 243 — 245, 247 : Vocabulary, by John Scouiee, M.D. Tshinuk Words ; see Vocabularies of North-western America in : Hoeatio Hale's Ethnography and Philology of tie United States Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1840, 4to, pp, 569 — 629. CHIPPEWAY. 41 Hale, 1. c, mentions two dialects of Chinuk — Wailala (or Upper Chinooks), divided into Watlala proper (Cascade Indians) and Mhaloitih (Echeloots) ; and Chinooks proper, divided into IsMnub, Tlatsap (Clatsops), andWakaikams (Wahkyecrans). See also pp. 636 — 650 of the above work for a Vocabulary of, and Treatise on, tbe " Tshinuk" jargon, or Trade Language. Tbe Tschinuk (Watlala) Vocabulary of the above work (K) is reprinted under TJ, XXVI, p. 121, of the : Transaotiona of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II. The Chinuk Vocabulary (Q) of the same work is reprinted under C, XXVI, pp. 89, 91, 93, 95, JSid. Words used in the Chinook Jargon, pp. 147 — 152 of; JoEi Palmer, Journal of Travels over the Rocky Mountains to the Mouth of the Columbia Kiver, made during the years 1845 and 1846, containing .... also .... about 300 Words of the Chinook Jargon .... Cincinnati, V. A. and H. P. James, 1847, 12mo, pp. 189. A short Vocabulary of the Clatsop Dialect. See pp. 343, 344 of : Ten Tears in Oregon, by D. Lee and F, H. Feost, late of the Oregon Mission of the Methodist Episcopal Church. New York, 1844, 12mo. Vocabulary of the Chenook Language, as spoken about Fort Vancouver, pp. 336 — 338 of : Kev. Samuel Pabkeb, Journal of an Exploring Tour beyond the Kocky Mountains. Ithaca, Nem York, 1838, 12mo. Chinook Vocabidary (Appendix), pp. 342 — 349 of: Alexandee Ross, Adven- tures of the First Settlers on the Oregon or Columbia River ; being a Narrative of the Expedition fitted out by John Jacob Astor, to establish the Pacific Fur Company ; with an Account of some Indian Tribes on the Coast of the Pacific. London, Smith, Elder, and Co., 1849, 12mo, map, pp. 352. (P. 349, Words of the Chinook Jargon.) Vocabulary of the Chinook Trade Jargon, in Note 1 (pp. 548 — 551) to the article, "Philosophy of Utterance," pp. 543 — 551 iu Vol. V of : Schoolokaet's Indian Tribes of the United States. (Some further reports on this jargon are expected at Washington.) GKAMMAES AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Pp. 562—564 of: HoEATio Hale's Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition. Fhiladelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1847, 4to. Re- printed on pp. 56 — 58 of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. li. Pp. 635—646 of: Hale's Ethnography, etc. Article headed—" The Jargon, or Trade Language of Oregon." Reprinted (partly) on pp. 62 — 70 of the : Transac- tions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II. CHIPPEWAY, OJIBWAY. The principal dialect of the great Algonquin stock. The eastern Chippeways-are called Sauteux, or Ojibois. 43 CHIPPEWAY. WORDS AND VOCABULAKIES. Langue des Chippeways, pp. 521, 522, of Vol. VIII of: Cottbt de GtEBElin, Monde Primitif. Pam, 1772, 4to. A short Vocabulary of the Ohippeway Language, in : Jonathan Caevee, Three Years' Travels through the Interior Parts of North America, for more than Five Thousand Miles, containing an Account of the Grreat Lakes, with a concise History of the Genius, Manners and Customs of the Indians inhabiting the lands that lie adjacent to the Heads and to the Westward of the Great River Mississippi London, 1778, 4to, map and plates, pp. 544 (the Vocabulary, pp. 420 and following). Second edition, iorej^ore, 1779, 8vo. Reprinted at Dublin, 1779, Svo. Third edition (by Dr. T. R. Lettsom), with an Account of the Author. London, 1781, 8to. Reprinted at FMladelpMa in 1789, 8vo. Another FMladelpMa reprint, by Joseph Oruitshant, 1789, 12mo, pp. xvi, 282. (The Vocabulary on pp. 215 — 223.) A third FMladelpMa edition, by Key and Simpson, 1796, 12mo. (The Vocabulary on pp. 393 — i05.) A Boston edition, 1797, 12mo ; and one printed at Charlestown, Massachusetts, 1802, 12mo. Reprinted again under the title : J. Caevee's Travels in Wisconsin, from the third London edition. New York, Harpers, 1838, 8vo, map and plates, pp. 376. French translation, by M. de Montucla. Faris, 1784, 8vo. German translation — Hamhurg, 1780, 8vo (the Vocabulary on pp. 350 and following). J. Loira, Voyages and Travels of an Indian Interpreter and Trader, describing the Manners and Customs of the North American Indians to which is added, a Vocabulary of the Chippeway Language and a Table, showing the Analogy between the Jilgonkin and Chippeway Languages. London, Debrett, Egerton, and Co., 1791, 4to. The English and Chippeway Vocabulary, pp. 218 — 295 ; the Comparative Vocabulary, pp. 184 — 211. (A. Gallatin calls this " Eastern Chippeway.") German translation — Hamburg, 1791, 8vo. Smith Babton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies. B. D. (Batjbey DBS LoziEEEs), Voyage h. la Louisiane et sur le Continent de I'Am&ique septentrionale, fait dans les ann^es 1794 & 1798. Faris, Dentu, 1802, 8vo. (The Vocabulary on pp. 353 and following.) Peoeessoe T. Say, Comparative Vocabulary of Various Dialects of the Leimape Stock of North American Indians (Forty-five Words in Fifteen Dialects, among them Chippeway). Pp. 135—145 of: Da. Edwaeds' Observations on the Mohe- gan Language, published by John Pickering, in Vol. X of the second series of: Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society. Boston, Phelps and Famham, 1823, 8vo. Reprinted at Boston, by Little and Brown„1843 8vo. Annual Report on the Civilization of Indian Tribes. Newhaven, 1824, Svo, pp. 55—57. Indian Vocabularies— Chippeway or Chippewa. Part 4, pp. 449 359 of the CHIPPEWAY. 43 Appendix to Vol, II of: Wiii.. H. Kbatiij-o, Narrative of an Expedition to the Source of the St. Peter's River, Lake Winnepeek, Lake of the Woods, etc. etc., performed in the year 1823 under the cominand of Stephan H. Long. FhiladelpMa, Carey and Lea, 1824, 2 vols. 8vo, map and plates. Keprinted at London, by Whittaker, 1825, 2 vols. 8vo. Vocabulary of the Algio, or Chippeway Language, pp. 487 — 493 of the Appendix to : Thomas L. MoKjsnnbt, Sketches of a Tour to the Lakes, of the Character and Customs of the Chippeway Indians, and of Incidents connected with the Treaty of Fond du Lac ; also, a Vocabulary of the Algio, or Chippeway Language, formed in part, and, as far as it goes, upon the basis of one furnished by the Hon. Albert Gallatin. Baltimore, Fielding Lucas, 1827, 8vo, plates, pp. 494. Ojibway Words and Phrases, pp. 399 — 418 of: Db. Edwin James, A Narrative of the Captivity and Adventures of John Tanner, United States Interpreter at the Saut de St. Marie, during Thirty Years' Kesidence among the Indians. New York, Carvill, 1830, 8vo, plates, pp. 426 (pp. 294—312, 399—417). HENBTt K. ScHOOLCEArT, A Vocabulary of Words and Phrases in the Chippe- way Language (comprising the Letters A and B, and stating at the end that cir- cumstances prevented the insertion of the remainder of this Vocabulary), on pp. 203 — 210 of his : Narrative of an Expedition through the Upper Mississippi to Itaska Lake, the actual Source of this River. New YorJc, Harpers, 1834, 8vo, maps, pp. 307. Words under TV, 8, of: Comparative Vocabulary of Fifty-three Nations, in A. Gallatin's Synopsis in : Archaeologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 305 — 367. Re- printed under A, IV, pp. 78, 80, 82, of Vol. II of : American Ethnological Society's Transactions. (From Sohoolceait, James, and Keatin&.) Eastern Chippeways, under IV (e) of the : Comparative Vocabulary of Sixteen Tribes. Ibid., pp. 369 (from J. Long). Reprinted under N, IV, 3, p. 107 of the Vocabularies in : American Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. II, pp, 414, 416. Ihid. " Select Sentences." Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 415, 416 (from Cabteb, LoNa, and BAtJDBT DIS LOZIJSBES). Baxbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 818 (Chippeway propre ou Ochippeway) . Eeise des Pbinzen MAXiMiLiAif zv Wied in das Innere Nord Amerika's in den Jahren 1832 bis 1834. Cohlenz, Hoelscher, 1838-1841, 2 vols. 4to, Vol. II, pp. 592—599. Translated into French. Paris, Bertrand, 1843, 3 vols. 8vo. Sauteu or Ogibois Vocabulary (Eastern Chippeways), in the Vocabulary of the Principal Indian Dialects in use among the Tribes in the Hudson's Bay Territory, pp. 323—328 of Vol. II of: John M'Lean, Notes of a Twenty -five Years' Service in the Hudson's Bay Territory. London, Bentley, 1849, 3 vols. 12mo. Ebt. M. Heckeweldee, Comparative Vocabulary of Lenni-Lennape proper, 44 CHIPPEWAY. the Miuai Dialect, the Mahicanni, Natick, or Nadic Chippeway, Shawano, and JSTanticoke. MS. in the Library of the American Philosophical Society at Phila- delphia. Numerals of— I. Ojibway of Chegoimegon, by W1H.IAM W. Wabeen (1— billion, and 1—10 in the Pillagers, or Northern Ojibway Tongue), pp. 211 —213. II. Chippewa of the Upper Mississippi, by M. Faiebanks (1—100,000), pp. 216—218. And Ojibway (Vocabulary), Analytical Forms, with Comments, pp. 412 — 416, 417 — 419 of: Schooioeaet's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. III. . Vocabularies I, Algonquin Group. Ojibwa of St. Mary's, by G-. Johnston ; Ojibwa of Grand Travene Bay, by Eev. P. Dougheety ; Ojibwa of Saganaw, by G. MoEACT; Ojibwa of Michilimackinac, by W. Johnston, on pp. 458—469 of Vol. II of : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States. Kev. Feed. Baeaga, A Dictionary of the Otchipwe Language, explained in iEnglish. This language is spoken by the Chippewa Indians, as also by the Otawas, Potawatamies, and Algonquins, with but slight differences. For the use of mis- sionaries, etc. Oincinnati, printed by Jos. E. Heemann, 1853, 12mo,_pp. Tii, 662. Comparative Vocabulary of Pamptico, Natic, and Chippewa (sf Michigan), pp. 556, 557 of Vol. V of ; Sohooloeapt's Indian Tribes of the United States. A Lexicon of the Algonquin Language, part 1, Chippewa, A, pp. 565 — 569. Ibid, Comparative Chippewa and Mahican Vocabulary of Twenty-two Words, p. 620. Xlid. GRAMMAES AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Edwin James, Outline of the Paradigma of a Chippeway Vocabulary .... H. a Albany, folio. A. BiNQHAM, Ojibwa Spelling-book, according to the improved orthography of Edwin James. Albany, 1825, 8vo. ' Heney a. Sohoolcbaet, Two Lectures on the Chippewa Substantive. Pp. 169 — 202 of: Narrative of an Expedition .... to Itasca Lake. New York, Harpers, 1834, 8vo, map, pp. 307. Part of a course of Lectures on the Grammatical Structure of tlie Indian Languages, delivered before the St. Mary's Committee of the Algic Society. The continuation of these lectures (Lectures III and IV) is published in: Heney A. Schoolceaft, Oneota, or the Bed Race of America Neio Yorh, Purges, Stringer, and Co., 1844-45, 1 vol. (Nos. 1—8) 8vo, pp. 512 (pp. 93—104,221—232). Gailaudet, Picture-definer and Reading-book. Boston, Crocker and Brewster, for the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, 1835, 12mo, pp. 123. Ojibwa SpeUing-book, designed for the use of native learners. Printed for the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions. Boston, Crocker and Brewster, 1835, 12mo, second edition, pp. 127. Third edition, ibid., 1846, 12mo, pp. 96. CHIQDITOS. 45 Chippeway Nouns (from Sohoolceai't's Lectures), pp.244 — 248 of: A. Gal- latin's Synopsis, etc., in Vol. II of : Archseologia Americana. Chippewa Tran- sitions, ibid., p. 289. Bet. &. A. Beicoubt, Priucipes de la Langue des Sanvages appel& Sauteux. Quebec, imprimerie de IVecliette and Co., 1839, 12mo, pp. 146. A Chippeway Primer, compiled by the K.EV. Petee DoijaHERTY. Printed for the Board of Foreign Missions of the Presbyterian Church. New York, John WestaU, 1844, 12mo, pp. 44. Second edition, ibid., 1847, 12mo, pp. 123. Short Reading Lessons in the Ojibway Language, translated by the Eet. Peteb DouOHEETT. New York, John Westalland Co., 1847, 12mo. Joseph Howse, A Grammar of the Cree Language, with which is combined an Analysis of the Chippeway Dialect. London, Eivington, 1844, 8vo, pp. xx, 324. Edwin James, M.D., Essay on the Chippeway Language. Head before the American Lyceum, at the third annual meeting, in the city of New York, May 3rd, 1838, pp. 73—80 of No. V of: The North American Savages (September, 1835), 8to. Eet. Feed. Baeaaa, missionary at L'Ance, Lake Superior, A Theoretical and Practical Grammar of the Otchipwe Language. Detroit, printed by Jabez Fox, 1851, 12mo, pp. 576. The Transitions called " Chippeway," in : J. S. Vatee, Analekten der Sprachkunde. Leipzig, 1821, 8to. Heft 2, pp. 15 — 20, are " Delaware.'' Bet. Thomas Hueleut, A Memoir on the Inflections of the Chippewa Tongue. Pp. 383—396 of Vol. IV of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States. Conjugation of the Verb " Waub." See pp. 291 — 388 of : Soeeooioeaft's Indian Tribes of the United States. Original Words of Indian Songs literally translated. Chippewa. Pp. 559 — 564, ibid. Etymology (Chippewa), pp. 593 — 600, ibid. Some Data respecting the Principles of the Chippewa and Mahican Languages, in a series of letters written during the years from 1822 — 1827. Chippewa. Pp. 601-618, ibid. CHIQUITOS. In South America, on the Upper Paraguay, between the Chaco and Brazil. WORDS AND YOCABULAEIES. Gilii, Saggio, etc., Vol. Ill,- pp. 244—248, 334-339 (from the MS. notices of Padee Camako). Heetas, Vooabolario, pp. 163 et seq. 46 CHOCTAW. Heevas, Origine, pp. 27, 29, 37, 41, 44, 48, Tabb. JLIX, L, LI. Heevas, Saggio, pp. 99 — 101. Mithi-idates, Vol. Ill, pp. 554, 570. Baibi, Atlas Ethnograpbique, Tab. XLI, Wo. 463. Vocabulary of Twenty- tbree Words. Vol. I, p. 164, of: Alcide D'Oebiskt, L'Homme Americaiu. Paris, 1839, 2 vols. 8to. Vol. II, p. 136, three words of tbe Cuciguia dialect. , Vooabulaire, No. XIV, Langue des Chiquitos, in : Fe. de Castexnau, Expedi- tion, Vol. V, Appendice, pp. 286—288. Vocabnlario de la Lengua Chiquita. Parte 1" : Espanol y CHquito. 1 Tol. 4to, of nearly 700 pages. Parte 2" : Chiquito y Espanol del Pueblo de S. XaTier (where it was composed by the Jesuits) . One vol. folio, of about 700 pages, two columns on every page. MS. in the possession of M. Aloide D'Orbigny. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. GiMl, Saggio, Vol. Ill, pp. 244-248, 334-339. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp 559-563. D'Oebiqnt, L'Homme Am&ioain, Vol. I, pp. 134—136; Vol. II, pp. 161— 163, and p. 180 (Curuminaca tribe), p. 182 (Covareoa tribe), p. 184 (Curavfes tribe), p. 185 (Tapiis tribe). CHOCTAW, CHAHTAH. Indians of the Appalachian stock. Their language is closely related to those of the Chikasas and of the Muskoghees. The French in Louisiana used the Choctaw language for their com- munications with other Indian tribes. They live now west of Arkansas. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. LuiQi CASTiaiiONi, Viaggio negli Stati Uniti dell' America settentrionale, etc. Milcmo, 1790, 2 vols. 8vo (Vol. I, pp. 259-266). German translation by A. M. Petersen. Memmingen, Seller, 1793, 8vo (pp. 322—328). Smith Baeton', New- Views — Comparative Vocabularies. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 292, 298, 304, 305. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XI, No. 790. Choctaw Numerals, by John Deennen-, United States Agent, pp. 204—206 of Vol. II. of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States. Some Words from the Language of the Choctaws (18, of which 14 are numerals), by Lewis Beantz, 1785, p. 347 of Vol. Ill of the same work. CHOLO. 47 No. IX, 43, of the: Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 307 — 367) to A. Gallatin's Synopsis in Vol. II of: Arehteologia Americana (from Wright's Spelling-book), and : Chocta Vocabulary, by Alpeed WuiaHT, ibid., pp. 371—396. Also : Com- parative Vocabulary of tbe Chocta and Muskoghee (97 words out of 600 which have certain affinities), i5id., pp. 405, 406. No. IX, 43, reprinted as B, X 1, pp. 82, 84, 86, 88, of the Vocabularies in Vol. II. of : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. The com- parative vocabulary, ibid., p. cxii. MS. Vocabularies of the Cherokee (over Hill) and Choctaw j and of the Creek, Chickasaw, Cherokee, and Choctaw — both by Benjamin Hawkins — are in the Library of the.Amerioan Philosophical Society at Philadelphia. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 300—302 (from Adaie, pp. 38, 39, 41, 44, 68, 70—73). A Spelling-book written in the Chahtah Language, with an English translation. Second edition, revised. Cincinnati, printed by Morgan, Dodge, and Fisher, 1827, 8vo. Chahta HoHsso. Boston, Crocker and Brewster, for the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, 1830, 12mo, pp. 108. Third edition, revised, ibid., 1835, 12mo, p. 72. Chahta Holisso, it im Anumpuli ; or, the Choctaw Header. For the use of native schools. Union, printed for the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, by John F. Wheeler, 1836, 12mo, p. 123. Cteus Btinston, An English and Choctaw Definer for the Choctaw Academies and Schools .... 18mo, pp. 252. Neio Turk, 1852. Ctetts ByiNaTON, Choctaw Vocabulary, pp. 62 — 64 of the : Eeport upon the Indian Tribes, added to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Eeport in Vol. II of: Pacific Bailroad Keports. Washington, 1855, 4to. CHOLO, OHOCO. Indians of Nueva Granada, from the Gulf of San Miguel to the Bay of Choco^ and thence, with a few interruptions, to the northern parts of Equador. WORDS and tocabulakies. Cholo Vocabulary, by JDe. Edwaed Cullen ; and Comparison of the Oholo with the Languages of the Oronoco, by De. K. Gr. Latham, p. 190 of part 2 of Vol. XX of: Journal of the Eoyal Geographical Society. London, John Murray, 1851, 8vo. Pp. 179^181 of: Beethold Sbeman, The Aborigines of the Isthmus of Panama, in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. Ill, p. 1. 48 CHONDAL CHOW-E-SHAK. CHONDAL. Language spoken by the Indians of Chontalesj on the northern shores of the Lake of Nicaragua. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. E. Geo. Squiee, Nicaragua iVew TorJc, Appleton, 1852, 2 vols. 8vo. Vol. II, pp. 314, 324, 325 (from Jut. Fkoebel), and : Xransactioiia of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. Ill, part 1, pp. 101, 106 — 110. CHOROTEGANS. Indians of Nicaragua to the north of the Mexican inhabitants of Nicaragua (the Niquirans),^3etweea. the Pacific Ocean, Lake Managua, and the Gulf of Fonseca. They are divided into — Chorotegans proper, or Dirians ; Nagrandans, in the plain of Leon ; and Orotinans, in the district of Guanacaste. WORDS AND VOCABDLARIES. E. Geo. Squier, Nicaragua New York, Appleton, 1852, 2 vols. 8to. Vol. II, pp. 32Q — 333, Dirian from Masaya ; and : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. Ill, part 1, pp. 101, 106—110. CHORTI. On the banks of the Motagua, in Guatemala. A language related to the Maya and Poconchi. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. A short Vocabulary, taken by John L. Stephens, at Zacapa, is given in: A. Gallatin's Notes on the Semi-oivilized Nations of Mexico. (Vol. I of: Trans- actions of the American Ethnological Society.) New York, Bartlett and Welford, 1845, 8to, pp. 9, 10. OHOW-E-SHAK. Indians of north-western California, on the head of Eel River. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Geoeob Gibbs, Vocabulary, Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vql. Ill, pp. 434—440. CHUNTAQUIROS COCHIMI. 49 OHUNTAQUIROS, PIEOS. Brazilian Indians in the neighbourhood of Santa Rosa, in the province of Goyaz. WOEDS AND VOCABULARIES. Langue des Chuntaquiros ou Piros (SimisenoMs) du Village dd Santa Bosa. Vocabulary, No. XVII, pp. 290, 291 of: CASTELNAir, Vol. V, Appeudioe. CINALOA, OR SINALOA. According to Heevas, three languages were spoken by the Indians of the Mexican State of Cinaloa — the Tubar, the Zoe, and the Hiaqui, which latter was the principal one. De Souza mentions : Arte de la Lengua Principal de Cinaloa, por P. Luis Bonifaz. BoNiFAz was missionary to the Indians of Cinaloa, between the years 1602 and 1644. He died in the latter year at Valladolid, in Michoacan; but probably left his MSS. in some of the reli- gious establishments of the city of Mexico. COBEU. Indians on the Amazon. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Vocabulary (of Ninety-eight Words), pp. 521—541 of: Ambed R. Wallace, A Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Eio Negro. London, Reeve and Co., 1853, 8vo. COOANAS. Brazilian Indians on the Upper Amazon (Cocuannas of Mar.- Tius? No. 334). WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Langue des Cocanas de Nauta. Vocabulaire, No. XIX, pp. 293, 294 of: Castelnatt, Vol. V, Appendice. COCHIMI. Indians of Upper California, near the Mission St. Xaverio. Related to the Laymons. H 50 COCOMARICOPAS — COCONUCOS. WORDS AND VOCABULAUIES. Heevas, Vooabolario Poliglotto, p. 161 et seq. Hebtas, Aritmetica, p. 113. Hebtas, Saggio, pp. 125, 233—237 (Dialect of St G-ertrudis). Hebtas, Origine, Tab. L et seq. Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 185, 198, 199, Cochimi and Coohimi-Laymou of the Missions S. XaTerio and Jos. Comandu ; S. Borgia and S. G-ertrudis (from Hebtas). Baibi, Atlas EthnograpHque, Tab. XLI, No. 826. A.S"OEBES, Hi&tory of California. Zqndon, 1839, 8vo. gkammars and grammatical notices. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 192—198. COCOMAHICOPAS. Indians of Sonoraj near the Eiver Gila. ■WORDS AND vocabularies. Short Vocabulary (Apache ?), collected by Lietjtenant Emoet, p. 109 of Vol. II of : American Ethnological Society's Transactions. A Vocabulary of the Cocomarieopa Language has been taken by John K. Baex- lEXT, the United States Boundary Commissioner. : Cocomarieopa Vocabulary, by Liettteitant A. W. Whippie, p. 94 of the Eeport upon the Indian Tribes j added to his Report on the Route near, the 35th Parallel, in Vol. II of : Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington, 1855, 4to. COCONUCOS. Indians of the province of Cudinamarca in Nueva Granada'. The Polindaras and Guambias are kindred tribes. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Notices and some Words of the Coconucos, Polindaras, and Guambias, given on pp. 43—45 of: Tommaso C. db Mosqueea, Memoria Sobre la Geografia Fisiea y Politica de la Nueva Grauada. Nuevo Tgrk, imprenta de J. W. Benedict, 1852, 8vo. English translation, by Theodore Dwight. Ihid., 8to. COCOPAS— COMANCHES. 51 qocoPAs. Indians of Sonora, between the Rio G-ila and the Gulf of Cali- fornia. ■WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. A Vocabulary has been taken by John E. Baetiett, XJnited States Boundary Commissioner. COMANCHES. Indians of Texas, belonging to the great Shoshonee or Snake family. They range from the sources of the Brazos and Colorado, rivers of Texas, over the great Prairies, to the waters of the Arkansas and the mountains of Rio Grande. They are also called Hietans, Jetans, and Paducas. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Comanche Names and Numerals, on pp. 273, 274 of: Wm. Bollaeet'S Ob- servations on the Indian Tribes in Texas, in Vol. II of : Journal of the Ethno- logical Society of London. London, 1850, 8vo. De. Heinhioh Beeshaus, iJber die Verwandtschaft der Schoschoneii, Komant- Bchen und Apachen, in : Physikalischer Atlas ; Geographisches Jalirbuch, 1851. N. III. Gotha, Justus Perthes, 4to, pp. 48 — 62, map. Vocabulary, pp. 51-53. Captain K. B. Maecy, Vocabularies of Words in the Languages of the Coman- ches and Witchitas. Appendix H, pp. 273 — 276 of : Bandolph B. Marcy and Geo. B. M'Clellan, Exploration of the Bed River of Louisiana, in the year 1852, Wash- ington, Nicholson, public printer, 1854, 8vo. (33rd Congr., 1 Sess., House Exec. Doe.) Comanche Vocabulary, by EoB. S. Nekjhboes, Esq., pp. 494 — 505 of Vol. II of: Schoolcraft's Indiau Tribes of the United States. Bob. S. Neiohboes, The Na-u-ni or Comanche of Texas ; their Traits and Beliefs, and their Divisions and Intertribal Relations. Ibid., pp. 125—134. (Comanche Numeration, pp. 129, 130.) Comanche Vocabulary, taken from Jesse Chisholm, a Cherokee, by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, pj. 71— 76 of the Eeport upon the Indian Tribes; added to his Eeport on the Eoute near the 35th Parallel, in Vol. II of: Pacific Eailroad Eeports. Washington, 1855, 4to. A Comanche Vocabulary has been collected by John E. Baetlett, the United States Boundary Commissioner. 53 CONCHO — CORA. •CONCHO. A dialect of the Mexican language. Bishop Juan Espinoza, Franciscan^ of the province of Zacatecas (Mexico), and Bishop of Santiago de ChUe^ wrote, according to Arlegui and De Sotjza : Arte y Vocabulario complete del Idioma Concho. CONIBOS. Indians of the Pampa del Sacramento, on the left banks of the Ucayale. ■WORDS AND vocabularies. Words, pp. 286 and 292 of: Indiens Conibos, par M. de Saint Obicq, pp. 274 —295 of Tome VI of the fourth series of: Bulletin de la Soci^t^ de Gfeographie. Paris, A. Bertrand, 1853, 8yo. COPEH. Indians of north-western California, at the Putor Creek. WORDS AND VOCABULAKIES. Q-EOEOE GiBBS, Voeahulary in: Schoolcraft's Indian Iribes of the United States, Vol. Ill, pp. 428—434. CORA. Indians of New Mexico, near the Missions of Najarit, Their language resembles very much the Mexican. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. P. Jos. DE Oeteqa, Vocabulario en Lengua Castellaua y Cora. Mexico, 1732, 4to. Mfty-two leaves. Heetas, Vocabolario Foliglotto, pp. 161 et seq. Heevas, Saggio, p. 121. Heetas, Aritmetioa, pp. Ill — 113. Heetas, Origine, pp. 29, 37,41, 44, 45, 48, 49, 118, 120, 121, 178, Tahb. XLIX, L, LI et seq. (Gives also Nayarit words.) J. S. Vatee, Proben, etc. Leipzig, 1816, 8to, pp. 353—373. Baibi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 708. COBOADOS COSTANOS. 53 GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Doctrina Cristiana, Oraoiones, Confesonario, Arte y Vocabulario de la Lengua Cora, por P. Jose Obte&a. Printed by the Bishop of Gruadalaxara, Sr.Don Nicolas Gomez de Cervantes, 1729. Voeabulario del P. Joseph de Oeteqa. Mexico, 1732, 8to. The preface contains grammatical notices. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 2, pp. 131—138. COEOADOS, COROPOS. Two Indian tribes on the banks of the rivers Paraiba and Pombaj in the Brazilian provinces Rio de Janeiro and Miiias Geraes. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. EsCHWEGE, Journal fiir Brasilien. Weimar, 1818, 8vo, 1' Heft. Bami, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, Nos. 498, 499. COEEEGUAJES. Indians of the New Granadian territory of Mocoa (formerly departamento del Assuai). WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Voeabulario Correguaje Bspaflol. Taken by the Presbytero Manttel Maria Albis, in 1854. Pp. 21 — 24 of: Los Indios del Andaqui. Topaj/an, 1855, 16mo. COSTANOS. Californian Indians' on the Bay of San Francisco, and formerly under the supervision of the Mission Dolores. There were five tribes : Ah-wash-tes , Ol-hones (called, by the Spaniards, Cos- tanos, or, Indians of the coast), Al-tah-mos, Ho-mo-nans, and Tu-lo-mos. A few other small tribes round the Bay speak the same language. words AND VOCABULARIES, Costanos Vocabulary, by Pedro Alcantara, in : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. II. Languages, Miscellaneous Vocabularies, pp. 494 — 505, and Note, p. 506. 54 COSTA RICA — CREOLE. COSTA MCA, TALAMANCA. Many Indian tribes inhabit Costa Rica^ and especially the part thereof bordering on the Atlantic^ the so-ealled district of Tala- inanea. Gaeindo names six^ Juakros twenty-six different tribes and nations. WORDS and VOCABULAIIIES. ' De. Kael Scheezee, Spraclie der wilden Indianerstamme der Blanoos, Valientes und Talamannas entlang der Ostkiiste zwischen dem Rio Zent und Boooa del Toro im Staate Costa Bica. Pp. 28—35 of Vol. XXV of: Sitzungsberichte der Philosopiiisoh-Historischeii Klasse der Koniglichen Akademie der Wissenschaften. Vienna, 1855, 8to. Also, with separate title : Sprachen der Indianer Central Amerika's. Vienna, 1855, 8to, pp. 11. Also, pp. 573—576 of: Die Bepublik Costa Kica in Central Amerika mit besonderer Beriicksiclitigung der NaturTerhaltniase uud der Frage der Deutsehen Auswanderung und Colonisation. Beisestudien und Skizzen aus der Jahren 1853,. 1854, Ton De. Moeitz Wagkeb und De. Kael Scheezee. Leipzig, 1855, 8to. • CREOLE Is the general name given in the West Indies to Negro corrup- tions of European languages. Thus the Negroes of Surinam, originally an English colony, speak Creole, or Negro-English ; those of Guadaloupe and Martinique, French colonies, Negro- French, etc. ; and, consequently, the following divisions naturally present .themselves : — Negro-English, Negro-Portuguese, Negro- Dutch, Negro-Spanish, Negro-French. I. NEaEO-ENGLISH— ■Called, by the Negroes, " Ningre-tongo," " Ningre," and also '" Bakra"— is the language used by the Negroes among them- -selves in the Dutch colony of Surinam, and with their European -masters. The language is not now what it originally was, viz., 5a -broken or corrupted English, but it has expanded into a Negro-English-Dutch language. Its general structure is English, and very many words are of English origin ; but those words which in course of time were superadded, with the new ideas they were meant to express, are not taken from the English, but the Dutch language, from which the Negro-English recruits itself CREOLE. iiO constantly ; whilst many words, originally English, have fallen into disuse, and been siipplanted by corresponding Dutcb ones. The Moravians have had a mission among the Negroes of Surinam for the last century. Their translation of the New Testament into Negro-English was first printed in 1829, and, again in 1846. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. C. L. ScHUMANir, Neger-Engliscli iind Deufcsches Woerterbuoh. Editio tertia, .1783. MS. in the poasession of the Moravians of Paramaribo. H. C. EoCKE, Neger BngelschWoordenboek. Lm/den, P. H. v. d. HeuTcl, 1855, 8vo, pp. xiii, 160. Deutach-H'eger-Englisches Worterbuch. Nebst einem Anhang Neger-Englische Spriichworter enthaltend, Ton H. R. WFLiscHiAEaEL. Lobau, 1856, 8vo, pp. x, 340. GKAMMARS AND GEAMMATICAL NOTICES. Pp. 257,' 258 of Vol. II of: Captain J. Q-. Stebmak'S Narrative of a Eive Tears' Expedition against the Revolted lifegroes of Surinam. 2 vols. 4to, Londoni 1796. Gemeenzame Leerwyze over het Bastard og Neger-Enghsch op een gematelyke Wyze te leeren verstaan en sprecten. Door Q-. C. W. Paramariho, 1798, 12mo, pp. 150. Page 117 of: Count Aibeet ton Sack's Besehreibmig einer Eeise naoh Suri- nam, etc. 1 vol. 4to, Berlin, 1821. Grammatical Remarts on Negro-English, in an article on the Negro-EngUsh New Testament in : Edinburgh Christian Instructor, Dec, 1829. A PhUologieal Analysis of the Negro-English Language, in : Wm. Geeenfieid's Defence of the Surinam Negro-English Version of the New Testament, etc. Lou- don, Bagster, 1830, 8vo, pp. 80. A. Heimig TiN DEB Veg-t, Proeve eener liandleiding om het Neger-Engelsch, zoo al§ hetzelve over het allgemeen binnen de Kolonie Surinam gesproken word. Amsterdam, 1844, 8vo. Kurzgefasste Neger-Englische Grammatik, von H. R. Wuilsohlaegei. Baut- zen, gedruckt bey Ernst Moritz Monse, 1854, 8vo, pp. 67. H. R. WuLLSCHLAEaEi/, Jets over de Neger-Engelsohe Taal en de Bijdragen tot hare OntwikkeUng en Literatuur, door de Zendelingen der Evangelische Broeder- gemeente geleverd. Paramaribo, 1854. Pp. 286 — 295 of: West Indie, Bijdragen tot de Bevordering van de Keunis der Nederlandsch West Indisohe Kolonien Eerste Deel. Haarlem, 1855, 8to. 56 CREOLE. 11. NBa-RO-POBTUairESE. Among the first settlers of Surinam were^ besides EnglisLraenj many Portuguese Jews, whose numerous slaves soon adopted, in an imperfect manner, the language of their masters, speaking a broken Portuguese, which has now vanished from the colony with the wealth of those who originally introduced it. At the present time it is only spoken by one tribe of the free Bush Negroes, the so-called Saramaccans, on the Upper Surinam, descendants of the Plantation Negroes, who, at the time of the treaty of the peace' in 1760, inhabited the forests on the Upper Saramacca, deep in the interior. These Saramacca Negroes, at least those among them who hold intercourse with the colony, understand, besides their own " Djoe-tongo" (Jew^s language), the Negro-EngHsh language. No printed specimens known. WOEDS AND VOCABULARIES. C. L. ScHTTMAKN, Woerterbuch. der Saramacca Negersprache, 1778. MS. in the possession of tlie Moravian Missionaries at Paramaribo. III. NEGEO-DtTTCH— Generally, but erroneously, called Danish-Creole — is spoken on the Danish West Indian Islands — St. Thomas, St. Croix, and St. John. There is a wide difference between this language and the Negro-English of Surinam. It is Dutch in its structure, as well as in the vocabulary, and the number of Danish, French, English, etc., words received into it is very trifling. The first book in the Creole of the Danish West Indies was printed in 1761. It contained the Litany and several hymns. The Creole New Testament was first published at Copenhagen, in 1781, next at Barby, in 1803, and again at Copenhagen, in 1818. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. C. G. A. OiDENBOEPS Q-esoHohte der Mission der Evangelischen Briider auf den Caraibischen Inseln S. Thomas, S. Croix, und S. Jan. Herausgegeben Ton J. Jao. BoBsart. JBwrby and Leipzig, Vlll, 8vo, plates. Vol. I, pp. 424—4.34. Specimens of this jargon are given in two versions of the Lord's Prayer in: Mithridates, Vol. II, pp. 252, 253, from the translation of the New Testament, published, Copenhagen, 1781, 8to, and Sarby, 1802, Svo. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICKS. J. C. KiNaos, Kreool ABC Buk. S. Croix, 1V70, 8vo. J. M. Grammatica over de Creoolske Sprog pa de Danste Bilande i America. Kjobenhann, 1770, 8vo. Oldenboeps Q-eschiclite der Missionen (see Vooabulaj-ies aboTe). IV. NEaRO-SPANISH. The Spanish-Creole language, a broken Spanish, interspersed with some Dutch words, is spoken by the Negroes of the Dutch island of Curacao. We possess no information about a Creole language of Cuba — the words given in the Glossary (below mentioned) lending no countenance to the acceptation of a special Cuban-Creole tongue. A translation of the Gospel of St. Matthew into the Creole of Curacao was printed in 1844. WORDS AND VOCABULARIFS. Gemeeuzame Zamenspraken (Conversations in Dutch and the Creole of Curasao) . Door J. J. PuTMAN. Santarosa, Ciiraqao, 1853, pp. 66, 12mo. Glossary of Creole Terms in common use in Cuba, and of those relative to Slavery and the Trade in Slaves, pp. 184 — 188 of: Poems, by a Slave in the Island of Cuba, recently liberated ; translated from the Spanish, by K.. E. Madden, M.D. London, 1840, 8vo. Note. — A Grammar of the Dutch Language, for the use of the Negroes of Cura9ao, is published under the title : Proeve eener Hollandsche Spraak- kunst, ten Gebruike der Algemeeue Armenschool, in de Gemeente van de H. EosA, op Curasao. Door J. J. Putman. Santarosa, Curasao. V. NEGKO-FKENCH. French-Creole of San Domingo, Guadaloupe, Martinique, and of Trinidad. A poem in the Creole of Trinidad, printed as a fly-sheet, is in the possession of his Highness the Brince Louis Lucien Bonaparte. A Monsieur Borde, of Trinidad, is said to have written a Creole Grammar. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. S. G. DTTCtBTTE-JoLT, Manuel des Habitants de St. Dominque, contenaut un Precis de I'Histoire de oette He depuis sa Decouverte suivi du premier Vocabulaire Fran9ais-Creole et de Conversations ]?ran9aises-Crfeole3. Faris, 1802, 2 vols. 8vo. 58 CROWS — CUMANA. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. CatecMsme en la Langue Crfeole ; precede d'un Essai de Grammaire sur I'ldiome usite dans las Colonies Fran9aise8. Paris, impr. Vrayet de Suroy, 1842, 18mo (pp. 7-20). Creole Proverbs are given in : ViCTOE Schoelchee, Les Colonies rran9aise8 ; I'Abolition Immediate de I'Esolavage. Paris, Pagnerre, 1842, 8vo. CROWS, UP-SA-RO-KA, CORNEILLES. Indians of the Missouri territoiy and Oregon. They are divided into three different tribes, speaking different dialects, viz. : 1 . Kikatsa, or Crow proper, on the banks of the Yellow Stone ; 2. Ahnahaioays, or Ahwahaways (Black-shoes or '■' Souliers noirs"), between the Mandans and Minetarees j and, 3. Alla- kaioeah, or Paunch Indians ("Indiens ventrus"), on the Snake River. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Sat, Yoeabularies, p. LXXIX. Peinzen Mazimilian zu Wikd, Keise in das Innere Word Amerikas in 1832- 1834. CohUnz, Iloelscher, 1838-1841, 2 vols. 4to, Vol. II, pp. 490. No. VI, o, of the Miscellaneous Vocabularies to A. Grallatin's Synopsis, etc., in Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana, p. 377 (from Sat). TTpsarota Vocabulary. B, VI (Sioux), 3, pp. 83, 85, 87, 89 of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. Affinities of the Upsaroka or Crow Language with that of the Sedentary Mis- souri Minetares and those of the Sioux, pp. cxv, oxvi of : American Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. II. Upsaroka and Mandan Words compared (no affinity) : Sohoolceafi's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. Ill, pp. 255, 256. CUMANA. A province'of Venezuela. See also under Chayma. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Diccionario de la Lengua de Cumana ; y Arte de la Misma, del P. Yanouas, Corregido y aumentado por Fr. Matias Blanco, 4to. Burgos, 1683. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Arte de la Lengua Cuman&, por Fe. Manuei, Tanquas, 4to. Burgos, 1683. CUNACUNA — DAHKOTAH. 59 CUNACUNA. Independent Indians of Nueva Granada, on the south-easterly side of the Isthmus. WOHDS AND VOCABULARIKS. Balbi, Atlas EthnograpHque, Tab. XLI, No. 616. OURETIJ. Indians on the Amazon. Martitjs (VII, B, 198) calls them Coretds, and says that they are settled on the Upper Apaporis. ■WORDS and vocabularies. Baibi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 520. (Ooretu.) Vocabulary (of Ninety-eigbt Words), pp. 521 — 541 of: Alfeed E. Wallace, A Narrative of Travels on tbe Amazon and Rio Negro. London, Reeve and Co., 1853, 8vo (p. 536, Comparison with the Curetii Words given by Balbi). CUSHNA. A Californian trihe on the mountains of the South Yuha. Their language is common to most of the tribes inhabiting the upper portion of the Sacramento valley. ■WORDS AND VOCABULAKIES. Cushna Vocabulary, by Mb. Johnson, United States Agent, in : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. II. Languages, Miscellaneous Vocabu- laries, pp. 494 — 505, and Notes, pp. 506 — 508. DAHKOTAH, SIOUX, NADOWESSIER. Indians between the Missouri and Mississippi, of ■vphich eleven tribes are mentioned. Heckewelder thinks they are Iroquois, but Cass claims them as a separate nation. The Assitiipoils (Assinibules, Stone-Indians), on the Lake Winnipeg, are said to be a separate tribe of the Sioux. Formerly they were called Issati. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Langue des Nadowessiens. Pp. 552, 523 of Vol. VIII of : Couet be G-ebelin, Monde Primitif, Faris, 1772, 4to. 60 DAHKOTAH. Jonathan Caetee, A Short Vocabulary of the Naudowessie Language, in : Three Years' Trarels through the Interior Parts of North Amerioa. London, 1778, 8to, pp. 4i20 et seq. In other editions— Z>Mi7m, 1779, 8vo, pp. 405—412 ; PhUadelpUa, 1789, 12mo, pp. 223—228 ; Ibid, 1796, 8vo, pp. 288—292 ; German translation, Hamburg, 1780, 8vo, pp. 356 and following. B. (attdet) D. (es Loziebes), Voyage h, la Louisiane. Paris, Dentu, 1802, 8to, pp. 348 et seq. (from Caetee and B. D). Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 265. Smith Baeton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies. Dacota, or Sioux, in the Vocabularies of Indian Languages. Appendix, part 4, Vol. IT, pp. 449— 459 of: Wm. H. Eeatino, Narrative of Major S. H. Long, Second Expedition. Philadelphia, Carey and Lea, 1824, 2 vols. 8vo. (In Chap. VIII of Vol. I, pp. 376— 439, an accurate " Account of the Dacotas, or Sioux Indians,'' is given.) The Vocabulary is prepared by Peop. Sat, and printed in the vocabularies added to the Astronomical and Meteorological Eecord of this Expedition : Philadelphia, 1822, 4to, pp. Ixxii — Ixxxviii. A Vocabulary of the Sioux Language, pp. 152 — 172 of: Caieb Atwateb, Remarks made on a Tour to Prairie du Chien, thence to Washington City, in 1829. Columbus, Isaac N. Whiting, 1831, 12mo. Sioux Vocabulary in : Geo. Catmn's Letters and Notes on the Manners, Cus- toms, and Condition of the North American Indians. Fourth edition. London and New York, Wiley and Putnam, 1842, 2 vols. 8vo, Vol. II, Appendix B, pp. 262 — 265. Baibi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. 5LI, No. 774 (Sioux, Dacotah, Tanctou). Dakota Vocabulary, by a member of the Dakota Mission (S. K. BlGOs). New York, printed by B. Craighead, 1852, 8vo, pp. 120. Reprint of the English-Dakfita part of Biggs' Dictionary. (See Grammars, under Biggs.) No. VI, Sioux (thirteen dialects, Nos. 33—40, m, ii, o, p, q. Among them, No. 34, Dakotah), in the Comparative Vocabulary, etc., to : A. GaiIiATIN's Synopsis, etc. (Archaiologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 305—367, 374, 377, 379). No. 34, reprinted under B, VI, 1, pp. 83, 85, 87, 89, of the Vocabularies in Vol. Ilof : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. Memoires de la Society Ethnologique. Paris, 1845, 8vo, Vol. II, p. 264. AfBnities of the Upsaroka or Crow Language with that of the Sedentary Mis- souri Minetares and those of the Sioux. Pp. cxv, cxvi of the : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II. Dakota Numeration (1 — billion), by Philandee Peescott, in : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. II, pp. 206 — 208. Indian (Dahkotah) Names and Writing. III. Preliminary Remarks, pp. xxiv — xxviii of: Mes. Maey Eastman, Dahuotah ; or, Life and Legends of the Sioux around Eort Snelling. Nem York, Wiley, 1849, 12mo. DAKIEN. 61 ' Ed. TTmbretillb, The Present State of Hudson's Bay .... London, 1790, 8to, pp. 195, 196, and Table to p. 202. He calls them As-sin-e-po-e-tuo, or Stone Indians (from Umfrerille). Mithridatea, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 263—265. VI, m., in A. Gallatin's Comparative Vocabulary, above quoted, p. 374. Eeise des Pbinzeit Maximilian zf Wibd. Cohlenz, 1839, 1841, 2 vols. 4to, Vol. II, pp. 474—480. B. T. Deni&, of Port Union, Assiniboin Vocabulary, pp. 416 — 429, 432, and numerals, pp. 429 — 431, of Vol. IV of : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States. ^ GRAMMARS AKD GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Rudiments of the Grammar of the Sioux Language, pp. 149 — 151 of : Caleb Atwateb's Eemarks (see Vocabularies) . Sioux Dahcota Dialect ; from MS. Grammatical Notices of Gen. Oass, pp. 251, 252 of: A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II). Sioux Spelling-boot, designed for the Use of Native Learners. Soston, Crocker and Brewster, 1836, 12mo, pp. 22. Stephen Braas and Gideon H. Pond, The Dakota First Eeading-Book. Cincinnati, Kendall and Henry, 1839, 18mo, pp. 50. Bet. S. W. Pond, Wowapi Inonpa. The second Dacota Beading-Book. Soston, Crocker and Brewster, 1842, 12mo, pp. 54. S. R. ElGQS, Wowapi Mitawa, Tamakece Kaga. My Own Book. Boston, Crocker and Brewster, 1842, 18mo, pp. 64. The printers compiled : A Mother's Primer, and Child's Picture-defining and Beading Book (after T. H. Gallaudet). S. E. Eieas, Dakota Tawoonspe, or Dakota Lessons ; a book designed for schools. Louisoille, Ky,, 1850, 12mo, p. 96. Grammar and Dictionary of the Dacota Language, collected by the Dakota Mission. Edited by S. E. Eiaas, Missionary of the American Board of Com- missioners for Foreign Missions, under the Patronage of the Historical Society of Minnesota. Accepted for publication by the Smithsonian Institution, December, 1851. New Yor!e, Craighead, printer, 4to, pp. xii, 412. Grammar, pp. 1—64; Vocabulary, 65—278; Dakota-English, 279—338; English-Dakota. S. E. Eiaas, Address on the Dakota Language, pp. 123 — 142 of: Annals of the Minnesota Historical Society for the Tear 1850-1. St. Faul, D. A. Eobertson, printer, 1851, 8vo. DAEIEN. The aborigines of the Isthmus have been hitherto known under the names of Dariel, Urahac, and Idibae. Their language was 62 DEGUINOS. said to be similar to the Cunacuna. Later researches have shown that four tribes — the Savaneric, Manzanillo, or San Bias Indians, Cholo, and Bayano — inhabit the Isthmus, who speak different languages. WOBDS AND YOCABULAEIES. Lionel Wapee, A New Voyage and Description of the Isthmus of America, giving an Account of the Indian Inhabitants, their Language, etc. London, James Enapton, 1699, 8to, map, plates, pp. viii, 224, 14, pp, 181, 182, 187, 188. French translation, by Montirat, in : Gr. Dampier, Voyage autour du Monde. Amsterdam, 1705, 8to, p. 250 and following, German translation, in : Allgemeine Historie der Beieen, Vol. XV, p. 280 and following. Smith Baeton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies. Hebvas, Aritmetica, pp. 106, 107. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 708. BiEBi, Atlas Ethnograpliique, Tab. XLI, No. 631. N.B. — The words given by Wafer correspond with the Bayano given by Seeman. DEGUmOS, DTEGENOS. The Indians round San Diego — Deguinos, Diegehos — were in a savage state, and their language almost unknown. Bartlett says that they are also called Comcya ; but Whipple asserts that the Comeya, a tribe of the Yumas, speak a different language. Different dialects were spoken near San Juan Capistrano (Father Boscara calls the aboriginal inhabitants of San Juan Capistrano the Acagchemem nation), San Gabriel, San Luis Obispo, and San Antonio. words and vocabularies. Vocabularies of San Diego, San Juan Capistrano, pp. 246, 248, 250 ; San Luis Obispo, San Antonio, pp. 247, 249, 251, by De. John Scoulee, in : Journal of the Eoyal Geographical Society of London, Vol. XI. London, 1841, 8vo, pp. 246 — 251. Eeprinted, San Diego, W. 2, San Luis Obispo, W. 4, San Antonio, W. 5, p. 129 ■of Vol. II of : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. The Names of the Months in Acagchemem are given in : P. Boscaea's Chinig- chinich, pp. 303, 304 of : A. Robinson's Life in California. New York, Wiley and Putnam, 1846, 12mo. Nos. 15 {San Raphael), 16 (Kizh, at Saa OabrieT), and No. 17 {Netela, at San Juan Capistrano) of the Vocabulary of Languages of North-western America, pp, 569 DELAWARE. 63 — 629, in : Hoe. Hale, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Explor- ing Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 181(5, folio. Ibid., pp. 533, 634 : Vocabulary of Languages spoken at the Missions, "La Soledad and San Miguel." Nos. 15, 16, 17, reprinted under 17, p. 128, of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. The words of the llissions : La Soledad and San Miguel, ibid., p. 126. Twenty-eight Words of Ketela and Kizh compared with Cahuillo and Keohi, by Peofessob W. W. Tuenee, p. 77 of: Eeport upon the Indian Tribes, added to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Eeport (in Vol. II of the Pacific Railroad Eeports. Washington, 1855, 4to). Des Langues Kizh et Netela de la Nouvelle-Californie, by Dr. Btjsohmann, in : .Monthly Report of the Royal Academy of Sciences of Berlin, for September and October, 1855. Diegeuo and English Vocabulary, taken by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple from Tomaso, the chief the Tribe, pp. 5, 6, of Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Extract from a Journal of an Expedition from San Diego, California, to the Rio Colorado, from September 11 to December 11, 1849. (Congress Documents, 31 Congress, Second Session, Senate Executive Documents, No. 19). Reprinted, pp. 95 to 101, and Diegefio numerals, by Lieutenant W. A. Whipple, compared with those given by Dr. Soouler, pp. 103 of; Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Report upon the Indian Tribes, etc. (Vol. II of Pacific Railroad Beports. Washington, 1855, 4to). Also re- printed on pp. 103, 104 of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. II. Twenty-eight Kechi Words (from Baetlett) compared with Cahuillo, Netela, and Kizh, p. 77 of: Report upon the the Indian Tribes, added to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Report (Vol. II of Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington, 1855, 4to). Vocabularies of the Deguino or Comeya, at San Diego ; Kechi, at San Luis Rey and San Luis Obispo, have been taken by John R. Baetlett, the United States Boundary Commisaioner. See also under Californians and Cahuillos. DELAWARE, LENAPE, LENNO-LENAPE. Belonging to the Algonquin stock. The following are men- tioned as the three original tribes: — 1. The Unami, or Wanami (Turtle tribe) 3. The Unalachtgo (Turkey tribe). 3. Minsi, Ministi, or Munseyi (Wolf tribe). WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Heetas, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 240 (numerals, etc.) Smith Baeton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies, and " Specimen of a Comparison of the Languages of the Delaware Stock and those of the Six Nations." Ibid., Appendix, p. 20. In the vocabularies he gives also Canesioga (or Smqvehannocs) words. 64 DELAWARE. Mitkridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 374—376. (From a MS. Vocabulary of the Russian General BtriTLAB, and from Smith Baeton.) Words, Phrases, and Short Dialogues in the Language of the Lenni-Lenape and Delaware, pp. 451 — 464 of Heckewelder'b Account, in Vol. I of: Transactions of the Historical and Literary Committee of the American Philosophical Society. PMladelpTiia, printed by Abraham Small, 1819, 8vo. Peop. T. Sat, Comparative Vocabulary of Tarious Dialects of the Lenape (or Delaware) Stock of North American Indians, together with a Specimen of the VT^innebags (or Nipegon) Larguage. (Contains forty-five words in the Language of the Mohegan, Lenape, Shaw- anese, Nanticoke, Narraganset, Mauael, Massachusetts, Penobscot, Abnaki, St. Prancis Indians, Messisaugers, Algonkins, Chippeway, Knistenaux, Winne- bagoa.) Printed, with notes, in J". Pickering's edition of D. Edwards' Observa- tions on the Mohegan Language in : Collections of the Massachusetts His- torical Society. Vol. X of the second series. Boston, Phelps and Pamham, 1823, 8vo, pp. 135-145, 146, 148. Iteprinted, Boston, Little and Brown, 1843, 8vo. Baibi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 810 (Delaware and Minsi). No. IV, Nineteen of the Comparative Vocabularies of Pifty-three Nations in A, Gallatin's Synopsis, etc., in Vol. II of: ArchaJologia Americana, pp. 305—367. (From Heokbweldee and ZEiSBEEflEE.) Reprinted under A, IV, 2, pp. 79, 81, 83 of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of: American Ethnological Society's Transactions. CuMMiNas, Indian Agent, Delaware Vocabulary, in : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. II, Languages ; 1, Algonquin group, pp. 470 481. Vocabulary of the Delawares in 1792. Prom the papers of James Madison. Ihid., Vol. Ill, pp. 424—427, Delaware (and Iroquois) words. CrEO. Henet Losskibl, History of the Mission of United Brethren among the Indians in North America. Translated from the German by Christian Ignatius Latrobe. London, 1794, 8vo. A Collection of "Words in Enghsh, Magna, Delaware, and Mohikan (by Ret. John Etiwein, compiled in 1788, from Zeisberger's work, for General Washington), pp. 41—44 of : Bulletin of the Historical Society of Pennsylvania, Vol. I. Phila- delphia, 1848, 8vo. Eet. Me. HECKEvraiDEE, A Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni-Lenape and Algonquin. Eet. Me. Hbckewemee, A Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni-Lenape proper, the Minsi Dialect, the Mohicanni, Natik or Nadik, Chippeway, and Nanti- coke. Rev. Me. Hece:ewei,dee, A Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni-Lenape and Miami, or Twightwee. DELAWARE. 65 .Ret. Mb. Heckeweldee, Names of Various Trees and Plants in the Language of the Lenni-Lenape, or Delaware, distinguishing the Dialect of the Unamis&ni. Minsi. The above four manuaoripts are in the Library of the American Philo- sophical Society at Philadelphia. Memorandum of the Names and Significations which the Lenni-Lenape, bther- wise called the Delaware, had given to Eivers, Streams, Places, etc., within the States of Pennsylvania, New Jersey, Maryland, and Virginia ; together with the names of some chieftains and eminent men of this nation. Taken from MS. papers of the Ret. John Heokeweldee, during his mission among the Indians of Penn- sylvania. Presented to the Historical Society of Philadelphia, by Maurice 0. Jones, of Bethlehem. Pp. 121—135, 139—154 of Vol. I of: Bulletin of the His- torical Society of Pennsylvania. FMladelpMa, printed for the Society, 1848, 8vo. Comparative Vocabulary of Lenape-Algonquin, Copte, Archipel, and Ternate, pp. 280 — 284 of: GrUSTAT de Eiohthai, Rapport entre quelques Langues Ameri- caines et le Copte. Langue Lenape- Algonquin, pp. 272 — 289 of Vol. II of the : M^moires de la Soci^t^ Bthnologique. Paris, Veuve Dondey-Dupre, 1845, 8vo. Delaware Vocabulary, taken by Lieutenant A. "W. Whipple from the Chi^ of the Black Beaver Tribe. Pp. 50 — 60 of the : Repoi-t upon the Indian Tribes, by Lieutenant Whipple, Thomas Ewbant, and Prof. W. W. Turner, added to Lieutenant Whipple's Report on the Route near the 35th Parallel in Vol. II of : Pacific EaUroad Reports. Washington, 1855, 4to. GRAMMAKS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Datid Zeisbek&ee, Essay of a Delaware Indian and English Spelling-book, for the use of the schools of the Christian Indians on Muskingum River. Phila- delphia, Miller, 1776, 12mo. Reprinted, Philadelphia, 1806, 12mo. Datid Zeisbeeoee, G-rammar of the Language of the Lenni-Lenape, or Dela- ware Indians. Translated from the Q-erman MS. of the late Rev. David Zeisber- ger, for the American Philosophical Society, by Peter Stephen Du Ponceau, with a preface and notes by the translator. Philadelphia, James Kay, 1827, 4to, pp. 188, 1. Translated in 1816. Forms part of (No. 2 of part 1) Vol. Ill of: Trans- actions of the American Philosophical Society, held at Philadelphia, for pro- moting useful knowledge, second series. Philadelphia, printed by James Kay, jun., 1840, 4to, pp. 65—251 (pp. 65 — 96 : the translator's preface)'. Presented to the Society, 2nd December, 1816. The MS. of the translation (in foEo, pp. 140) is in the Library of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia. On the Indian Languages (Delaware and Iroquois), pp. 18 — 23 of: Losskiel's History of the Mission, etc. (see Vocabularies above). N.B. — Pp. 19, 20, more particularly on the Delaware. John Pickbbing-, Remarks on the Indian Languages of North America, s. 1., 1836, 8vo. Reprinted from Vol. VII of the : Encyclopaedia Americana. German translation by Talvi (Mrs. Robinson), Leipzig, Vogel, 1834, 8vo; K 66 DOGRIB INDIANS. P. E. DirpoifCEAtr, Memoire sur le Systfeme Grrammatioal des Langues de quel- ques Nations Indienues de I'Am^rique du Nord. Fan's, 1838, 8to. E. A. Vail, Notice sur les Indiens de I'Am^rique du Nord. Paris, 1840, 8vo, pp. 50. Grammatical Notices — Delaware (from Zeisseeseb), pp. 220 — 224. Delaware Transitions, pp. 267, 268, 282—288 j and Comparative View, p. 289. Notes, pp. 294 — 298 of: A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana. Mitliridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 369—372. Lenapi Wawipoetakse ave Apwatuk. Krst Lessons in Delaware. J. Meekee. Baptist Shateanoe Mission, 1834, 18mo, pp. 48. , Lenapee SpeUing-bbok. Shawnee Mission, J. Meekee, for the Baptist Society, 1834, 12mo, pp. 24. Chapter IX, Language, No. Ill, Lenape, pp. 106 — 112 of : Heoeeweldee's s. Account of the History, etc., of Indian Nations. Vol. I of: Transactions of the \'JIistorical and Literary Conimittee of the American PhUosophical Society. Phila- delphia, printed by Abraham Small, 1819, 8vo. DOGRIB INDIANS. Indians of the northern part of North America^ between Martin's Lake and the Coppermine River. They call them- selves Thing-e-ha-dtinne,and belong to the Dtinne or Athapaskan stock. The " Mauvais Monde " and Slave Indians are tribes belonging to them. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Dogrib Vocabularies, collected at Fort Confidence (pp. 395, 396), at Fort Simp- son (p. 397), and by Me. O'Beian, of the Hudson's Bay Company (p. 398). Mauvais Monde and Slave Vocabulary (pp. 399, 400). J. H. Lbeeoy, Vocabulary of Chepewyan and Dogrib Words (pp. 400, 401), and Dogrib Vocabulary, from Baeeett, pp. 401, 402 of: Sir John Richardson, Arctic Exploring Expedition Vol. II. London, 1851, 2 vols. 8vo. The same reprinted and compared with the other Athapaskan and Kinai Lan- guages, pp. 179—222, 269—318 of : Busohmann's Athapaskisoher-Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856, 4to. Peoeessoe W. W. Tuenee, Comparative Vocabulary of Twenty-five Words of pogrib (from Eiohaedson), Hudson's Bay, Chepewyan, Tacully, Umkwa, Hoopah, Navajo, and Apache, pp. 84, 85 of the : Report upon the Indian Tribes, added to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Report in Vol. II of: Pacific Raili-oad Reports. Wasliington,Wnth, 4to. EHNEK ENGEKEKMUNG. 67 EHNEK. Indian band of north-western California, at the mouth of the Salmon or Quoratem River. The language reaches from Buffalo Creek to Clear Creek, thirty or forty miles above the Salmon, varying, however, from point to point ; on the Salmon it extends to the sources. They are a tribe of the Pehtsik Indians. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Geoeoe G-ibes, Vooabulary in : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. Ill, pp. 440—44,5. ELE. In South America, on the banks of the River Casanare. Their language has much affinity to that of the Betoi and, Yarara. The Ququaro speak a dialect of the Ele. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. • GiLii, Saggio di Storia Americana, Tomo III. ENGEREKMUNG. Called by the Portuguese BotoJtudos, by others Amores, Ainibores. In Brazil, south of the Rio Pardo, in the provinces Minas Geraes and Espiritu Santo. A plain language, without gutturals, but with many nasals. The Gherins of Almada sur le Taipe are a tribe of the Botokudos. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Mithridates, Vol. IV, p. 459. J. S. Vateb, Proben Deutscber Volksmundarten : Dr. Seetzen's Linguistisoher Ifachlass. Leipzig, 1816, 8to, pp, 352 — 374. Peinz Maximilian zit Wied Neuwied, Reise nach Brasilien in den Jahren, 1815-1817. FranJcfttrt-am-Main, Bronner, 1819-1821, 2 vols, 4to, and Atlas. FrmcJi translation, par F. B. B. Eyries. Paris, Arthur Bertrand, 1821, 3 vols. 8vo, and Atlas. Pelnz Maximilian zu Wied Neuwied, Raise in das Innere Nord Amerika. Coblenz, Hoelscher, 1838-1841, 2 vols. 4to, and Atjas, Vol. I, p. 588. 68 ESKELEN. AuatrsTE DE Saint-Hilaibb, Voyage dans lee Provinces de Eio de Janeiro et de Minas Geraes dans le District des Diamans et sur le Littoral du Brfesil ; suivi de Notes sur quelques Plantes oharactferistiques et d'un Precis de I'Histoire des Bevolutions de TEmpire BresUien. Paris, Gide, 1830-1833, 4 toIs. 8to. Alcidb D'Oebi&nt, L'Homme Am&icain. Paris, 1839, 2 vols, 8vo, Vol. I, p. 164. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 501. A. D'OEBlsmr, L'Homme Amerioain, Vol. T, p. 164. Vocabnlaire de Boteoudes, d'aprfes M. Maeotis Poetb, pp. 379 — 382 of: Note sur les Botecudes, aecorapagnee d'un Vocabulaire de leur Langue et de quelques Kemarques, par E. P. JoMAfiD, pp. 377 — 384 of: Bulletin de la Societe de Geo- graphie de Paris, Tome VI, de la 3""* serie. Fa/ris, Arthur Bertrand, 1846, 8vo. Portuguese translation — Pp. 107 — 113 of: Eevista Trimensal do Kio de Janeiro, 2"- ser., Tom. II, No. 5. Deux Vocabulaires de la Langae de' Boteoudos, recueillis par M. Victor Re- nault de Barbacena. A. Langue des Nat-nanouks (Habitans des Montagues), pp. 248 — 252. B. Langue des Juporoeas, Boutomoras et Craikmouses, pp. 253, 254 J and Note, pp. 259 — 262 of Vol. V of: Castelnau, Voyage, 4ppendice. GKAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES, A. D'OEBiaNT, L'Homme Amerioain, Vol. II, p. 347. ESKELEN, ESLENES. Californian Indians^ east of Monterey. The Ekklemaches are said to be a tribe of the Eskelen^ and to speak the richest idiom of all the Californian Indians, •WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Jean-Feanc. Galaup de la Peeouse, Voyage autour du Monde (1785-1788), rfedigfe et publie par M. L. A. MUlet-Mureau. Paris, imprimerie de la Eepublique, an V (1797), 4 vols, 4to, and Atlas. Eeimprim^, Paris, 1798, 4 vols. 8vo. (In Chap. 12 of Vol. I.) Mnglish translation— io»do», Eobinson, 1799, 2 vols. 4to, and Atlas. German translation — Berlin, 1799, 2 vols. 8vo, Vol. I, p. 388. The linguist of the Expedition was De la Manon. He collected words of the Plcclemaches dialect. J. E. BouEGOiNa, Eelation d'un Voyage recent des Espagnols sur les C6tes Nord-ouest de I'Amerique septentrionale. Paris, 1789, 3 vols. 8vo. Second edition, 1792 ; third edition, Paris, 1803. German translation— Je»a, 1789, 8vo. Eepriuted in : Archives Litteraires de I'Europe, 1804, No. 4, p. 87. Eelaeion del Viage hecho por las Goletas SutM y Mexicaua en cl afio de 1792 ESKIMO. 69 para reconocer el estreeho de Fuca ; con una introducoion en que se da noticia de las Expediciones executadas auteriormente por los Epanoles en busca del pays de nordeste de la America de Orden del Bey. Madrid, en la iraprenta real, 1802 8vo, pp. plxviii, 185, Atlas. Pp. 172, 173, and p. 127 of Vol. II of: American Etlmological Society's Transactions. A. DE HuMBOl/DT, Essai politique de la Nouvelle Espagne. Paris, SchoeU, 1811, 2 vols. 4to (or 5 toIs. 8to) ; often reprinted. Vol. I, p. 322, of the 4to edition gives EslceUn numerals from the MS. of P. Lasuen. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 205 {Eslenes, from BOUEGOING ; Ecelemaches, from De ia Man ok, in La Perouse). Balbi, Atlas Ethnograpliique, Tab. XLI, No. 831. ESKIMO. North of 60° northern latitude. The three principal dialects of the Eskimo are those of — 1. TheKaraNs, Greenlanders. 2. The Eskimo proper, on the shores of Labrador. 3. The Western Eskimos. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Vocabulary of English and Eskimo Words, pp. 203—205, and "A Short Vocabulary of the Language spoken among the Northern Indians inhabiting the north-west part of Hudson's Bay, as it was taken at different times from the mouths of Babiana and Zazana, two Indians, who were on board H. M. S. the ' Eurnace,' in the year 1742. By Edwakd Thompson, Surgeon of said ship." Pp.206 — 211 of: AKTHtra DoBBS, An Account of the Countries adjoining to Hudson's Bay, in the north-west part of America .... to which are added .... V Vocabularies of the Languages of several Indian Nations adjoining to Hudson's Bay .... London, 1744, 4to, pp. 211, map. Hans Egede, Det gande Grdnlands nye Perlustration. Kjohenhavn, 1741, 8vo, (Chap. XVII of tbe language, with a short Vocabulary.) English translation — A Description of G-reenlaud. London, 1745, 8vo. French translation — Description et Histoire Naturelle du Greenland, trad, en Fran9ais par D. E. D. P. (Des Eoches de Parthenay). Copenhague et Geneve, 1763, 8vo. German translation — Beschreibung und Naturgeschichte von Groenland In's Deutsche iibersetzt von J. Gr. Kriiuitz. Berlin, Mylius, 1763, 8vo. J. Andeeson, Naohrichten von Island, Groenland und der Strasse Davis. Hamburgh, 1746, 8vo, pp. 285—325. PauIi-Egede, DietionariumGrcenlandico-Danico-Latinum, completens primitiva cum suis derivatis quibus interjectae sunt voces primarise e Kirendo Angokkutorum adornatum., HafnicB, typ. orphanotr. Keg. Gottfr. E. Kisel, 1750, 8vo, pp. 16, 312. Greenland, pp. 1- 207 ; Danish, pp. 208-263 ; Latin, pp. 264—312. 70 ESKIMO. Langue des Esquimaux et dea G-roenlandais, pp. 494 — 498 of Vol. VIII of: CotrKT DB Gbbelin, Monde Primitif. . Fa/ris, 1772, 4to. Vocabulary taken from Egedb. Beprint, pp. 306 — 312 of: J. B. Soheeeb, Keoherohes Historiques et Geograpliiques sur le Nouveau Monde. Paris, Brunei, 1777, 12mo. Hid. " Eskimo and Greenland Words compared." Heevas, Origine, Tabb. XL VIII, L, et seq. (Greenland). Heetas, Saggio, p. 126, 127. Table to show tlie Affinity between the Languages spoken at Oonalaska and Norton Sound, and those of the Greenlanders and Esquimaux. Appendix VI to Vol. Ill of : A Voyage to the Pacific Ocean .... performed under the direction of Captains Cooe:, Claeke, and Goee, in H. M. S. " Beaolution" and " Disoorery," in the years 1776 — 1780. London, 1784, 3 rols 4to, and Atlas. Dublin, 1784, 3 Tols. Svo, Vol. Ill, pp. 554, 555. And in Vol. I, p. 308, of: Petee Simon Paxlas, Neue Nordische Beitraege zur Physikalisohen und Geographischen Erd-und Voelkerbesohreibung, Naturgeschichte und Oekonomie. St, Fetersbwrg, Logan, 1781 — 1796, 7 Tols. 8to. Eskimaux -English Vocabulary, for the use of the Arctic Expedition. Published by order of the Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty. Compiled by Captain John "Washikoton, B.N. London, John Muri-ay, 1850, 12mo, oblong. Pp. xvi, 160 : pp. 2—109, English-Eskimaux ; pp. 115—160, Eskimaux -English ; pp. 110— 113, Comparative Table of a few (21) Words of the Eskimaux (or Innuit), Chuckchi, Aleutian, and ICadjak Languages, chiefly from Balbi and Klapeoth. J. LoN0, Voyages and Travels of an Indian Interpreter and Trader .... to wliich is added .... a List of Words in the .... and Esquimaux Tongues. London, Robson, Debrett, and Co., 1791, 4to, p. 183 (twenty-two words). German translation, by G. Forster. Berlin, Voss, 1792, Svo ; and by A. W. Zimmermann. Hambwg, Hoflman, 1791, Svo. Captain William E. Paeet, B.KT., Journal of a Voyage for the Discovery of a North-west Passage, etc. London, 1821, 4to. Captain William Edwaed Paeet, B.N., Journal of a Second Voyage for the Discovery of a North-west Passage from the Atlantic to the Pacific, performed in the years 1821, 1822, and 1823, in H. M. S. " Fury" and " Hecla." Published by authority. London, Murray, 1824, 4to, pp. 600, pp. 559—569. Eeprinted, New Torlc, W. E. Dean, printed for E. Duyckinck, C. Long, and others, 1824 Svo pp. XX, 464. On the Eskimaux Language (of Melville Peninsula and the adjoining islands, more particularly Winter Island and Igloolik), pp. 451 — 457. Voca- bulary of Eskimaux Words and Sentences, pp. 459—464. Eskimaux Names of Places, p. 464. Otho Fabeioiits, Den Groenlandske Ordbog, forbedret og foroget. Kjohenliavn, C. F. Schubert, 1804, Svo, pp. viii,795 (pp. 10—544, Groul. Danish ;' 545— 795*, Danish Begister). Words are also given in the same author's : Fauna Greenland ica. HafnicB 1780, Svo. ' ESKIMO. 71 Captain F. W. Beechet, E-lf., Narrative of a Voyage to the Pacific and Bearing's Strait, to co-operate with the Polar Expeditions, performed in H. M. S. "Blossom," in the years 1825, 1828. London, 1831, 4to, pp. 742; also, 2 vols. Svd. Vocabulary of Words of the Western Esquimaux, pp. 620 — 627 of the Mo edition, and Vol. II, pp. 366 — 383 of the 8vo edition. Appendix to the Narrative of a Second Voyage in Search of a North-west Passage, by SiE John Koss, C.B. London, 1835, 4to, pp. 376, plates. Names of Mammalia, Birds, and Fishes, in : Captain W. A. Q-eaah, Narrative of an Expedition to the East Coast of Q-roenland, sent by order of the King of Denmark in search of the lost Colonies. Translated by C. Grordon Mac- dougall. London, Parker, 1837, 8vo, pp. 16, 199. Appendix No. II, B, pp. 178—180. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 340, 431, and part 3, pp. 422, 424, 454, 455, 462 (from EoEDE, Andekson, Dobbs, and LoNo), Vol. IV, pp. 251 — 253. Some Words (3) and Numerals (1 — 5) of the Behring Strait, Eskimo, Kadjak, Igloolik Eskimo, andUnalaehka Languages compared, p. 123 of: VoN Baeb and Von Helmesen, Beitraege zur Kenntniss des Eussischen Keiohs, Bd. 1. St. Vetershurg, Academy of Sciences, 1839, 8vo. No. 1, 1, 2, a, of the Comparative Vocabulary of Eifty-three Nations in A. Galla- tin's Synopsis, in Vol. II of: Arehseologia Americana, pp. 305 — 367 ; and Com- parative Vocabulary of Sixteen Tribes. Ibid., pp. 368 — 372 (Hudson's Bay, 1; Kotzebue Sound, 2 ; Greenland, a). (From Paeet, Beechey, Eoebe, and Ceahtz) Eeprinted, I 1, under A I, pp. 78, 80, 82 ; X 2 a, under L I, p. 104, of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 856. Groenlandais propre — Esk. d. 1. Bale du Prince Kegent (Ross) ; Esk. (Dobbs) ; Esk. d. I'lle d'Hiver (Parry). Smith Baeton, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies (Greenlanders, Esquimaux). Comparative Table of the Dialects spoken by the Behring's Strait and Labrador Eskimo, pp. 369—382 of Vol. II of : SiE John Eiohaedson, Arctic Exploring Expedition. London, 1851, 2 vols. 8vo. Note. — The Behring's Strait Eskimo, or Kuskutchewak, from Wbano-el ; the Labrador Coast Eskimo from a Vocabulary of Eev. P. Latboee. GBAMMAES AND GBAMMATIOAL NOTICES. M. WoELDiKE, Meletema de Linguae Grcenlandicse ejusque a ceteris Unguis differentia, in; Semestria Societatis Hafniensis. Hafnics, 1746, part 2, p. 137 et seq. i En Grocnlandsk A B D Bog. Kjolenhavn, 1760, 8vo. Reprinted, Eattitsio'- 72 FLATHEADS. marsut attuaromarsuUo Malligekseit. Gnadau, 1835, 8vo. Nye udg. ved Steen- BBEa. Kjohenhavn, Missions Collegium, 1849, Sco, pp. 20. Paul Eaede, Grrammatica Grcenlandicb-Uamoo-Latina. Hqfnice, 1760, 8vo. Datid Ceantz, Historie Ton Greenland enthaltend die Besehreibung des Landes und seiner Einwohner, insbesondere die G-eseMchte der dortigen Mission zu New Hebbnhut und LiCHTENEEls. Barby and Leipzig, Eummer, 1765, 8ro. Portset- zung, ibid , 1770, 8vo. Second edition, ibid., 1770, 8to, pp. 277—287. Reprinted in Tol. XX of : Bibliothek der neuesten Beiaebeschreibungen. Frankfurt and Leipzig, 1779-97, 21 vols. 8vo. Mnglish translation — The History of Greenland, including an Account of the Mission carried on by the United Brethren in that country. London, Vl&l, 2 Tols. 8vo. Reprinted, with a continuation to the present time, Notes, and Appendix. London, Longmans, 1820, 2 vols. 8to. Eaii.. Thoehallesen, Schema Conjugationis Groenlandicae verborum in ot, vok et rpok desinentium. Hafnice, 1776. Otho Fabeicifs, Eorsoeg til en forbedret Groenlandsk Grammatica. Kjolen- Tiavn, 1791, 8to. Andet oplog, ibid., C. E. Schubert, 1801, 8ro, pp. viii, 388. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 435, 447, 452-454. A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. in Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana, Appendix, No. I, pp. 211—214. (From CaANTZ and the Mithridates). Brief Sketch of the Eskimaux Grammar, pp. xi, xvi of: Bskimaux-Engliah Vocabulary, for the use of the Arctic Expeditions. London, John Murray, 1850, 12mo, oblong. Sam. Kleinschmidt, Grammatik der Groenlandischen Sprache, mit theilweisem Einschluss des Labrador Dialeetea. Berlin, Reimer, 1851, &vo, pp. 10, 182. Grammatical Notices concerning the Eskimo Dialects of Behring's Strait and the Labrador Coast, pp. 364—368 of Vol. II of: SiE John Richaedsoit's Arctic Exploring Expedition. London, 1851, 2 vols. 8vo. The Grammar of Zobniosee, 1780 ; exists only in MS. PLATHEADS, SELISH. (atnah, shouschwap.) Indians of the Rocky Mountains and Oregon ; divided into many- tribes, of which the Salish, Ponder ays, aiid Spokein Indians are the most important WOKDS AND VOCABULARIES. Peinz Maximilian zu Wied, Reise in daa lunere Nord Amerika's in 1832 bis 1834. Coblenz, Hoelscher, 1838—1841, 2 vols. 4to, Vol. II, pp. 501, etc. FLATHEADS. 73 l>ro'- XVIII, 53, of the : ComparatiTe Vocabulary of Fifty-three Nations. A. Q-AILAtin's Synopsis, Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana, pp. 305 — 367. (Salish, from a MS. authority in Duponeeau's Collections.) Vocabulary of the Tsihaili-Selish family, in four branches (northern, middle, ■western, and southern), pp. 569—629 of: H. Hale's Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition. Fhiladelphia, lea and Blanchard, 1846, 4to, map. Haie diTides the four branches of the Selish into the following languages : — 1. NOETHEBN BbANCH: — a. E. SImshwapums% (Shushwaps, Atnahs). N.B. — A short Atnah or Chin Indians Vocabulary is giTen by A. Gallatin, under No. XXIII, 58, of his Comparative Vocabulary of Fifty-three Nations, p. 378 (Archaeologia Americana, Vol. II), from Mackenzie, pp. 257, 258 of his Voyages. London, 1801. b. E. SelisJi or FlatTieads, divided into three dialects : — aa. I,'. SfZfespefa (or Ponderays — Pend d'Oreilles). bb. d. TsaJcaitsittin (Spokau Indians), cc. e. SoaiatVpi (Kettle-falla). u. G-. SMtmisJi (CcEur d'alfene). d. H. PisJcwaus (Piscous). 2. Middle Beanoh: — I. SJcwale (Nasqually). 3. Western Bbanch : — a. J. TsiTiailisTi (ChiokaUis, Chilts), divided into : — aa. f. Tsihailish. bb. g. Kmaiantl. cc. h. Kwenaiwitl. b. K. KcmelUslc (Cowelits). 4. SOUTHEBN BeANCH: — ■ L. Nsietshawus (Killamuks). In the : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II, the Vocabu- laries of 0-, H, I, J, K, are given under T, XXIII, pp. 118, 119 ; the Vocabulary L, under U, XXIII, p. 120 ; the Vocabidary F, under C, XXIII, " SeUsh Elatheads," pp. 88, 90, 92, 94. Ad. 3, a, a short Vocabulary of this language, called " Checalish," is given by Messrs. D. I/EE and J. H. Fbost, pp. 341 — 343 of their : Ten Years in Oregon. New York, J. CoUord, printer, 1844, 12mo. A short Vocabulary of the Flathead Language, and the Lord's .Prayer in the Plathead and Pend d'OreiUe language, are given on the last, not numerated, pages of; P. P. J. DE Smet, o. S. J., Oregon Missions and Travels over the Eocky Mountains in 1845-1846. New York, Edw. Dunigan, 1847, 12mo, pp. 408, 4to. Salish and Okanagan Words, p. 158 of: K. G. Latham, The Languages of the Oregon Territory pp. 154 — 166 ; and Chikeeles and Tlaoquatch Words, p. 236 of : Db. John Scottieb, on the Indian^ >■,, L 74 FOX ISLANDS — GE. Tribes inhabiting the North- West Coast of America, pp. 228 — 252 of : Journal: of the Ethnological Society of Loudon, Tol. I. Edinbtirgh, 1848, 8to. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Grammatical Bemarks on the Language of the Tsihaili-Selish family, in : H.- TTaTiE, Ethnology and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition. iPhiladelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, 4tp, map, pp, 535 — 542 ; and Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II, pp. 26 — 34. EOX ISLANDS. Russian America j continuation of the Aleutan Islands. See Unalaschka. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. A Voyage to the Pacific Ocean- .... performed under the direction of Cap- tains Cook, Claek, and (Jobb, in the years 1776—1780. London, 1784, 3 vols. 4to. Vol. II, Appendix 6. J. BiiMNQB, Voyages (Russian edition). St. Petersburg, 1811, 4to, pp. 121 — 129. Mithridates, Vol. I, p. 567. K. E. TON Baeb und Ge. ton Heimeesen, Beitraege zur Kenntniss des Eussischen Reichea und der angraenzenden Lander Asiens. St. Petersburg, Vol. I, 1839, 8to, p. 259. FUCA STRAIT. Between the territory of Washington and the southernmost part of Vancouver's Island. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Varias Palabras del Idioma que se habla en la boca S. del Canal de Euca y sus equiralentes en Castillano, p. 41 of: Eelacion del Viage heoho por las goletas Sutil y Mexicana en el anno de 1792, para reconocer el estrecho de Fuca. Madrid, imprenta real, 1802, 8vo. This Vocabulary is reprinted under No. XXIV, 59, of the Comparative Vocabulary in A. Gallatin's Synopsis (Archseologia Americana Vol II p. 378). ' ■ ' GE, GES, GEIKO (JAHYCOS). People living on the sea-shores of the Brazilian provinces Maranham and Gram Para. They are divided into several GUAQUES GUARANI. 75 tribes, of which Maetius (iv, 80) names nine, among them the Ao-ges, Cran-ges, Canaeata-ges, Ponkata-ges, and Paycob-ges. WORDS and vocabulakies. J. B. VON Spix and E. F. Ph. ton Mabtitts, Keiae in BrasUien. MiineMn, 1823—1831, 3 Tola. 4to. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 513. GUAQUES. New Granadian Indians, inhabiting the plains on the rivers Caqueta, Oteguasa, Caguan, and Putumayo, in the territory of Mocoa (formerly departmento del Assuai). WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Voeabulario G-uaque-Espanol, taken by the Presbytero Manuel Makia Albis, in 1854, pp. 24 — 27 of: Los Indies del Andaqui. Popayan, imprenta de la Matricaria, 1855, 16mo. GUANAS. Brazilian Indians of the province Mato-Grosso, on the banks of the Paraguay. Mautius (No. 29) calls them also Guanans, says that they live between the Paraguay and the Sierra de Chainez, and thinks that they are related to the Cohans or Coa- huanas (men of the wood), whom the Guaycuras call Cayu- hdbas. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Langue des Gruanas (Rio Paraguay). Vocabulary, No. VII, pp. 274 — 276 of: Casteinatt, Vol. V, Appendice. GUAEANI. The most extended nation of southern Brazil and the Argen- tine Republic, Paraguay, and Uruguay. . They were christian- ized by the Jesuits, under the dominion of whom they lived, enjoying a theocratic form of government. Adelung (in Mithridates) distinguishes — 1. South Guarani, or Guarari pro- per, in Paraguay. 2. West Guarani, or Chiviguana and Guarayi. 3. North Guarani, or Tupi (see Brazil). Martius (I, A) calls the southern Tupis, Guaranis. 76 GUABANI. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. AiPHONSTTS Babzejta, Lexica et prsecepta grammatioa, item liber confessionis et precum in quinque Indorum Linguis, quarum usus per Amerieam australem, uempe Puquinioa, Tenocotica, Catamareana, Guaranica, Natixana, sive Mogaznana- JPeruvitB, 1590, folio. This title is given by Brunet (Vol. I, p. 259) from: SoTWELl,, Bibliolheoa Societatis Jesu Natb. Bibadeneirse. Some, 1676, folio, p. 33. P. Antonio Ktjiz (de Montota\ Tesoro de la Lengua Guarani que se nsa en el Peri, Paraguay y Bio de la Plata. Madrid, Juan Sanchez, 1639, 4to ; consists of 8 and 407 numbered leaves. Tbe author had resided thirty years among the Guaranis. He published also : Oatecismo de la Lengua G-uarani. Madrid, 1640, 8vo. Vocabulario de la Lengua Guarani, por el P. Antonio Rttiz ; revisto y aumentado por otro Eeligioso. En el^ueilo de S. Maria la Mayor, 1722, 4to. This is apparently a new edition of the Vocabulary annexed to : Arte de la lengua Guarani of P. Eiriz. GiHi, Saggio, Vol. in, pp. 249, 857 and following. Cheistoph Gottlieb ton Miteb, Journal zur Kunatgeschichte und zur Allge- meinen Literatur. ]>lwrnberg, Zeb, 1775-1790, 17 vols. Svo, Vol. IX, p. 98. Hektas, Vooabolario, pp. 161 et seq. Hebvas, Aritmetioa, pp. 95, 96. Hebtas, Origine, pp. 29, 37, 41, 44, 48, 49, 55, 56, 78, 136, 178, Tabb. XLIX, L et seq. - Hebtas, Saggio, pp. 95, 98. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 458, 459, 466. (From GiLii and Hebtas ) Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab^ XLI, No. 490. J. A. TAN H"EITTEL-, El Dorado ; being a Narrative of the circumstances which gave rise to the reports in the sixteenth century of the existence of a rich and splendid city in South America. New York, Winchester, 1844, Svo, Appendix V, pp. 164, 165. AioiDE D'Oeei&nt, L'HommeAm&ioain. Faris, 1839, 2 vols. Svo. Vol.1, p. 164 ; Vol. II, p. 276 (Guarani of Paraguay and Guarayos of Bolivia compared with Carib, Galibi, and Oyampis). Six Words of the Pullah, Archipel, and Guarani Languages compared, p. 115 of Vol. I of: Memoires de la Soci^t^ Ethuologique. Paris, Dondey-Dupre, 1841, Svo. Deux Vocabulaires de Dialectes du Guarani. Vooabulaire XI. Langue de Cayo- . -was (Dialeote du Guaranis), pp. 282, 283. Vooabulaire XII. Langue des Guarani du Paraguay, pp. 5i8S— 290 of Vol. V of: Castelnau, Voyage, Appendice. GUAEPES — GUATOS. ll GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. P. Antonio Eitiz db Montota, Arte y Vocabulario de la Lengua G-uarani. Madrid, 1640, 4to. The Arte was again published under the foUowing title : Arte de la Lengua Guarani, con los Escolios, Anotaeiones y Apendices, del P. Paulo Kestivo e S. J. Saeados de los papeles del P. Simon Bandini y otros. En el pueblo de Santa Maria la Mayor, 1734, 4to. Title given by Eeedinand Denis, in : Bulletin du Bibliophile, IX""* Se'rie, Nos. 10, 11, and 12. Para, Techener, 1849, 8to, p. 358. Brunet, Yol. IV, p. 148, puts the date at 1724, from the Catalogue of Chaumette. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 432— 437, 457. A. D'Oebignt, L'Homme Amerioain, Vol. II, pp. 299 — 302. Ihid,, pp. 325 (Guarayos), p. 336 (Chiriguanos), pp. 342, 343 (Sirionos). GUAEPES. Indians of tte Chilian provincs Cuio, who are said to speak the AUentiac or Mikokayac languages. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Ltrys DE Vaiditia, Arte Grammatica, Voeabulario, Cateoismo y Confessionario en Lengua Chilena y en las dos Lenguas Allen tiae y Milcooayao que son las mas Generales de la Provineia de Cuio en el reyno de Chile, y que Hablan los Indios Guarpes y otros. Lima, 1607, 8vo. (See AUentiac^ GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Lttts de Vaiditia — (see Vocabularies). GUASAVA. A language spoken in the department of MichoacaUj in Mexico (according to De Souza). Latham (Varieties of Mankind) says the Guazave language is mentioned as being that of the coast of Cinaloa. Whether it was different from the Maya dialect is doubtful. WOEDS AND Y0CABULAEIE3. Arte d Grammatica de la Lengua Guasave, por P. Keenando ViiiATAifE, de la Gompaflia de Jesus. MS. GUATOS. Brazilian Indians of the province Mato-grosso, on the Uio Paraguay. (On the Tacoary and Araguaya; of a fairer com- plexion than the other Indians. Martius/No. 33). 78 GUAYKURU. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Langue des Ouatos. Vocabulary, No XII, pp. 283—285 of: CASTEMfAr, Tol. y, Appendice. GUAYKURU, MBAYA. South American Indians of the province Cujaba^ on the left banks of the-Paraguay^ who call themselves Eijiguaijegi. The Spaniards called them " Cavalleros," because they were excellent horsemen. Their language has two principal dialects — the Mbaya and the Enakaga, and is said to bear much affinity to the Baskish language. A similar language is spoken by the neighbouring Juiadge, Kochaboth, Guentuse, and even the Payaguas, who, besides, have their own very difficult language. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. GiLii, Saggio, Vol. in, pp. 367—371. Heetas, Vooabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq., 221 — 223. (From the Spanish missionary P. JosE Sanchez Labbadoe's MSS.) Hebtas, Aritmetiea, p. 99. Hebvas, Origine, Tabb. XL VIII, L et seq. Heetas, Saggio, pp. 106, 107 ; and Payagua, p. 228. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 478, 505, 506. Baibi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 545 (Payagua-Guayouru, Guay- curu-Mbaya). Castelnau, Voyage, and Vol. V, Appendice, Vocabulaires, No. X, Langue des Guayourus, pp. 280, 281. On the Payaguas, see : Fragments d'un Voyage au Paraguay ex^cut^ par Ordre du Gouvernement ; lus \ I'Assemblee (de la Society de G&graphie) Genferale du 23 Df-cembre, 1853, par Aleebd Demeesat, pp. 5—31 of Vol. VII of the fourth series of : Bulletin de la Sooi^t^ G^ographlque. Paris, Arthur Bertraud, 1854, 8vo. (Pp. 30, 31, Words and Phrases.) A few Payagw4 Words, and some Account of the Payagwfc, by Chaeles Blacheoed Manseibld, Esq., M.A., Clare Hall, Cambridge ; with Remarlis by Robert Gordon Latham, M.D., pp. 496—504 of : Paraguay, Brazil, and the Plate. Letters written in 1852-1853, by C. B. Manseield, Esq., M.A., map, portrait, and illustrations. Cambridge, 1856, 1 yoL 12mo, pp. xxii and 504. G0ENOA GUYANA. 79 GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Mitliridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 482—488. A. D'Oebigmt, L'Honime Americain, Vol. II, p. 120 of the : Lenguas or Jmadge Dialect, GUENOA. Indian nation, on the eastern banks of the Uruguay River, south of the Gruarani Missions. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Hebtas, Saggio, pp. 228-229. Heevab, Oatalogo, p. 46. GUYANA. The principal tribes of British Guyana, besides the Accaways, are the Atorays, the Macoussies, and the Tiberacottes. Sm Egbert Schomburgk enumerates, besides the Liagua Geral, the Arawaak, Warau, and Taruma, the following dialects, as spoken in Guyana, viz. i — 1. Of the Caribi-Tamanaken stock, the Caribisij Accaway, Macusi, Arecuma, Soerigbng, Waiyamara, GuinaUj Maiongkong, Woyawai, Mawakwa or Maopityan, Piano- ghotto, Tiverighotto. 3. Of the Wapisian-Parauana stock, the Wapisian or Wapityan, Atorai, Taurai or Dauri, of all of which he gives a comparative vocabulary of eighteen words. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Vocabularies of the Langaages of Five Indian Nations in G-uyana — ^Accoways, Atoray, Maooussie, Tiberaoottis, Guarano. Appendix No. V, pp. 164, 165 of: J. A. TAN Hbutbl's El Dorado. New YorTc, Winchester, 1844, 8vo. P. 166, ihiii; Comparison of the Arrowak, Atoray, Maypure, Moxos, and Quichua. Sib Eobebt H. SoHOMBirEaK, (Vocabulary and) Eemarks to accompany a Comparative Vocabulary of Eighteen Languages and Dialects of Indian Tribes inhabiting Guiana, pp. 96 — 99 of the : Keport of the Eighteenth Meeting of the British Association for the Advancement of Science, held at Swansea, in August, 1848. London, J. Murray, 1849, 8vo. Vocabulary of Eighty-two Nouns and Numerals (1 — 10) in the Four Indian Lan- 80 HAEELTZTJK HAIDAH. guages of British Guiana— Arawaai, Accaway, Caribisce, Warow, by William HlLLHOirsE, pp. 247, 248 of Vol. II of : Journal of the Koyal Greographical Society- of London. London, John Murray, 1832, 8to. HAEELTZUK, HAILTSA. Naass Indians of the north-west coast, from 50° 30' to 53° 30' northern latitude. Dialects of their language are spoken by the Billechoola, and the inhabitants of Mackenzie's Friendly Village. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Alexandee Mackenzie, Voyages from Montreal through the Continent of North America. London, 1801, 4to, p. 376. Eeprinted, London, 1802, 2 vols. 8to, Vol. II, p. 273. German transla- tion. ILamburg, 1802, 8to, p. 545. Eeprinted under No. XXVI, 61, of the Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis (p. 378 of Vol. II of the : Archaeologia Americana). Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 216 (Friendly Village, from MACsaijrzrE). Vocabularies, by John Scouleb, M.D., of Haeeltzuck and Billechoola, pp. 230, 232, 234. Chimmesyan, pp. 231, 2:53, 235 of Vol. XI of : Journal of the Eoyal Geographical Society of London (1841), 8to. Hailtsa Vocabulary, by A. AtroEESON, p. 634 of: Horatio Hale's Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition. PhiladelpMa, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio. The Vocabularies of Mackekzie and Ahdeeson, reprinted in the Vocabula- ries in Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, sub. H, XX (Naass), p. 103. Billechoola, Eriendly Village, Eitz-Hugh Sound, Haeltzufc Words, p. T.55 of : E. G. Latham, The Languages of the Oregon Territory (pp. 154 — 166 of Vol. I of the : Journal of the Ethnological Society of London. lEdinburgh, 1848, 8vo). HAIDAH. Indians of Queen Charlotte's Island.' A branch of this tribe, the Kyganies [Kigarnies) live in the southern part of the Archipel of the Prince of Wales. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Vocabulary of Kigarnee, Casarnee, Skittageets, Camshava, and Wdrds of other tribes on the north-west coast (from MS. authorities of Stuegis and Bbyaitt). No. XXVIII, 64, of the Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis (ArchsEologia Americana, Vol. II, p. 380). HAITI HITCHITTEES. 81 Tocabulary by Dk. Joun Scoulee, pp. 231, 233—235 of Vol. XI of : Journal of the Eojal Geographical Society of London. London, 1841, 8vo. HAITI. The aborigines of this island (San Domingo) are extinct. WORDS AND VOCABULAUIES. GiLll, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, pp. 220—227. (Collected Haitian Words (from Otiedo, Piedeo Maktte, and Acosta). Supplements, aee in : Bartliol. de las Casas, Kegionum Indicarum accuratissima descriptio. Frankofurti, 1598, 4to, pp. 8—10. C. S. Eajinesque, Atlantic Journal and Friend of Knowledge. Philadelphia, 1832, 1833, 8to, pp. 50 et seq. ComparatiTe Taino Vocabulary of Hayti, pp. 230 — 253 of; C. S. Eaeinesque, Tlie American Nations. Philadelphia, 1836, 12n]o. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 3. GKAMMAR8 AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Abecedaire Haytien ; suIti d'un Precis Historique, Chronologique et G&graphiqne sur risle de Haiti. Paris, 1839, 8vo. The Haytian or Taino Language reslored, with fragments of the Dialects of Cuba, Lucagas, Boriquen, Eyeri, Casiri, Araguas. Grammatical Notices and Com- parative Vocabularies (pp. 215 — 259 of: C. S. Baeinesqtjb, The American Nations ; or. Outline of their General History. Philadelphia, printed for the Author, 1836, 12mo.) HITCHITTEES. A branch of the Creek confederation^ on the rivers Chatahsochee and Flint. WOKDS AND VOCABULAIilES. No. X, r, of the Comparatire Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis (Archseo- logia Americana, Vol. II, p. 377.) From MS. authority of M. RiDGE, a Cherokee, Numerals of the Hitchittee or Chel-o-tee Dialect (1 — 1000), spoken by several tribes of the great Muscogee race. By Captain J. C. Casey, United States Agent, Florida; pp. 220, 221 of Vol. II of; Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States. 82 HOCHELAGA — HUASTEKA. HOCHELAGA. An extinct tribe of Canada, speaking a dialect of the Mohawk language. Montreal is situated on the place where this tribe formerly resided. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. B. HACKLtTTT, Collection of Voyages. London, 1599, 3 vols, folio ; Vol. II, p. 231. G. B. Bamusio, Navigationi e Viaggi. Venezia, 1606, 3 vols, folio; Vol. Ill' p. 385. A short Vocabulary (from Caetibe), pp. 48, 49 of: John de Laet, Orbis NoTus. Imgduni Satavor., Elzevir, 1633, folio. From De Laet, reprinted in A. Grallatin's Synopsis (Archaeologia Americana, Vol. II, p. 376, under V, ;8), and Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 335—337. See also : Jacques Cabtiee, Brief Eecit de la Navigation faite fes Isles de Canada, Hoehelaga, Saguenay et autres, et particulierement des Moeurs, Lan- gage et Ceremonies des Habitants d'icelles. Paris, Ponce Eiffet, 1545, 8vo ; Souen, 1598, 8vo ; and Italian, Prima Belatione della Navigatione di Jaques Cartier, in : Bamusio, Vol. III. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, Ifo. 804. Smith Baeion, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabulary. HOO-PAH. Indian tribe on the lower part of the Trinity River, in north- western California. Their language extends to the south fork. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Geoeoe Gibbs, Vocabulary in: Schoolcraft, Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. Ill, pp. 440—445. Peopessob W. W. Tuenee, Comparative Vocabulary of Twenty-five Words of Hoopah (from Gibes), Hudson's Bay, Chepewyan, Dogrib, Umfcwa, Tacully, Navajo, and Apache, pp. 84, 85, of: Beport upon the Indian Tribes; added to lieutenant A. W. WJiipple's Beport, in Vol. II of: Pacific Bailroad Beports. Washington, 1855, 4to. HUASTEKA, Mexican Indians, north-east of Vera Cruz and the city of Mexico, in the State of Tamaulipas, near the Rio Panuco. Hudson's bay Indians. 83 WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Andeeas de Olmoz, Gframmatica et Jjexicou Linguae Mexioanae, Totonaquse et Huastecee. Mexici, 1560, 2 vols. 4to. Neither Kich nor Ternaux Compans, nor even Brunet, gives the title of this hook. Brunet (III, p. 559) states only that Antonio, in his Bibliotheca Nova, Vol. I, p. 81, names several linguistic publications of Olmoz, but does • not give their titles. De Souza makes the same remark, but gives no titles either. Caeios de Tapia Zenteno (see Grammars). Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 15, 123, 124. J. S. Vater, Proben der Deutschen Volksmundarten und andere Spraohforschungen. Leipzig, Pleischer, 1816, 8vo, pp. 353 — 375. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 704. Nouvelles Annales de Voyage. Paris, 1840, 8vo, Vol. IV, pp. 9—37. A. G-ALLATIN, Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico, etc. (American Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. I, pp. 9, 10; Comparative Table to p. 114, and Comparative Vocabulary, pp. 298 —304) . GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NCTICES. Andueas de Olmoz (see Vocabularies). ' Caelos de Tapia Zenieno, Arte la la Lengua Huasteoa. Mexico, 1747, 4to. Caelos de Tapia Zenteno, Noticia de la Lengua Huasteca con Catecismo y Doctrina Christiana. Mexico, imprenta de la Bibliotheca Mexicana, 1767, 4to, pp. 10, 128. (Pp. 1—47, Grammar; pp. 48 — 88, Vocabulary; pp. 89 — 128, Catecismo and Doctrina.) An extract of this wort is given by A. Gallatin in: Collections of the Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. I, pp. 276 — 286, and also in; Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 106—113. HUDSON'S BAY INDIANS. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. BowElE, A Dictionary of the Hudson's Bay Indian Language, s. 1. e. a., 1776, two sheets in foUo. A short Vocabulary of the Language spoken among the Northern Indian^ inhabiting the north-west part of Hudson's Bay, as it was taken at difl'erent times from the mouths of Babiana and Zazana, two Indians who were on board H. M. S. "Furnace," in the year 1742, by Edwaed Thompson, surgeon of said ship. (Pp. 206 — 211 of: Aethue Doebs, An Account of the Countries adjoining Hudson's Bay. London, VJ4A, 4to.) 84 HURONS. Peofessoe W. W. Tubneb, Comparative Vocabulary of Twenty-fiTe Words of Hudson's Bay (from DoBBs), Chspewyan, Dogrib, Taoully, Umtwa, Hoopah, Navajo, and Apache, pp. 84, 85 of: Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Report upon the Indian Tribes ; added to his Report on the Route near the 3Sth Parallel, in Vol. II of : Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington, 1855, 4to. A Specimen of sundry Indian Languages spoken in the inland parts of Hudson's Bay, between that coast and the coast of California. Table to p. 202 of : Edwaed tJiO'EETii.i.B, The Present State of Hudson's Bay to which are added ..... a Specimen of Five Indian Languages London, Walker, 1790, Svo, pp. 230. G-erman translation, by E. A. W. Zimmermann. Helmstedt, 1791, Svo. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 419, 422, 424 (from Dobbs). LiEtrTENANT Edwabd Chappeil, B.N., Narrative of a Voyage to Hudson's Bay, in H. M. S. " Rosamund," containing some Account of the Tribes inhabiting that Remote Region. London, Mawman, 1817, 8vo, map, 4 plates, pp. 12, 280. HURONS, WYANDOTS. Formerly of Canada. Belonging to the Mohawk stock. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Dictionnaire de la Langue Huronne, on 72 leaves, in : Eeeeb aAEEiEL Sa&aed Theodat, Le Grand Voyage du Pays des Hurons, situ6 en I'Amerique, vers la mer douce hs derniers confius du Canada, avec un Dictionnaire de la Langue Huronne. Paris, Denis Moreau, 1632, Svo, 92 leaves, and pp. 380. The Dictionary is sometimes found separately, and the work occasionally bound in two volumes, the first of which is dated 1631. Court de Gebelin has extracted Fifteen Words from Sasabd Theodat : Monde Primitif, Vol. VIII, p. 501. N. DE L AHONTAif (see Algonquin) . Heevas, Saggio, pp. 231, 233. Smith BABTOif, New Views— Comparative Vocabularies. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 835, 336, 337 {Huron, from Sagabd ; Wyandot, from Smith Babton). A. Gallatin, Synopsis, etc.. Comparative Vocabulary, V, 26 ^ (p. 372 of Vol II of: Archffiologia Americana). The Wyandot is No. 26 of the Comparative Vocabulary, pp. 307-867, and is reprinted under A, V, 2, pp. 79, 81, 83 of Vol II df: American Ethnological Society's Transactions. John PiCKEBlNa, in the Encyclopaedia Americana, 1S31. Translated into Ger- man by Talvi (Mrs. Robinson). Leipzig, Vogel, 1834, Svo. ^ P. E. Duponceatt, M^moire sur le SystJ^me Grammatical des Langues de quelques Nations ludiennes de I'Amerique du Nord. Paris, 1838, Svo. lAKONS, 85 Balbi, Atlas Ethnographiqvie, Tab. SLI, No3. 802, 803 (Wyandot Huron). John Johnston, of Piqua, Account of the Present State of the Inclian Triljes inhabiting Ohio (Archseologia Americana, Vol. I, pp. 292 — 297). Keprinted, with some additions, in the Comparative Vocabulary of the Iroquois, pp. 393 — 400 of : II. E. Schoolcbai't's Notes on the Iroquoi*. Albany, Pease and Co., 1847, 8vo. See also : Coukt de Gebelin, Monde Primitif, 4to {Paris, V712,), Vol. VIII, pp. 499—504. Wyandot numerals (1—3,000,000), by William Walkeb, pp. 218—220 of Vol. II of : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States. J. HowsE, Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Languages — Hurons, Iroquois, Mohawks of Amherstburg, Stone Indians ; pp. 113—121 of; Proceedings of the Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1850. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTJCES. JTeehe Gabeiel Sagaed Theodat (see Vocabularies above) . From Sagaed, extracted by Professor Fiorillo, of Gottiagen, in Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 323—329. De la Langue (des Hurons), Vol. 11, pp. 458 — 490 of: P. Laeiteait, Moeurs des Sauvages Americains. Faris, 1724, 2 vols. 4to. Supplementary Notices to Sagard are given by : General Paesons, Discoveries made in the Western Country. (Memoirs of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Vol. II, part 2.) Boston, 1793, 4to, pp. 124 et seq. Grammar of the Huron Language, by a Missionary of the Village of Huron Indians at Loretto, near Quebec ; found amongst the papers of the Mission, and translated from the Latin, by John WUkie ; pp. 94 — 198 of Vol. II of : Trans- actions of the Literary and Historical Society of Quebec. Quebec, printed by Thomas Gary and Co., 1831, 8vo. lAKONS, LOWEE KILLAMUKS. Indians of Oregon^ on the shores of the Pacific, north of the Umpqua River. ' WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. No. 8, T, of the Vocabularies of North-western America, pp. 569—629 of: HoE. Hale, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition. FMladelpMa, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio. E. XXVIII, pp. 99, 101, of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. 86 ILLINOIS— lOWAYS. ILLINOIS. Indians formerly of Illinois, belonging to the Algonquin stock. The Mackenzies are closely related to them. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Heevas, Saggio, p. 233. Smith Baeton, New Views — Comparative Tocabularies. Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 363, 364 (only two Words). Balbi, Atlas Ethnograjihique, Tab. XLI, No. 808. No. IV, 22, in : A. G-ailatin's Synopsis, etc. Comparative Vocabulary (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 305—367), after an anonymous French MS. iu Duponceau's Collection, and (partly) under O, IV, 2, p. 112, of the Vocabu- laries in Vol. II of : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. INGANOS. Indians of the New Granadian territory of Mocoa (formerly departamento del Assuai). WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Vocabulario Ingano-Espaiiol, taken by the Presbyter MANtrnL Makia AlbiS, in 1854 ; pp. 20, 21, of : Los Indios del Andaqui. Popayan, imprenta de la Matri- caria, 1855, 16mo. INKtJLUOHLtJATE, KANGJULIT. In Russian Americaj on the rivers Chulitna, Kuskokwim, and Kwichpack. They belong to the Eskimo stock. WORDS and VOCABULARllCS. Vocabulary of Twenty Words, p. 119 of: K. E. ton Bae and G. TON Heimee- SEJf, Beitraege zur Kenntniss des Eussischen Keiches, Band I. St. Petersburg, 1839, 8vo. Saq-oskin, Kwigpak Vocabulary (compared with Tchwagmjute, Kuskolwimjute, Kadjak, and NaraoUer Languages), pp. 488—512 of Vol. VII of; Erman, Archiv fiir wissenschaftliche Kenntniss von Kussland. Berlin, 1849, 8vo. lOWAYS. Indians on the River Des Moines. IQUITOS IllOQUOIS. 87 "WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. No. VI, n, of the Comparative Vocabulary in A. Grallatin's Synopsis (Archseo- logia Americana, Vol. II), p. 376. Prom Cass'.MS. authority. GRAMMARS AND GR.-iMMATICAL NOTICES. Eev. Messrs. S. M. Ibvin and Wm. Hamiiton, An Iowa Grammar, illus- trating the Principles of the Language used by the Iowa, Otae, and Missouri Indians. Iowa Mission (Presbyterian) 1848, 18mo, pp. 152. Iowa Primer, ibid., only eight pages (17—24) printed, containing Dissyllables and Trisyllables, with English explanation. Eemarks on the Iowa Language, by Rev. Wm. Hamilton, pp. 377—406 of Vol. IV of : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States. IQUITOS. Brazilian Indians on the banks of the Amazon. ■WOKDS AND VOCABULARIES. Langue des Iquitos, Vocabulary No. XXI, pp. 295, 296 of: Castelnau, Vol. V^ Appendice. IROQUOIS. The great league of five (afterwards six) nations — Seneeas^ Mohawks, Onondagos, Oneidas, Kayugas, and Tuscaroras. For books on their languages, see under the different nations. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Speciinen of a Comparison of the Languages of the Delaware Stock and those of the Six Nations, p. 20 of the Appendix to Smith Baetob", New Views (edition of 1798), and Comparative Vocabularies. J. LoNfl, Voyages and Travels of an Indian Interpreter and Trader, etc. ; to which is added .... A List of Words in the Iroquois, etc., Tongues. London, Eobson, Debrett, etc., 1791, 4to, pp. 184—194, 212—215. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 318, 336, 337. Iroquois Words, pp. 22, 23 of : Geo. Henkt Loskiel, History of the Mission of the United Brethren among the Indians, translated by Ch. Ign. latrobe. Lon- don, 1794, 8vo. A small Collection of Agoneasean Words (the Agoneaseah are the five nations) , pp. 271 — 275 of Vol. II of : James MAOOAtrLET, History of the State of New York. Hew York, Gould and Banks, 1829, 3 vols. 8vo. 88 ITE JTONAMA. Comparative Vocabulary of the Iroquois! (and its Cognate, the Wyandot), pp. 393 — 400 of: Heney E., Schoolceatt, Notes on the Iroquois. Albany, Erastus H. Pease and Co., 18i7, 8to. A Vocabulary of &eographical'Name3 of the Five Nations, compared -with the Prench Names of the same places, is prefixed to : Colden's History of the Five Indian Nations of Canada. Second edition. London, John Whiston, Lockyer, Davis, and John Ward, 1750, 8vo, pp. xv, xvi. Many reprints, among others, on pp. xi, xii of: An Account of Confei-ences held between Major-G-eneral Sir William Johnson and the Indian Nations. London, A. Millar, 1756, 8vo. J. HowSE, Vocabularies of certain North American Languages — Iroquois (Language of the Iroquois Indians of Cauglinavassa and St. Regis), Mohawks, Hurons (Amherstburg, Stone Indians), pp. 113 — 121 of: Pi-oceedings of the Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1856. Dictionnaire Iroquois et Pran9ois, M, S, C, N, etc., folio, in the Mazarin Library at Paris. (See Haenel, Catalogus MSS., etc., p. 328.) GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAI, NOTICfcS. Language of the Iroquois, etc., with a Table exhibiting the Dialsctical Variations of the Language of the Iroquois, as illustrated in their geographical names ; Chap. II, Book III, pp. 394 — 411, and Schedule, explanatory of the Indian Map (geographical names). Appendix I, pp. 465 — 474 to : Lewis H. MoEeAN, League of the Ho-de-no-san-nee, or Iroquois. Rochester, Sage and Brother; New York, Mark Newman and Co., 1851, 8vo. The Language of the Iroquois, Appendix, pp. Ji98— 301 of: Minnie MtetI/B, The Iroquois ; or, the Bright Side of Indian Character. New Yorh, Appletons, 1855, 12mo. ITE, ITENES. Independent Indians of Bolivia^ on the frontiers of Brazil, on the western banks of the River Guapore. WORDS AND VOCABDLARIUS. A. D'OKBiQwr, L'Homme Americain, Vol. I, p. 164 ; Vol. II, p. 208. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. A. D'Oebignt, L'Homme Amfericain, Vol. II, pp. 259, 260. ITONAMA. Indians of the province "los Moxos," in Bolivia, on the Nonama and Machupa rivers, Missions Magdalena and San Ramon. lUJlIS KACHIQUEI,. 89 WORDS AND VOCABULARIKf!. HeetaS, Saggio, pp. 92, 93. A. D'OEBiaNT, L'Homme Americain, Vol. I, pp. 162—164 ; Vol. II, p. 208. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICKB. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 572—576. A. D'OKBigNT, L'Homme Americain, Vol. II, pp. 239, 240. lURIS. Brazilian Indians of the province of Rio Negro. Maetius (VIIj 196) calls them Yuris, and gives the names of ten tribes — 'among them the Tucano-Tapuiija. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Vocabulary (of Ninety-eight Words), pp. 521—541 of: Aleeed R. Wam.vob, A Narratire of Travels on the Amazon and Rio Negro. London, Reeve and Co., 1853, 8vo. KACHIQUEL. Indians of the province of Solola, in Guatemala. The Kiche (Quiche), and Zutugil (and Poconchi), belong to the same stock. WORDS AND VOCABDLAEIES. Benedict de ViliaoaSas wrote, according to Adelung (Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 5, note **), a Vocabulary and a Grammar of the Cakohiquel lan- guage, of which he was Professor at the University of Gruatemala. Juarros does not, however, mention his name. Numerals in the Kachiquel Language (1 — 100), by Colonel GtALINdo, p. 214 of Vol. XVIII of the First Series of: Bulletin de la Soci6t6 de Q-eographie* Faris, 1832, 8vo. Nouvelles Annales des Voyages, Vol. IV. Faris, 1840, 8vo, pp. 8 — 36. Compendio de Nombrea en la Lengua Cakchiquel ; por el P. Fe. Pantaleon de Guzman, oura del itinero por el Real patronato en esta dootrina y Cura de S. Marie de Jesus Pache. En 20 dias del mes de Octubre, 1704, MS. in 4to, pp. 336, in the possession of E. G. Squier, Hbevas, Saggio, pp. 226, 227. De. Kael Sohbezee (see Popoluka). Vocabnlario en Lengua Castellana y Guatemalteca que se llama Cakehiquelchi. MS. in 4to of 500 pages (of the l7th century), in the Imperial Library at Paris. N 90 KADJAK. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Benedict de Yiilaoahas (see Tooabularies above). P. P. Alonzo Floees, Arte de la Lengua Kakchiquel y paralelo de las quatro Lenguas Metropolitanas que hoy integran en el reyno de &oathemala. Antigua, Guatemala, 1753, Although Juarros (I, p. 343) states that this "Arte " was printed, and had proved very useful, the book was considered apocryphal until recently, when the Abbe Brasseur de Bourbourg wrote from G-uatemala that he had obtained four copies (see B. G. Squier's letter in the London Athenaeum, December 8, 1855, No. 1467). It contains a comparison of the Kachiquel with the Quiche and Zutugil, all three being dialects of one parent stock. Kores was Professor of the Kakchiquel language at the San Carlos University of Guate- mala. Arte du las tres Lenguas — Caechiquel, Quiche y Yutuhil ; por el K. ' P. Feay Fbanoisco Ximenez, del orden de predicadores. Second division of the Padre's great work on the history, languages, and antiquities of Gruatemala, existing, in MS. only, in t'e University Library of Guatemala. (For an account of this MS. see N. Triibner's paper on Central American Archceology, in the London Athenceum, May 29, 1856, No. 1492.) Arte de Lengua Eakchikel del usso de Fr. Estevan Torresano Pre''- Ano de 1754. A MS. of 143 leaves, in 8vo, in the Imperial Library at Paris. KADJAK. Island of Russian America. The inhabitants, called Konages, belong to the Eskimo stock, and speak a language similar to that of the Tschugazzi. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. J. BiLMNQs' Voyages (in Eussian). St. Petersburg, 1811, 4to, p. 121. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 840, 341, 458, 459, 466—468; Vol. IV, pp. 251 — 255. (From notices taken by Kobeok, Resanofe, and officers of the Eiussian-A'merioan Company.) Vocabulary of the Languages of Kamtshatka, the Aleutan Islands, and of Kadjak, Appendix, No. 2, [ip. 9—14 of: Mabtin Sat7EE, Account of the Expe- dition to the Northern Parts of Russia .... performed by Commodore Joseph Billings, in the years 1785 to 1794. London, Cadell, jun., and Davis, 1802, 4to. FrencTi translation, by J. Cast&a. Paris, 1802, 2 vols. 8vo j Vol. II, pp. 304-311. German translation. Berlin, 1802, 8vo, pp. 399—406. KAWITSCHEN. 91 Vocabulary of the Languages of the Islands of Cadiack and Oonalashia, the Bay of Kenay, and Sitka Sound, Appendix III, pp. 329 — 337 of: UitET LlsiAKSKT, A Voyage round the World in the Years 1803, 1801, 1805, and 1806. London, John Booth, 1814, 4to. Chkomtschdnko, Journal kept during a Cruise along the Coast of Eussian- America, in : Northern Archives for History, Statistics, and Voyages (in Eussian). St. Petersburg, 1824, 8vo, Nos. 11—18. Translated into German in : Hertha, 1825, pp. 218 — 221. KiAPEOTH, Asia Polyglotta, pp. 324, 325. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 857. (Tsehougatchi, Konega, Tsohougazzi propre, Konega d'Ue Cadjao.) Vocabularies to A. Crallatin's Synopsis, in Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana No. 1, b (from Klapeoth), p. 368. Some Words (3) and Numerals (1 — 5) of Eadjak compared with Unalachka and Eskimo, p. 123 of: K. E. VON Baeb and G-E. tost Helmeesen, Beitrage zur Kenntniss des Eussischen Reiches und der angranzenden Lander Asiens, Vol. I. St. Petersburg, 1839, 8to. JvAjsT Veniaminot, Samjetschania o Koloschenskom, Kadjacks-kom Jasikaa. St. Petersburg, 1839, 8vo. Sitka and Kadjaok Words compared, p. 163 of: E. G-. Latham, The Languages of the Oregon Territory; pp. 154—166 of Vol. I of: Journal of the Ethnological Society of London. Edinburgh, 18i8, 8vo. Eskimo and Eadjak words (21) compared, pp. 110 — 113 of the Eskimo and English Vocabulary of H. B. M. Admiralty. London, 1850, 12mo, oblong. Sagoskin, Eadjak Vocabulary compared with Eangjulit dialects, Tschngmjuto and NamoUer languages, pp. 488—512 of Vol. VII of: Erman, Archiv fiir wisseu- schaftliche Eunde von Eussland. Serlin, Eeimer 1849, 8vo. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. A few Notices from J. Veniaminov, pp. 142, 143 of: Brman's Archiv, Vol. VII (1849). KAWITSCHEN. North of Fraser's River, on the north-west coastj and on the opposite shores of Vancouver's Island. Their language bears affinity to that of the Haeeltzuk. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Kawitohen Vocabulary, by De. John Sooitleb, in : Journal of the Royal G-eo- graphifal Society of London, Vol. XI. London, 1841, 8vo, pp. 242, 244—246. 93 KEKES — KINAI. KERES, QUERES. Pueblo Indians, living at San Diego and the neighbouring pueblos. The Kiioomi (Ki-o-a-me) or Teguas (Tiguex) at San Domingo; the Cochitemi, or Quime, near Sandia and Isleta; and the Acoma, are tribes belonging to them. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Keres Vocabularies— XIII, Kiwomi; XIV, Cochitemi; XV, Acoma— taken by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple. Pp. 86—89 of Chap. V of the : Keport upon the Indian Tribes, by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, Thomas Ewbank, and Prof. W. W. Turner, added to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Keport on the Route near the 35th Parallel (Vol. II of the Pacific Eaih-oad Reports. WasUngton, 1855, etc., 4.to). See al»o " Pueblo Indians," Lieutenant Simpson's Vocabulary, No. 1. KICHAIS, KEECHIES, KEYES. Indians of the Great Prairies, related to the Pawnees, living on the Canadian River, near Chouteau's old trading-house. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Kichai Vocabulary, pp. 65 — 68 of Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, Thos. Ewbank, and Prof. W, W. Turner's Report upon the Indian Tribes ; added to Lieu- tenant A. W. Whipple's Report on the Route near the 35th Parallel (Vol. II of the Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington, 1855, 4to). Fifteen Kiehai Words compared with the Pawnee, Ricaree, Witchita, and Hueco. Ibid., pp. 68, 69. KIKKAPU, UKAHIPU. Tribe of the Shawanoe nation, between the Mississippi and Lake Michigan. WOUDS AND VOCABULARIES. Smith Baeton, New Views — Comparative Vocabularies ; and from him, in : Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 363. KINAT, KENAI, KENAIZE, TTYNAI. Indians of Russian America at Cook's Inlet and the Lakes Iliamna and Kisshick. Their language belongs to the great KINAI. 93 Athapascan (or Tinne) family. They call themselves " Tnaina" men. Sagoskin distinguishes four dialects of the Kinai lan- guage, among which are the Inhilik, Inkalit, and Ingelmut. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Wortersammlung aus der Sprache der Kinai (from D ayidoff and Eezanopp) , pp. 59—68 of: J. von Krusenstern, Woertersammlungen aus den Sprachen einiger Volker des ostliclien Asiens und der Nordwestkiiste von Amerika. St. Petersburg, 1813, 4to. Chtosiot I Davidopf, Puteschestwie w Ameriku (Voyage to America, in Kussian), St. Petersburg, 1810, 1812, 2 vols. 8to. Vol. II, Appendix, pp. xiii — xxviii. German translation, by C. J. Schultz. Berlin, 1816, 8vo. Vocabulary of the Languages of the Bay of Kenay, Appendix No. Ill, pp. 329— 337 of: Fbey LlsiAiJSKY, A Voyage round the World in the Years 1803 — 1806. London, John Booth, 1814, 4to. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 212, 213, 230, 231, 235, 237, 238. (From Eesanoit, Datidofp, Lisianskt, and others.) II, 4, of the Comparative Vocabularies, pp. 305 — 367 to A. Gallatin's Synopsis (Vol. II of the Arohseologia Americana, from Eesakojj). Eeprinted under No. F, II, pp. 99, 101 of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of; American Ethnological Society's Transactions. BiLBi, Atlas Ethnograpliique, Tab. XLI, No. 854, 855 (Ougagliakmuzi-Kinaia, Einaitsa). Von WBANaEl, in : K. E. von Bar and G-r. von Helmeraen, Beitrage zur Kenntnisa des Russischen Reichs und der angranzenden Lander, St. Petersburg, 1839. Vol. I, p. 259. Ttynai Vocabulary (of the Dialects InJciliTc, Inkalit, and Ingelmut), from L. Sasoskin's Travels (m Russian). St. Petersburg, 1847-48, 2 vols. Svo. Pp.481 — 487 of Vol. VII of : A. Eeman", Archiv fiir wissensohaftliche Kenntniss von Russland (Berlin, Eeimer, 1849, Svo) ; and also in Vol. I of the ; Denkschriften der Russischen Geographisohen Gesellschaft zu St. Petersburg {Weimar, 1849, Svo), pp. 3 . . . — 3 . . . The InMliJc and Inkalit Vocabularies reprinted in : Btjsch- mahn's Great Comparative Vocabulary, Athapask. Sprachst. Berlin, 1856, 4to, pp. 269—318. Wortverzeichniss der Kinai Sprache (from Davidoie, Resanoit, WRAifOEii, Kbtjsenstebn, and Lisiajs^sky), pp. 233 — 249; and Grosses Wortverzeichniss des Athapaskischen Spraehstammes oder der Athapaskischen und Kinai-Sprachen, pp. 269— 318 of: J. C. E. BusOHMANN, Der Athapaskische Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856, 4to. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 232—236. 94 KIOWAYS — KNISTENAUX. KIOWAYS. Roving Indians of Texas. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. A Vocabularj of their Language has been taken by the United States Boun- dary Commissioner, John K. Baetieit. Kioway Tocabulary, taken from Andres Nufiares, a Mexican, who was five years a captive among them, by Lietitenant A. W. Whipple, on pp. 78—80 of Lieu- tenant Whipple, Thomas E wbank, and Prof. W. W. Turner's Report upon the Indian Tribes, added to Lieutenant Whipple's Report on the Route near the 35th Parallel (Vol. II. of the Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington, 1855, 4to). Also : Seventeen Kioway Words compared with Shoshouee Affinities. Ibid., p. 80. KNISTENAUX, KRISTENAUX, GREES, Called also Killisteno, northernmost tribe of the Algonkin stock, between the Rocky Mountains and Hudson's Bay. Kindred dialects are spoken by the Nehethawa, Monsonik, Nenawehk, Abhitihhe, and were spoken by the Attikameg, who have entirely disappeared. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Edwabd Um:peetili,e, The Present State of Hudson's Bay to which are added A Specimen of Five Indian Languages London, Walker, 1790, 8vo, pp. 179 et seq. German translation, by B. A. W. Zimmermann, Helmstedt, 1791, 8to ; gives the dialect of the Nehethawas or Kalisteno. Names of the Moon, and Examples of the Enistenaux and Algonquin Tongues, pp. cv, cvi, cvii — cxvi of : Alexandee Mackenzie, Voyage from Mon- treal through the Continent of North America London, Cadell, jun., and Davis, 1801, 4to. French, translation, by J. Oastera. Paris, Dentu, 1807, 8vo, pp. 261—274. German translation. Samburg, 1802, 8vo, pp. 118 et seq. N.B. — The Knistenaux Vocabulary is reprinted, pp. 133 — 141 of: New Travels among the Indians of North America ; being a compilation from Lewis and Clark, and .... others, with a Dictionary of the Indian Tongue. Compiled by William Fishee. Philadelphia, James Sharan, 1802, 12mo. Also in the popular book : Events in Indian History also an Appendix containing an Indian Vocabulary, Philadelphia, G. Miles and Co., 1842, 8vo, pp. 529- 536. KNISTENAUX. 95 A Specimen of the Cree or Knistenaux tongue, which is spoken by at least three- fourths of the Indians of the north-west country on the east side of the Eocky Mountains, pp. 385—403 of: Daniel William Haemon, A Journal of Voyages and Travels in the Interior of North America .... to which are added .... considerable Specimens of the Two Languages most extensively spoken .... Andocer, Massachusetts, Flagg and Gould, 1820, 8vo. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 418, 419 (from Mackenzie), and the Nehethwa (from TJmi'eetille) . Killisteno, or Cree, in the Vocabularies of Indian Languages. Appendix (part 4, pp. 449—459 of Vol. II) to : William H. Keatih&, Narrative of an Expedition to the Sources of St. Peter's Biver . . . performed in the year 1823 .... under the command of Stephen H. Long, Major, U. S. T. B. Philadelphia, Carey and Lea, 1824, 2 vols. 8vo. Vocabulary taken by Proeessoe Say, and printed also in the : Astronomical and Meteorological Becords, and Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken in the Expedition for Exploring the Mississippi and the Western Waters, under the command of Major S. H. Long. Philadelphia, 1822, 8vo, pp. Ixx, Ixxxviii. And in the Comparative Vocabulary of various Dialects of the Lenape .... together with a Specimen of the Winnebago, pp. 135 — 148 of the reprint of ; De. Ebwaeds, Observations on the Mohegan Language ; pp. 81 — 160 of : Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society, second series, Vol. X. Boston, Phelps and Faruham, 1823, 8vo. Beprint, Boston, Little and Brown, 1843, 8vo. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 819. (Knistenaux propre, Cree). IV, 7, of the Comparative Vocabulary, pp. 305 — 36V of A, Q-allatin's Synopsis, etc., in Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana (from Haemon and Mackenzie) . Bepriuted, partly, under N, IV, 1, p. 106 of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. Beise des Peinzen Maximilian ztt Wied in das Innere von Nordamerika in den Jahren 1832 bis 1834. Coblenz, 1839, 18 tl, 2 vols. 4to; Vol. II, pp. 505 —511. Vocabulary of the Principal Indian Dialects in use among the Tribes in the Hudson's Bay Territory .... Cree, pp. 322 — 328 of Vol. II. of: John McLean, Notes of a Twenty-five Tears' Service in the Hudson's Bay Company. London, Eichard Bentley, 1849, 2 vols. 12mo. Vocabulary of the Chipewyan Tongue, with Cree and English translations, pp. 387 — 395 of Vol. II of : SiE John Bichaedson, Arctic Exploring Expedition. London, 1851, 2 vols. 8vo. Note. — The Cree from a very full alphabetical MS. Vocabulary, found by Bichardson at the Caultere House (trading port) . GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. J. HowSE, A Grammar of the Cree Language, with which is combined an Analysis of the Chippeway Dialect. London, 1844, 8vo. 96 KOLTSCHANBS — KOLUSCHES. KOLTSCHANES, GALZANES. Indian nation of Russian America^ north of the Eiver Atna. Divided into many tribes. WORDS AND VOCABCLARIKS. Von Weangel, in : E. E. von Bar and Gr. von Helmersen, Beitrage zur Eenntniss des Euasischen Eeichs und der angranzenden Lander Asiens, St. Petersburg, 1839, 8vo ; Vol. I, p. 259. ^Reprinted in the Grreat Comparative Vocabulary pp. 269— 318 of : BTrscHMANif, Athapaskischer Spraclistamm. Seilln, 1856, 4to. KOLUSCHES. In Russian America, at Sitka Bay and Norfolk Sound. The Tschinkitans belong to them. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Gr. FoRSTER, GJeschichte der Beiseu an der NordwestlicUen und Nordoatlielieu Kiiste Ton Amerika. Berlin, 1791, 3 vols. 8to ; Vol. Ill, pp. 142 et seq. (from Poetlock), 155, 169, 175, 216 (from Dixon). A Voyage round the World, but more particularly to the North-west Coast of America, performed in 1785 — 1788, in the " King George," and " Queen Charlotte," Captains Portlock and Dixon. By Captain GrEOEffE Dixon. London, Groulding, 1789, 4to, pp. 32, 360, 48, twenty-two plates. French translation, by M. Lebas. Paris, 1789, 2 vols. 8vo. Same, by Captain Nathaniel Poetlock. London, Stockdale, 1789, 4to, pp. 450, twenty plates. Abridgment of Portlock and Dixon's Voyage. London, Stockdale, 1789, Svo, pp. 272, map and plate. New title, ibid., 1791, 8vo. Voyage autour du Monde pendant les ann^es 1790, 1791 et 1792, par L. Mae- OHAND ; prfoede d'une Introduction Historique . . . par C. L. Claret Fleurieu. Paris, imprimerie de la Elipublique, 1799, 4 vols. 4to. Vol. I, pp. 587 et seq. Voyage de La Perouse autour du Monde, publie oonformement au Decret da 22 Avril, 1791, et r^dige par L. A. MUet Mureau, General de Brigade. Paris, 1797, 2 vols. 4to, and atlas. German translation — Berlin, 1799, 2 vols. 8to ; Vol. I, p. 339. Chvostot I Datidoff, Puteschestwie w Amerieu, St. Pelershwrg, 1812, 2 vols. Svo. Appendix, pp. 1 et seq. Wortersammlung aus der Sprache der Koljuschen (from Eezanoff, Lisianskt, and others), pp. 47—55 of: J. v. Krusenstem, Woertersamnilungeu aus den Spraehen einiger Volker des ostUchen Asiens und der Nordwestkiiste von Amerika. St. Petersburg, 1813, 4to. KONZA KULA-NAPO. 97 Mitliridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 212, 213, 22 . . . the Keport of Lieitt. J- H. SlMPSOlf of an Expedition into the Navajo Country. (Exec. Docum. Senate, No. 64, 31st Congress, Session 1). Washington, printed at the Union Office, 1850, 8to, plates, maps, pp. 250. A Vocabulary of the Navajo Language has been taken by the United States Boundary Commissioner, John K. B^etlett. Captain J. H. Eaton, United States Agent, Navajo Vocabulary, pp. 416^ 432 (pp. 429 — 431, numerals) of Vol. IV of Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States. Navajo Vocabulary, taken in 1852 by LlE-gTENANT A. W. Whippie, pp. 81 — 83 of Chap. V of his, Thomas Ewbank's, and Professor "W. W. Turner's Report upon the Indian Tribes ; added to Lieutenant Whipple's Report on the Route near the 35th Parallel (Vol. II of the : Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington, 1855, 4to). Peopessob W. W. Tcenee, Comparative Vocabulary of Twenty-five Words of Navajo, Apache, Hudson's Bay, Dogrib, Chepewyan, TaouUy, Umkwa, and Hoo- pah, pp. 84, 85, ibid. Comparative Vocabulary of the Athapascan and Kinai Languages (also, Navajo and Ticorilla), pp. 269 — 318 of: BtrsoHMANN, Athapaskischer Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856, 4to. NEW brunswice:. A dialect of the Mikmak. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. J. Howse, Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Languages, Nipis- sing, Shawnees, Brunswick, Duplicate Blackfoot, pp. 102—113 of: Proceedings of Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1850. All these are in one dialect — the Mikmak. It seems that the sound of the letter r is wanting in this language. The Vocabulary was originally made by Antonx Roqees, an intelligent old hunter (but not an Indian), who had lived some time amongst the Indians, and is believed to have been well acquainted with their language. He was assisted by Abitase, said to be half Indian and half English. NEWFOUNDLAND. Island on the coast of Labrador. Its inhabitants belong to the Eastern Algonkins. The Milicite and Mikmahs are part of them. The Bethuck are extinct. 134 NIPISSING NORTON SOUND. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Vocabulary of the Language of the Natives of NewfouncHand, procured by the Ebv. J. XjEIOH from Mary March, a native woman, taken up the Bay of Exploits by Mr. Peyton, in March, 1818 (Journal of the Eoyal Geographical Society of London, Vol. IV, pp. 218—220. London, 1834, 8vo). An extract from Mabt Maeoh's Vocabulary is contained in : B.. Mont- gomery Martin's British Colonial Library, Vol. VI, pp. 300, 301. Xiondon, 1851. NIPISSING. Of the Algonquin stock of Indians, living on the Lake of the Two Mountains, in the district of Montreal, Lower Canada. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. J. HowSE, Comparative Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Lan- guages, Nipissing, Shawnees, Brunswick, and Duplicate Blackfoot (Proceedings of the Philological Society, Vol. IV, pp. 102—113. London, 1850). NIQUIRANS. Mexicans settled in the district of Nicaragua, between the Lake of Nicaragua and the Pacific Ocean. They speak a dialect of the Mexican language. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. E. Geo. Sqtjiee, Nicaragua .... New York, Appletons, 1852, 2 vols. 8vo ; Vol. II, p. 314 — and Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. Ill, part 1, p. 101. On the Aztek Language in Nicaragua, pp. 746 — 778 of : John Cabl Edwabd BusoHMANN, Uber die Aztekischen Ortsnamen, 1'= Abtheilung. Serlin, Diimmler, 1853, 4to. NORTON SOUND. On the north-west coast, inhabited by Eskimaux. WORDS AND vocabularies. A Voyage to the Pacific Ocean .... performed under the direction of Captains Cook, Clabk, and Goee .... 1776—1780. London, 1784, 3 vols, 4to ; Vol. II, p. 334. Edition, Builin, 1784, 8vo ; Vol. Ill, pp. 554, 655. Appendix VI, a table to show the affinity between the Languages spoken at Oonalashka and Nor- ton Sound, and those of the Greenlanders and Esquimaux. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 461—466 (from the above). NOTTOWAYS NUTKA. 135 NOTTOWAYS. Iroquois tribe of Virginia, nearly extinct. They called them- selves Cherohakah. WOEDS AJTD TOCABTTLAETES. Ko. V, 32, of the Comparative Vocabulavy to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 305—367). From MS. authorities of J. AVooD and Tbetezant. And under B, Y, 6, p. 115, of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of : Traneactions of the American Ethnological Society. NUSDALTJM. Indian tribe of the north-west coast on Hood's Channel, related to the Haeeltzuk and Nutka Indians. ■WOEDS AND VOCABUXAKIES. Noosdalum VocahiJary, by T)r. John Sootoer (Journal of the Royal Geogra- phical Society of London, Vol. XI. London, 1841, 8vo ; pp. 242, 244—246). Noosdalum and Atnah Words oonipaved, p. 157 of: K. G. Latham, The Languages of the Oregon Territory (pp. 154 — Ififi of Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, Vol. I, pp. 154—166). :EiliniurgJt, 1848, 8vo. NUTKA, WAKASH. Indians of Vancouver's Island (their proper name is Yucuatl) . WOEDS AND YOCABTILAErES. A Voyage to the Pacific Ocean .... performed imder the direction of Captains Cook, Ciabk, and Goee .... 1776 — 1780. London, 1784, 3 vols. 4to ; Vol. II, Appendix No. 4. Appendix IV, Vocabulary of the Language of Nootka or King George's Sound, April, 1778, pp. 542 — 548 of the Lublin edition : Chmeenlaque, W. Watson, and Al. 1784, 3 vols. 8vo. Tlaoquatch and Wootta (from Cook) Words compared, p. 156 of : E. G. Latham, The Languages of the Oregon Territory (pp. 154 — 166' of Vol I of the Journal of the Ethnological Society of London). Mdinburgli, 1848, 8vo. J. Fb. BoTJB&oiir&, Eelation d'un Voyage recent des Bspagnoles sur les Odtes 1 36 OMAGUA. Nord-ouest de I'Amferique eeptentrionale (Archives Litteraires de I'Europe. Fwris and TuUngue, 1804—1818, XVII, 8vo, Wo. IV, 1804, pp. 78, 79)- The numerals 1—10, from a MS. of Me. Mozino in : A. de Humboldt, Essai politique sur le Koyaume de la Nouvelle Espague. Paris, Sohoell, 1811, 2 toIs. 4to ; Vol. I, p. 322. Vooabulario del Idioma de los Habitantes de Nutia (Eelacion del Viage heoho por las goletas SutU y Mexicana en el anno de 1792, para reconocer el estrecho de Puca, Con una introduoion en que se da noticia de los expedieiones executadas anteriormente por los Espanoles en busca del paso del ndrd-este de la America. Madrid, en la imprenta real, 1802, 8to, atlas, pp. clxTiii, 185 ; pp. 178 — 184). A list of "Words in the Wootkiau Language the most in use, p. 5, and War Song of the Nootka Tribe, p. 166 of: Narrative of the Adventures and Sufferings of JoHH R. Jewitt, only survivor of the crew of the ship " Boston," during a Captivity of nearly Three Years among the Savages of Nootka Sound, with an Account of the Manners, Mode of Living, and Eeligious Opinions of the Natives. New YorTc, printed for the publisher, s. a., 16mo. A popular book, compiled from Jewitt's Oral Relations, by Richaed Alsop, in 1815. It has very often been reprinted. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 115 (from CoOK, numerals from DixON and Humboldt). Baibi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 846. The numerals 1 — 10, as given by Cook and by Dixoir, compared, p. 35, note *, of: J. H. M'CiriLOCH, jun., Researches, etc. Baltimore, E. Lucas, jun,, 1829, 8vo. No. XXV, 60, of the Comparative Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc., in: Vol. II of the Arohseologia Americana, p. 371 (from Jewitt). Reprinted in the Vocabularies, Vol. II of : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, under U, XXI, p. 121. No. 14 of Vocabularies of Languages of North-western America, pp. 569 — 629 of : HoKATio Hale, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition. PMladelpAia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio. The language is by him called: Kwoneatshatka (Newittee). Reprinted, CXXI, pp. 89, 91, 93, 95 of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II. Euca Strait and Wakash Words, p. 156 of: R. Or. Latham, The Languages of the Osegon Territory (Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, pp. 154 — 166). Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo. OMAGUA. Formerly a powerful nation of the regions between the Maraiion and Orinoco. The principal tribes of the Omaguas were — 1. The Omagua propre, between the Maranon and Yapura. 2. The Enagtia, on the Guaviari, in Venezuela. 3. The Yuri- magua, on the Yurubaj and in the province of Solimoes. ONEIDA. 137 4. The Agua, in New Granada and Venezuela. 5. The Kokama, on the Lower Ucayale. 6. The Yete, on the Napo^ in New Granada. 7. The Tokantin, on the Tokantin^ in the Brazilian provinces Goyaz and Para. WORDS AND VOCABULAIUES. GtiLii, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, pp. 371 — 375. Heetas, Vocabolario, pp. 161 et seq. Heetas, Saggio, pp. 98, 99. Hbbvas, Origine, pp. 29, 37, 41, 48, 78, Tabb. XLIX, L et seq. Heetas, Catalogo, p. 24, nota 1. Heetas, Aritmetica, pp. 96, 97. Mithridates, Tol. Ill, pp. 554, 603, 611 (from GiLli). Baxbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 493. A. D'Oebignt, L'Homme Americaiu, Vol. II, p. 274. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICKS. GiLil, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, pp. 371—375. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 604—610. ONEIDA. Indians of the Iroquois stock, in the west of the State of New York. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Heetas, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 239 (numerals). Smith Baeton, New Views, etc. — ComparatiTC Vocabularies ; and p. 20 of tiio Appendix. Edition of 1798. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 318, 332, 333 (from Smith Baetoh), Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 796. P. E. DupoNCEitr, M^moire sur le Systeme Grammatical, etc. Paris, 1838, pp. 259—269. No. V, 30, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. G-allatin's Synopsis, etc. (Vol. II of the : Archaeologia Americana, pp. 305—367), and (partly) under R, V, 3, Vol. II, p. 114, of : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. (From Baeton and MS. Notes of jE^rEESOif.) T 138 ONONDAGA. EiCHAED TJpDiKE SHERMAN, Oneida Vocabulary, Appendix M, pp. 279— 281, to : Henry E. Schoolcraff, Notes on tlie Iroquois. New York, Bartlett andWel- ford, 18i6, Sto (New York State Documents, No. 24, Senate, 1846), and pp. 393—400, ComparatiTe Vocabulary of the Iroquois, of the same work, published as a book. Albany, Pease and Co., 1847, 8vo. Oneida Vocabulary, by Young Skenando, Oneida Castle : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. II, pp. 482—493. ONONDAGA. Iroquois tribe, formerly of the west of the State of New York. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Heetas, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 239 (numerals). Smith Baeton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabulary; and Appendix, p. 20 (edition of 1798) ; and, from him, Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 318, 332, 333. Balbi, Atlas Ethnograpliique, Tab. XLI, No. 797. Onondaga Vocabulary, by Aeeaham le Foest : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. II, pp. 482—493. No. V, 28, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. (Vol. II of the: Archseologia Americana, pp. 305 — 367). Keprinted, with addi- tions, in the Comparative Vocabulary of the Iroquois, No. 3 : Henry K. School- craft, Notes on the Iroquois, pp. 393— 4O0. Albany, Pease and Co., 1847, 8vo. Eeprinted (partly) under E, V, 1, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II, p, 114, Deutsuh Onondagisches Worterbuch von David Zeisbeegee, 7 vols. 4to j and, A Collection of Words and Phrases in the Iroquois and Onondago Language, explained in German, by the Kev. Chb. Ptelsus, 4to, pp. 140. The above two MSS. are deposited in the library of the American Philosophical Society, at Phila- delphia. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. The following MSS. are deposited in the library of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia : — • Essay of an Onondago Grammar, or a Short Introduction to learn the Onendago alias Maqua Tongue, by David Zeisbeegee, 4to, pp. 67. Onohdagoische Grammatica, by the same, 4to, pp. 87. Another Onondago Grammar, in the German language, by the same, 4to, pp.176. OPATA — OSAGE. 139 OPATA. Christian Indians of Sonera, in the central part of that State. The Eudeve is closely related to the Opate language. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Hebtas, Saggio, p. 124. Heetas, Origine, Tabb. XLIX, L et seq, Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 161, 165—169 (from Hebvas). The United States Boundary Commissioner, John E. Babtlett, has taken a Vocabulary of tbeir language. OREGONES. Brazilian Indians on the Amazon. (Martius, No. 190, says that the Portuguese call a wild nation on the Iga Orelhudos, but that the Spaniards call them Orejones. The name of Orelhudos is given by the Portuguese also to the Aroaquis, on the rivers Nhamunda and Negro, No. 143.) WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Langue des Oregones : Vocabulary, No. XX, pp. 294, 295 of; Castelnait, Vol. Y, Appendice. OSAGE. iDacotah Indians, called 2i\soWawah,Huzzaio,Osaicses,Washas, or Ous; about Arkansas and Osage rivers. They are divided into the Chamers (Arkansas, Clermont), Great and Little sages. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. J. S. Vatee, Analekten, Zweites Heft, Abtheilung 2, pp. 53—62. Vocabulary of some Words in the Osage Language, Appendix I, pp. 213 — 219 of: John Beadbuet, F.L.S., Travels in the Interior of America, in the years 1809, 1810, 1811. Liverpool, printed for the author, by Smith and Galway. London, published by Sherwood, Neely, and Jones, 1817, 8ro. BalBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 784. No. VI, 37, of the Com- parative Vocabulary to A. Oallatin's Synopsis, etc. (Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana, pp. 305 — 367). (From Beadeuey, and MS. Notices of L. Cass and Db. Muebat.) I K) OTO. Keprinfed under B, VI, 2, pp. 82, 85, 87, 89 of the Vocabulary, in Vol. II of: TraiisaetioDS of the American Ethnological Society. Reise des Prinzeu MAXiMitiAN zu Wied in Amerika. Cohlenz, 1839 — 1841, 2 vols. 4to ; Vol. II, pp. 637—645. Glossaire Osage, pp. 261, 262 of : Victor Texiee, Voyage aux Prairies Osages en Louisiane et Missouri, 1839, 1810. Clermont Ferrand, Parol. Paris, Eovet, 1844, 8vo. A MS. Vocabulary of the Language of the Osage Indians, by Db. Mubeat, of Louisville, Kentucky, is in the library of the American Philosopliical Society at Philadelphia. Vocabulary of (69) Words m the Osage Language, p. 275 of the : Diary nf Matthew Clakkson, west of the AUeghennies, in 1766. (Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. IV, pp. 265—278). GBAMMAES AND UEAMMATICAL NOTICES. Washashe Wageressa Pahugreh Tse. The Osage First Book. Boston, Crocker and Brewster, for the American Board of Foreign Missions, 1834, 18mo, pp. 126. OTO. Called also Otoes, Othouez, Oktolaktos, Wahtohtana, Wahtohtak, on the left banks of the Platte River. They are divided into Otoes and Pahoja. WORDS AND vocabularies. T. Sat, pp. Ixxii — Ixxx of: Astronomical and Meteorological Kecords and Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken on the Expedition for Exploring the Mississippi .... under the command of Major Long. Philadelphia, 1822, 4to. Balei, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 776 (Otoes, Ouahtokta). No. VI, 38, of the Comparatire Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. (Arohseologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 305 — 367), and S, VI, 4, p. 117, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II (from Sat). Eeise des Prinzen MAXIMILIAN ztr Wied, etc. CoiZe»«, 1839 — 1841, 2 vols, 4to ; Vol. II, pp. 612—630. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Note 16 (on the Winnepago and Otoe Dialects), pp. 149—151, of John Picker- ing's edition of Dr. Edwards's Observations on the Mohegan Language (Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society, \o\. X, Second Series. Boston, printed by Phelps and Farnham, 1823, 8vo ; pp. 81-160. Bepriuted, Boston, Idttle and Brown, 1843, 8vo). OTOMI. 141 OTOMI. Mexican IndianSj tlie north-west of the Valley of Anahuac. Some also in the neighbourhood of the city of Mexico. WORDS AND VOCABULARIKS, Yocabulario de la Lengua Otomi, por Fray Pedro Castillo. M3. Castillo wa8 one of the earliest missionaries amongst the Otomies, whose language he perfectly understood and taught. He died in 1577, and was buried at Tula. (De Souza.) IToEAiio Caeoohi, Q-rammatioa y Voeabulario de la Lengua Otomi. Mexico, 1645, 4to. De Souza states that the MSS. of the Grammar and of the Vocabulary are in the library of Tepozotlan. Tocabulario de la Lengua Otomi, por P. JtJAN DE Dios Casteo, 4to. Castro wrote about the year 1690, and his MSS. of both the Vocabulary and Grammar are preserved in the library of the College of Tepozotlan. (De Souza.) Voeabulario de la Lengua Otomi, por Illmo. D. !Pe. Sebastian Kieeeo, Obispo de la Paz. Printed in Mexico, according to Pinelo. Voeabulario Megicano y Otomi, por Pr. Pedeo Paiaoios. MS., according to De Souza, In the library of the College of Tlateluco, in Mexico. El Licenciado D. Litis de Nete t Molina, Eeglas de Orthographia, Diccio- nario y Arte del Idioma Othomi, breve instrucoion para los principiantes. Mexico, 1767, 8to, pp. 160 (the Dictionary, pp. 13—96). Heevas, Origine, pp. 37, 118, Tabb. XLIX, L, LI et seq. Hebtas, Saggio, pp. 119, 120. Heevas, A^ocabolario, pp. 161 et seq. Heevas, Aritmetica, pp. 109, 110. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 15, 123, 124 (from Heevas and Neve). On p. 115, Ran-q-ei;, P. Palaoios, Sebast. Eibeeo, and Juan de Dio» Casteo are named as having written Grammars and Vocabularies of th& Otomi — a statement confirmed by De Souza, upon whose authority we give the fviU titles. J. S. Vatee, Proben der Deutschen Volksmundarten und Dr. Seetzen's Lin- guistischer Naohlass, etc. Leipzig, Fleischer, 1816, 8vo; pp. 353 — 375. P. Joaquin Lopez Yepes, Cateoismo y Declaracion de la Doctrina Cristiana en Lengua Otomi ; con un Voeabulario del Mismo Idioma. Megico, 1826, 4to. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 706. Emanuel Naxeea, De Lingua Othomitorum Dissertatio. FhiladelpMa, 1835., 142 OTOMI. 4to, in ; Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, New Series, Vol. V. FhiladelpMa, published by the Society ; printed by James Kay, 1834—1837, 4to ; pp. 249—296. Nouvelles Annales dea Toyages. Faris, Vol. IV (1840), 8vo ; pp. 9—37. Vocabolario Spagnuolo-Italiano-Otomi, pp. 27—78 of: PloooiOMlNl'S Gram- mar (see Grammars). Otomi Vocabulary in : A. Gallatin's Notes on the Semi-ciTilized Nations of Mexico, etc, (Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. I, pp. 298—304. New York, Bartlett and Welford, 1845, 8to). GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Arte y Catecismo de la Lengua Otomi, por Je. Alonzo Ean&el, Provincial de Sula (1529, 1546, MS.) Gram6.tica de la Lengua Otomi, mas correcta y aumentada que la de Fr. Pedeo Palacios. MS. by Oeoz (Fr, Pedbo), Franciscan, Instructor in the Imperial College of Sta. Oruz de Tlateluco ; died 1597. Wrote, besides, rarious works in Nahuatl. HoBATio Oaeochi, Grammatica, etc. (see Vocabularies), pp. 1 — 12, 97 — 160. Arte de la Lengua de los Otomites, con todos bus difereutes Dialectos, por D. Fbanoisoo Pukon, Maestro de el Idioma Otomi en la Universidad de Megioo, ano 1690. MS. in the library of the University of Mexico. Gramltica de la Lengua Otomi, y m^todo para coufesar S. los Indies en ella, por Don Fhahcisoo Haedo, 8vo. Printed a second time in Mexico, 1731. Luis db Neve t Molina (see Vocabularies). An Italian Extract of this Grammar was published under the title : Coute Enea Silvio Vincenzo Piccolomini, Grammatica della Lingua Otomi esposta in Italiano, secondo I'a traccia del Licenjiate Luis de Neve y Molina. Col Voeabulario Spagnuolo-Otomi, spiegato in Italiano. Uoma, Tipogr. Propag. Fide. 1841, 12mo, pp. 82 (the Grammar, pp. 5—26). Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 113 — 123 (from Neve t Molina). Emanuel Naxeea (see Vocabularies). V. PicoOLOMiNl (see Vocabularies). ;, A. Gallatin, Notes, etc. (Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. I, pp. SdSS- 298: extracts from Neve t Molina, pp. 286 — 294, and from Naxeea, pp. 294—298). Arte 6 Gramatica de la Lengua Otomi, por P. Juan de Digs Casteo, MS. (see under Vocabularies). Arte 6 Gram6.tica de la Lengua Otomite, por Don Juan Feancisco Escamilla. Escamilla was Professor of Otomi in the University of Mexico (De Souza's authority). OTTAWAS — OTTO-MAKU. 143 Arte de la Lengua Otomi, y Catecismo j Coufesonario, por Fr. Pedko Palacios, 8vo. MS., according to De Souza, in the library of the College of Tlateluco, in Mexico. Arte breTe de la Lengua Otomi, compuesto por el Pe. Fr. Alonzo Uebano, de la Orden N. P. S. Augustin, 15 leaves, 4to, MS. Original in the Imperial Library of Paris ; copy in possession of E. G-. Squier, New York. The original is accompanied with a large and very complete Dictionary — Otomi, Nahuatl (Mexican), and Spanish (421 leaves, 4to), quite equal in extent to Molina's celebrated Vocabulario Mexicano. OTTAWAS. Indians of the Algonquin stock in Micliigan and Ohio. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Comparison of Words and Sentences in the Dialects of the Ottowwaws and Menomonies, pp. 392 — 398 ; Comparison of the language of some Versions of the Bible, with the Ottawwaw of the present time, pp. 421 — 422 ; and Comparison of a G-reek Sentence with the Dialect of the Ottawwnws, p. 423 of : John Tanneb'S Narrrative of his Captivity and Adventures prepared for the press by Edwin James, M.D. New York, Gr. and C. and H. Carvill, 1830, 8vo. No. J.V, 9, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. G-allatin's Synopsis, etc. (Archgeologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 305 — 367). Keprinted (partly) under N, IV, 4, p. 107, of the Vocabularies in : American Ethnological Society's Trans- actions, Vol. II. (Erom Tannee, and MS. Notices of Me. Hamemn.) Anichinabek Amisinahikaniwa, The Indian Book. Detroit, printed by Geo. L. Whitney, 1830, 18mo, pp. 106 ; contains, on pp. 104, 105, a Vocabulary of 40 words in Erench and Ottawa, by the Missionary Dejean. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. JoNATHAir Meeker, Ottawa First Book. Shawnee Mission, printed by J. G-. Pratt, 1838, 18mo, pp. 229. Abinodjuag Omasindiganiwan. Buffalo, printed by Oliver Steele, 1837, 8vo. pp.8. Child's Book. Detroit, Bagg and Harmon, 1845, 18mo, pp. 8. OTTOMAKU, OTTOMACQUE. Indians of Bolivia^ on the banks of the Yarura. The Taparita are said to speak a dialect of their language. 1 i4- OTUQUIS — PACAGUAllAS. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. &ILII, Saggio, Vol. Ill, p. 213 ; and, from him, in the : Mithridates, Vol. Ill, p. 650. Heevas, Origine, Tabb. L et seq. OTUQUIS. Indians of Bolivia, of the province of Chiquitos. Having been compelled by the Jesuits to adopt the Chiquito, their language is nearly lost. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Das Land Otuquis in BoliTia. Naoh einem Originalbericht von MoESSACH, besohrieben Ton Dr. G-. L. Kriegk. Frankfurt, 1838, 8to ; pp. 23, 24. Otuke Tooabulary (23 words) given by: D'Oebi&nt, L'Homme Amfericaiii, Vol. I, pp. 163 — 164. ; Vol. II, p. 136 ; who also gives some general remarks on the Language of the Otuke, Vol, II, pp. 176, 177. OYAMPIS. Carib tribe of French Guyana. WOEDS AND VOCABULARIES. Adam db BAtrEE et P. Feebe, De la Langue Oyampis, avec Vocubulaire, pp. 107—109; and Lepeieue, Vocabulaire Oyampis, pp.225 — ^229 of: Bulletin de la Societe de Geographie, Second Series, Vol. I. Paris, 1834, 8to. A. D'Oebignt, L'Homme Americain, Vol. II, p. 276. PACAGUAllAS. Moxos Indians, on the confluence of the rivers Beni and Mam ore, in Bolivia. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. A. D'Oebi&nt, L'Homme Amfericain, Vol. 1, p. 164 ; Vol. II, p. 208. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. A. D'Oebisnt, L'Homme Am&icain, Vol. II, p. 263. PAICONECA PAMPTICOUGH. 145 PAICONECA. Indians of the province of Chiquitos, near Concepcionj between the rivers Blanco and Verde. They belong to the Chiquito stock ; one of their tribes is the Paunaca. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Vocabulary of Twenty-three Worrls, pp. 162, 161 of Vol. I of: A. D'Okbisny, L'Homme Amerioaiti, and p. 162 of Vol. I, and p. 136 of Vol. II, Vocabulary of five Words of the I'aunaca tribe. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. A. U'OEBiQirr, L'Homme Americain, Vol. II, pp. 190, 191. PALAIHNI, PALAIKS, Indians of south-western Oregon, on the northern frontiers of Upper California. WORDS AND TOCABULAEIES. No. 11, W, of the Vocabularies of North-western America (pp. 569—629) of: Hoe. Hale, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedi- tion. Philadelphia, Lea and Blauchard, 184B, folio ; and F, XXXI (pp. 98, 100), of the VoCi.buUries in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II. PAMPTICOUGH. Indian tribe of North Carolina, now extinct. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. A small Dictionary of Tuskerul-a, Pampticongh, Woccon, in : John Lawsojt, Q-ent., Surveyor-General of North Carolina, a New Vojage to Carolina .... and a Journal of a 'Ihousand Mdes tnivelled through several Nations of Indians, giving a pai ticular Account of their Customs, Manners, etc. London, 1709, small 4toj pp. 225-227. First printed in : Capt. John Stevens, A New Collection of Voyages and Travels .... none of them ever before printed. London, December, 1708. To be continued monthly, 4to. (In Vol. I, afterwards with separate title, ibid., 1709, 1714, and 1718, 4to.) German translation, Hamburg, 1772, 8vo. John Bbickell, M.D., The Natural Histoi-y of North Carolina, with an Account U 146 PANOS — PATACHOS. of the Trades, Manners, and Customs of the Christian and Indian Inhabitants. Dublin, 1737, 8vo ; new title, ibid., 1743, 8vo (the Dictionary from Lawson), Hesvas, Aritmetioa, p. 114. Smith Baeton, New Yiews, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies. Mithridates (from the above), Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 360—362. Baibi, Atlas Bthnographique, Tab. XLI, Ifo. 809. Iso. IV, K, p. 375, of the Comparative Vocabulary to : A. Gallatin's Synopsis (i rchseologia, Americana, Vol. II). From I/AWSon, Heeiot, Lane. Comparison of the Language of the ancient Pampticos of North Carolina with the Algonquin Language, and of the ancient Waccoa of that State and the Catawba of South Carolina (Schoolobapt's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. V, pp. 552—558 ; Tuskarora, Parapticough, and Waccoa, pp. 555, 556 ; Pamptico, Natic, and Chippewa, pp. 556, 557). PANOS. Brazilian Indians on the banks of the River Ucayale. WORDS and vocabularies. Laugue des Panos (Langue generale de I'tJcayale), Vocabulary, No. XVIII of: Castelnatj, Vol. V, Appendice, pp. 292, 293. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Note sur la G-rammaire Pani. Becueillie par les Missionaires de I'Ucayale : Castelnau, Vol. V, Appendice, pp. 301, 302. ■ PARENI. Indians of the Maypure Mission^ on the Eiver Mataveni. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Al. be Humboldt et A. Bonpeand, Voyage aux Regions fequinoxiales du Nouveau Continent. Faris, 1819, 2 vols. 4to ; Vol. II, pp. 366 et seq. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 610. A. D'OBBiauY, L'Homme Amfericain, Vol. II, p. 274. PATACHOS. Brazilian Indians in the province Porto Seguro, on the rivers Porto Seguro and Mucury. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Keise des Prinzen Maximilian zu Wied. FranJcfurt, 1820, 1821, 2 vols. 4to ; Vol. II, pp. 320 efc seq. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 504. PAWNEE PENOBSCOT. 1 I'/ PAWNEE, PANI. Warlike tribe on the banks of tbe rivers Platte and Kansas, also on Red River. WOEDS AND VOCABULARIES. T. Sat, Tocabulary, pp. Ixii— Ixxxv of: Astronomical .... Records and Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken on the Expedition for Exploring the Mississippi .... under .... Major St. H. Long. Philadelphia, 1822, 8vo. Baibi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 738. Keise des Prinzen Maximilian zv Wied, etc. CoSZeraz, 1839 — 1841, 2 toIs. 4to ; Vol. II, pp. 630—632. No. XVII, 52, of tbe Comparative Vocabulary to A. G-aiiatin's Synopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 305 — 367) ; and No. E, XVIT, pp. 96—98, of Vocabularies in: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II. FiftPen Pawnee Words compared with Riccaree, Kichai, Hueeo, and Witchita, pp. 68, 69 of the Report upon the Indian Tribes, added to Lieutenant Whipple's Report (Pacific Railroad Reports, Vol. II. Washington, 1856, 4to). Six Caddo Words and Pawnee Affinities. Ibid., p. 70. PEBAS. Brazilian Indians on the Amazon. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Langue des Pebaa, Vocabulary No. XXII, pp. 296, 297 of: Casielnau, Vol. V, Appendioe. PENOBSCOT. Abenaki tribe, greatly reduced, above Banger, Maine. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Smith Baeton, New Views, etc.' — Comparative Vocabularies. Mithridates (from above), Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 402—404. T. Sat, Comparative Vocabulary of various Dialects of the Lenape Stock, etc. 1 18 PISNNSYLVANIANS. Note 15, pp. 135—145, to John Piotering's edition of Dr. Edwards's Observa- tions on the Mohegan Language. (Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society, Second Series, Yol. X. Boston, printed by Phelps and Farnham, 1823, 8vo. Reprinted, ibid.. Little and Brown, 1843, S^o.) No. IV, 14, B, p. 370, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis (Archieologia Americana, Vol. II). Prom MSS. of Treat and Mrs. GrABDIKEB. H. Hale, Remarks on the Language of the St. John or Colastukweek ladians, with a Penobscot Vocabulary. Boston, 1834, 8to, pp. 8. PENNSTLVANIANS. The Indians inhabiting Pennsylvania, or New Sweden, were of the Algonkin and of the Iroquois stock (Mohawks). WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Vocabularium Barbaro-Virgineorum ; additis passim locutionibus et observa- tionibus historicis brevioribus ad linguae pleniorem notiiiam, pp.133 — 154 of: Lutheri C.ithechismus, ofwersatt pa American-Vergiuiske spraket. Slockhulm, 1696, 12mo (from Thomas Campanius). Words, on pp. 49, etc. : Journal des S9avans, 1716, 4to. Book IV, Chap. I — X, Vocabulary, and Chap. XI and XII, Dialogues of: Thomas Campanius Holm, Kort beskrifiiing om Proviucien Nya Swerige. Stockholm, 1704, 4to ; pp 153—599. Enjlish translation, by P. St. Duponceau, A Short Description of the Province of New Swedeu Translated for the Historical Society of Pennsylvania, with notes, pp. 144 — 156, in: Memoirs of the Historical Society of Pennsylvania, Vol. III. PhiladelpUa, M'Carty and Davis, 1834, 8vo ; pp. 1—168. Smith Barton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies (Indians of Penn- sylrauia, according to William Penn), from Campanius, No. IV, 198 (p. 371), of Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. (Aroliseologia Americana, Vol. II). Ant. Court de Geb-elin, Langue de Pennsylvanie (Monde Prhnitif, Vol. VIII, p. 523). Reprinted in: J. B. Scherer, Reoherches Historiques et G6o- graphiques sur le Nouveau Monde. Paris, Brunet, 1777, 12mo, p. 331. Mithridales, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 387—389 (from the Virginian Catechism). J. S. Vater, Proben Deutscher Mundarten : Dr. Seetzen's Linguist. Nachlass. Leipzig, 1816, 8vo ; pp. 376—380. PEQUOT PIMA. 149 PEQUOT. Indians of Connecticut, related to the Mohegans. Tlie Nanga- tuck Indians speak a kindred language. WORDS AND yOCABULAEIES. Vocabulary of Peqaot and some Nangatack Indian Words, Article I of the Appendix (p. 491) to : John W. de Fokrest, History of the Indians of Con- necticut. Hartford, Hamersley, 1852, 8vo. PESCHERAI, YAKANAKU, EUEGIANS. Indians of Fireland (Tierra del Fuego) and of the peninsulas Brunswick and King William IV ; divided into three tribes — Kamenetes, Kennekas, and Karaikas. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. James Weddell, Master, H.N., A Voyage towards the South Pole, performed in the years 1822 — 1824. Containing a Visit to Tierra del Fuego ; with a particular account of the Inhabitants London, Longman, 1825, 8vo, pp. 280, 13 maps and plates. Second edition, ibid., 1827, 8to, pp. 324, maps and piates ; p. 174. Heevas, Catalogo, p. 15. Smith Babton, New Views, etc, — Comparative Vocabularies. grammars and grammatical notices. A. D'OBEiaifY, L'Homme Am6ricain, Vol. I, p. 412. PIANKASHAWS. Southern tribe of the Ojibway stock. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Smith Baeton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies ; And, from him, Mitliridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 360 — 362. PIMA. Indian nation of New Mexico and Sonora, where the country- inhabited by them is called Pimeria, and divided into Alta and Baja. ] 50 PINALENOS. WOKDS AND TOCABULARIES. Heetas, Origine, Tabb. XLIX, L et seq. Heetas, Saggio, pp. 124, 125. laiTATZ Pfefpeekoeit, Besohreibung der Landschaft Sonora. Kolln, 1794, 2 vols, 8vo. Mithridates (from the above), Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 162—169. A Vocabularjo de las Lenguas Pima, Eudeve y Seris, is said, by De Souza, to have been written by Pr. Adamo G-iia, a Jesuit missionary in California. Pima Vocabulary, by Dr. John Scouleb, in : Journal of the Koyal Greogra- phical Society of London, Vol. XI. London, 1841, 8vo ; pp. 246, 248, 250. Pima Vocabulary, under W, 1, p. 129, in : Transactions of the American Ethno- logical Society, Vol. II, Dr. C. C. Paert (Botanist to the Boundary Commission), Vocabulary of the Language of the Pimo Indians on the Rio Gila, New Mexico, pp. 161, 162 of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. III. Pima Vocabulary, by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, p. 94 of : Report upon the Indian Tribes (see Report on the Route near the 35th Parallel in : Pacific Railroad Reports, Vol. II). Washington, 1856, 4to. John R. Baetlett, the United States Boundary Commissioner, has also taken a Vocabulary of the Pimo Language, GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 162 — 169 (from Ignatz Ppebjeekoek) . PINALENOS. Also called Pinon LanoSj Pmols^ Pinal Leuo, Apache tribCj ranging over an extensive circuit, between the Sierra Pinal and the Sierra Blanca, near the Upper San Francisco River, north of the Gila, in New Mexico, WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Pinal Leno Vocabulary, taken in 1852, by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple (see Report upon the Indian Tribes, in the Report on the Route near the 35th Parallel, Chap. V, pp. 81 — 83 of : Pacific Railroad Reports, Vol. II. Washington, 1856, 4to). PIRINDA— POKONCHI. 151 PIEINDA. Language of the Indians of Mechoaean, Mexico. Identical with Tarasca? De Souza says of Fr. Juan BravOj the author of a Grammar of the Lengua Tarasca (see under Tarasca) , "fue maestro peritissimo de la lengua Pirinda, Uamada Tarasca." WORDS AND vocabularies. Heetas, Saggio, p. 120. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 126—128. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Arte de la Lengua Pirinda, and also various Sermons in the same Language, by the Pray Feancisoo Acosta, of the order of San Angustin, in the province of Michoaoau. These MSS. were left in the library of the Convent of Charo. Arte Tocabulario y Manuel de la Lengua Pirinda, por Fr. Miquel Guevaea. According to De Souza, in the Convent of Charo, province of Michoacan. PIEO. Indians of New Mexico^ near El Paso. ■WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. A Vocabulary of the Piro Language has been taken by John B. Baetlett, the United States Boundary Commissioner. POKONCHI. Or Pohoman. Indian Nation of the district of Vera Paz, in Guatemala. Their language hears close affinity to the Maya. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Th. G-agb (see (Grammars below). Heetas, Origine, Tabb. XLIX, L, LI et seq. Heetas, Saggio, pp. 113 — 115. Smith Baeton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 15, 23. Pp. 9,10 of: A. Q-allatin's Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico (Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. I. JTew Yorlc, Bartlett and Welford, 1845, 8to.) 152 roPOLUCA. Dr. Kabl Soheezee, Sprache der Indianer tod Palin (Poconchi) 24 engl. Meilen Ton Neu Guatemala, pp. 28—35 of Vol. XV of the : Sitzungsberiohte der Philosophiscli-Historischen Klasse der Kaiserlichen Atademie der Wissensohaften. Vienna, 1855. 8vo. Also under the separate title ; Spraohen der Indianer Central Amerika's. Vienna, 1855, 8vo, pp. 11. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Thojtas &A&E, The English- American, his TraTail by Sea and by Land, or a New Survey of the West Indies .... with a Grammar or some few Kudiments of the Indian tongue, called Poconchi or Pocoman. London, printed by K. Cotes, 1648, small folio. Second Edition, A New Survey of the West Tndie.«, etc. London, 1655, small folio ; the Grraminar on pp 213, et seq. Third Edition. London, 1677, 8vo. The Fourth Edition, enlarged by the Author. London, printed for T. Nicholson, 1699, 8vo. French translation — Nouvelle Relation, contenant Ics Voyages de Thomas Gage dans la Nouvelle E.spagne. Traduite par le Sieur De Beaulieu Hues O'Neil. Paris, Clousier, 1676, 2 vols. 12mo j and added to it : Brieve Instruc- tion pour apprendre la Laugue Indienne appelee Poconchi ou Pocoman. Patis, 1676, 12mo. This French translation has often been reprinted, viz., AmHerdam, Moret, 1680, 2 vols. 12mo ; ibid., 1685 ; Hid., 1687 ; ihid., 1695 ; ihid.. Third Edi- tion, revue et oorrigee, 169'J, 2 vols. 12mo ; ibid.. Fourth Edition, 1720, 2 vols. 12mOi ibid., 1721; ibid., 1722. BkuneT', Vol. II , p. 345, however, remarks that the edition of 1676 is the one to which the translation of the Poconchi Grammar was added. This translation having appeared under a separate title, is generally found sepa- rately. German translation — Ganz neue, merkwiirdige Keisebeschreibung nach Neuspanien .... aus dem Franzosischen iibersetzt. Leipzig, 16u3, 4to. The Grammar on pp. 457 — 471. Dutch translation— Nieuwe ende seer naeuwteerige Reyze door de Spaensche West IndLen, van Thomas Gage overgeset door H. v. Q. (H. van Quellenburgh). Vtrecht, 1683, small 4to. Spanish translation — Nueva Eelacion que contiene los Viages de Tomas Gage en la Nueva Fspaua. Paris, Bosa, 1838, 2 vols. 12mo. Mithridates (from Gaoe), Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 6—13. A. Ga'latin (from Gage), Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico, etc , pp. 45 — 47, 269—275, of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. I. Neio York, Bartlett and Welford, 1845, Svo. POPOLTJCA, Or Populuka, Papoloka, Indians of Central America, in Oajaca, and in the State of San Salvador. The same as Poconchi and Pocoman, i.e., Kachiquel (?). Muhlenpfordt does not mention them in Oajaca. POTTAWATAME POWHATTANS. 153 WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Fkano. de ToitAL, Arte y Vocabulario en la Lengua Popolaca de Teooinachalco (printed ? ). Dr. Kabl Schebzee, Sprache der Indianer von St. Maria, am Fusse des Waa- ser- Vulcan's (Pupuluka-Kateliikel), 5 engli. Meilen von Antigua G-uatemala (^Sitz- zungsbericlite der Philosopliisoli-Historischen Klasse der Kaiserliclien Akademie der "Wissensohaften, Vol. XV, pp. 28— 35. Vienna, lSo5,8vo. Also under the separate title : Spraehen der Indianer Central Amerika's. Vienna, 1855, 8vo, pp. 11.) ORAMMAUS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Feanoeboo de Toeal (see Vocabularies above). POTTAWATAME, POUTEOTAMIS. Indians of the Algonkin stocky formerly near Detroit^ Michigan. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Smith Baeton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies. Mithridates (from the above). Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 343—346, 360—362. No. IV, a, of the Comparative Vocabulary (p. 375) to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. (Archaeologia Americana, Vol. II) . From Bakton, and MS. Notices in the War Department of the United States, Keprinted and enlarged under N, IV, 5^ p. 107 of Vocabularies in : American Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. II. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Pottawottomie Spelling-book. Shawnee Mission, J. Meeker, printer, 1834. 12mo, pp. 32. Letter of D. Woloott to General Cass (in answer to printed queries), On the History and Language of the Pottowattamies, note, pp. 380^386 of: Henry R. Schoolcraft, Travels in the Central Portions of the Mississippi Valley (performed .... 1821). New YorJi, Collins andHannay, 1825, 8vo. Pewani ipi Potewatomi Missinoitan eyowat nemadjik Catholiques endjik (Catho- lic primer). -BaZftmore, John Murphy, 1846, 24mo, pp. 31. POWHATTANS. Tribe of the Algonkin stock, in Maryland and Virginia, now extinct. Jefferson, in the Notes on Virginia, gives a view of their extent and tribes. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Captain Jons" Smith, Grenerar History of Virginia, New England, and (he X 154! PRINCE WILLIAM SOUND —PUEBLO INDIANS. Summer Isles London, 1626. folio. Eeprinted, ibid., 1627 and 1632, folio ; at the end of Book II. Eeprinted : The Travels, Adventures, and Observations of Captain John Smith, etc. Richmond, republished at the Franklin Press, William W. Gray, printer, 1819, 2 vols. 8vo ; Vol I, pp. 147, 148. Ifo. IV, i (376), of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gtaliatin's Synopsis, etc. (ArohsBologia Americana, Vol. II). Vocabulary of the Powhattau Language (from Captain Smith) in : James Macauley's History of New York. New XorTc, Gould and Banks, 1829, 3 vols, 8vo; Vol. II, pp. 265-270. PMNCE WILLIAM SOUND. On the north-west coast of North America (Russian possessions), inhabited by Eskimaux. WOllDS AND VOCABULARIES. James Cook, Voyage to the Pacific Ocean (third voyage, under Cook, Clark, and Gore). London, 1784, 3 vols. 4to ; Vol. II, pp. 374—376. Captain Geoeq-e Dixon, A Voyage round the World, but more particularly to the North-west Coast of America. London, Goulding, 1789, 4to, p. 241. French translation, by M. Lebas. Paris, 1789, 2 vols..8vo. German translation, by J. R. Forster. Berlin, Voss, 1790, 4to, p. Captain Nateaniel Pobtlook, A Voyage round the World, etc. London, Stockdale, 1789, 4to. German translation, by G. Forster, Geschichte derEeisen an der Nord- west und Nordostkiiste von Amerika .... von Dixon, Portlock, Cook .... Berlin, Voss, 1791, 1792, 3 vols. 4to. And Portlock, G. Mortimer's and Long's Travels, translated with separate title. Berlin, Voss, 1796, 4to. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 288. PUEBLO INDIANS (ZUNI, KEEES). Indians of New Mexico. The tribes living at Santo Domingo and the neighbouring Pueblos are called Keres, or, by the Spaniards, Queres. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. James H. Simpson, A Comparative Vocabulary of Words in the Languages of the Pueblo or Civil Indians of New Mexico, and of the wild tribes inhabiting its borders, pp. 140—143 of_: Journal of a Military Eeconnaissance from Santa Fe, New Mexico, to the Navajo country, pp. 56 — 168 of; Eeports of the Secretary of War, with Eeconnaissances of Eoutes from S. Antonio to El Paso; also, the PUELCHES. 155 Tleport of Lieutenant J. H. Simpson. WasMngton, printed at the Union Office 1850, 8vo (Exec. Docum. Senate, No. 64, 31st Congress. Session). Simpson distinguishes Pueblo Indians of: — St. Domingo S. Anna. S. Felipe Silla. Laguna Pojuate. Acoma Cocbiti. 2. S.Juan S.Clara S. Aldefonso Pojuaque. Marabe Tesuque. 3. Taos — Picori — Sandia — Isleta. 4. Yemes (old Pecos). Datid V. Whiting, Pueblo (of Tusuque) Vocabulary, in : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. Ill, pp. 446—459. Captain J. H. Eaton, United States Agent, Pueblo (of Zuni) Vocabulary, ibid.. Vol. IV, pp. 416—432 (pp. 429—431, numerals). Zuni Vocabulary, taken by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, pp. 91 — 93 of the Eeport upon the Indian Tribes (Report on the Route near the 35th Parallel in : Pacific Railroad Reports, Vol. I[. Washington, 1856, 4to). PUELOHES. Indians of the Argentine Republic^ between the Rio Negro and the Rio Colorado. They are divided into Checlxehet, Divihet, and Taluhet; the two latter are called by the Spaniards "Pampas." The wild Charruas are related to them. Hale distinguishes only Pampas (north of the Rio Colorado) and Tehuetches (south of that river) . WORDS AND VOCABnLAUIES. Th. Falknek, Description of Patagonia (see Arauoans) .... Hereford, Vili, 4to, p. 138. German translation, by Schack Hm. Ewald. Gotha, Ettinger, 1775, 8vo, p. 18. Heetas, Catalogo, p. 20. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, p. 423. Puelohes and Tuelhet (from Falkneb and Hervas). Vocabulary of Twenty-three Words, pp. 163 — 164 of Vol. I of : Aloide D'Oe- BIGNY, L'Homme Americain. Puelche Vocabulary and Sentences (Pampas and Tehuiliohe), pp. 653 — 656 of United States Exploring Expedition. Ethnography and Philology, by Hob. Hale. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. A. D'OsBiffNY, L'Homme Am&icain, Vol. II, pp. 79, 80 ; and p. 87, Notices on the Charrua Language- 156 PUQUINI — QUA?PAS. PUQUINI. Peruvian Indians^ on the islands of the Chuquito Lakej and at the Mission of the Patres Mercenarii, near the Pucarani. They spoke their language exclusively among themselves, and did not permit strangers to learn the same. For worshipping, they used the Quichua. No affinity to any other American lan- guage. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Heetas, Origine, Tabb. L et seq. Heevas, Saggio, p. 93. Rlithridates (from Heetas), Vol. Ill, pp. 548—550. PURYS. Brazilian Indians, of the provinces E,io de Janeiro and Espiritu Santo. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. WiLH. L. TON EscHWEGE, Journal fiir Brasilien, Heft 1. Weimar, 1818, 8to. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 497. QUADUS. Brazilian Indians, in the neighbourhood of Miranda. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Langue des Quadus. Vocabulary No. IX, pp. 278—280, of: Castelnau, Vol. V, Appendice. QUAPPAS. Indians on the banks of the Arkansas River. (See Nuttall's Journal, pp. 81 — 89.) WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. No. VI, 36, of Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305—367) to A, Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. (Arohseologia Americana, Vol. II). QUEEN charlotte's ISLAND ^ICHE. 157 S, IV, 3, p. 117, of the Vocabularies (Transactions of tlie American Ethnological Society, Vol. II). QUEEN CHARLOTTE'S ISLAND. On the nortli--west coast of America. The language spoken by the Indians of this island is but little known. The Cumshewar, Massit, Skittayeets, Keesarn, and Kigarnee are mentioned as living on the island. WORDS AND VOCABULAKIES. Pp. 302, 380 of: MisceUaneous Vocabularies, in A. Gallatin's Synopsis f Archseologia Americana, Vol. II), contains, under XXIX, 64, p. 380, words of the Kigarnee, Casainee, Skittageets, Cumshawa, and other tribes of the north-west coast, and the numerals 1—10 in the Queen Charlotte Island Language. (Prom MS. authorities of Messrs. Stue&is and Bbtant.) Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 850. Words, p. 1 54 of : R. G-. Latham, The Languages of the Oregon Territory (Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, Vol. X, pp. 154—166). Edin- lurgTi, 1848, 8to. Skittagets (Queen Charlotte's Island) Vocabulary, No. 6, XIX, p. 102, of Vocabularies in ; Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II. 4ICHE, QUICHE, KICHE. ti Indians of Guatemala, belonging to the Great Tzendal or Maya stock, which occupies that State. Their language is closely related to that of the Kachiquels and Zutugils, and bears much resemblance to the Maya. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Kiche (4 iche) Dictionary (from the Convent of Papuna ?, sold by Pierre Bavila, on the 24tli November, 1833) . MS. vol. in 4to, on paper of the 18th century ; in the Imperial Library of Paris. Apparently a copy of the Cakchiquelchi Dictionary. A MS. Vocabulary of the Quiche Language is in the possession of Abbe Dominic Jehl, of Palin, near Amatitan, Guatemala. Quiche Numerals, p. 191 of : John L. SlEPHEifS, Incidents of Travel in Cen- tral America. ISevi York, Harpers, 1844, 2 vols. 8vo. Dr. Kakl Soheezeb, Sprache der Indiauer von Ixtl&.vacan (Quiche), 10 engl. Meilen von Quesaltenango, Guatemala, pp. 28 — 35 of Vol. XV of: Si Izungsberiehte der Philosopbisch-Historischen Klasse der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissen- schaften. FicnMa, 1855, 8vo. Also under the separate title ; Sprachen derlndianer Central Amerika's. Vienna, 1855, 8vo, pp. 11. 158 QUICHUA. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. P. P. Alonzo Fioees, Arte de la Lengua Kakchiquel y paralelo de las quatro Lenguas Metropolitanas que hoy integran en el reyno de G-oathemala. Antigua, Guatemala^ 1753. Although Juarros (I, p. 343) states that this "Arte"' was printed, ^nd had proved very useful, the book was considered apocryphal until recently, when the Abb^ Brasseur de Bourbourg wrote from Gruatemala that he had obtained four copies (see E. G-. Squier's letter in the Loudon Athenmum, December 8, 1855, No. 1467). It contains a comparison of the Kachiquel, with the Quiche and Zutugil, all three being dialects of one parent stock. Plores was Professor of the Kakchlquel language at the San Carlos TJniTersity of Gruate- mala. Arte de las tres Lenguas — Cacchiquel, Quiche y Tutuhil ; por el E. P. Fray Feahoisco Ximenez, del Orden de Predioadores. Second division of the Padre's great work on the history, languages, and antiquities of Guatemala, existing, in MS. only, in the University Library of Gruatemala. (For an account of this MS. see N. Triibner"s paper on Central American Archseology, in the London Athenceimi, May 29, 1856, No. 1492.) Arte de Lengua Zakohikel del uso de Fr. Estetan Toeeesano, Pre'- Ano de 1754. A MS. of 143 leaves, in 8vo, in the Imperial Library at Paris. (Copy in possession of E. Gr. Squier.) Contains : Parallelo de las Lenguas 4iohe (Kiche, Quiche), Cakchiquel (Kachiquel) y Zutuhil (Zutugil). A comparison is also made between this dialect and the Zutugil and Kachiquel G-rammar of Flores. Arte de Lengua ^iche (Quich^), compuesto por N. M. R. P. Fray Baetho- LOME AuLEO, Eehgioso Menor de N. S. P« San Francisco. In the Imperial Library of Paris. MS. of 67 leaves in 4to. (A copy also in possession of E. G-. Squier, New York.) The Imperial Library also possesses the following MS. : — Marial sacro y Santoral. Sermones en la Lengua ^ iche, escritos por yarios autores, princi- palmente por un Indio por lo qual hay mueho que correjir, o emendar eu todos los Textos Latinos. Pertenece al uso del P^- P"'- Fr. 1° A. S., liijo de la S'''- Prov»- del dulcisimo fibre de J.H.S. Guatem"' ano de 1796. Con- tains 23 Sermons. QUICHUA, KECHHUA. The language of the Peruvians. It was spoken by all the tribes subject to the Incasj from Pasto to the River Mania, in Chilij and is still in use. Many of the Spanish inhabitants speak it well and correctly. The Aymara bears a close affinity to the Quichua. Dialects of the Quichua : — 1. Dialect of Ciizco, or the Quichua QUICHUA. 159 proper ; the most cultivated dialect. 2. Lamano or Lamissa, round Truxillo. 3. Chinchaisuyu, round Lima. 4. Kalchaqui, in Tucaman, the best after the Cuzco dialect. 5. Dialect of Quito ; the least cultivated — corrupted by many foreign words. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Fr. Domingo de S. Thomas, de la orden de S. Dommgo, Lexicon 6 Vocabu- lario de la Lengua general del Peru llamada Quiohua. Valladolid, impresso por Francesco Fernandez de CordoTa, 1560, 8vo, of 8 and 179 leaves. (See Grammars, where also the edition of 1586 is noticed.) P. DiESo Gonzalez Holquin, Vocabulario de la Lengua general de todo el Peni llamada Quiohua, o del Inca. Hii la Ciudad de los Reyes, 1586, 8vo. Reprinted : Corregido e renoTado conforme k la propiedad cortesana del Cuzco. En la Ciudad de los Ret/es, impresso por Francisco del Canto, 1607, 1608, 2 vols. 4to ; pp. 375, 332. (Two parts — Quichua-Spanish and Spanish-Quichua.) DiEOO DE ToEEES KiTEio, E S. J., Grammatica y Vocabulario en la Lengua general del Peru, llamada Quiohua y en la Lengua Espanola. Sevilla, 1603, 8vo. The Grammar on 40 leaves. The Vocabulary, Quichua-Spanish, on 11 sheets (A. — L), Spanish-Quichua on 12 sheets (A. — M). Reprinted : Arte de la Lengua Quichua, compuesto por el Padre Diego de ToEEES RuBio, de la Compania de Jesus. Lima, por Francisco Lasso, 1619, 8vo, 103 leaves (4 and 44 numbered, 55 not numbered). Brunet, IV, p. 495, says that, independently of the Grammar, it contains two small Vocabularies, Spanish-Quichua and Quichua-Spanish. Reprinted : Tercera edioion, nuevamente corregida con anadidos los romances, el oatecismo corregido pequeno, el Vocabulario anadido y otro Vocabulario de la Lengua Chinchayauyu, por el M. E. JtrAK de Figuebedo. Hn Lima, por Joseph de Contreras, 1700, small 8vo, 12 and 115 leaves. Reprinted : Aiiadio el P. Juan de Figtjebedo, de la misma compafiia, ahora nuevamente corregida y aumentada en muchas Vocables .... por un religioso de la misma compania. Lima, 1754, Bvo. El P. M"a,estro Fray Jitan Maetinez, Vocabulario en la Lengua general del Peru, llamada Quiohua y en la Lengua Espanola. .S?« los Ret/es, 1604, small 8vo. Arte y Vocabulario en la Lengua general del Peru, llamada Quichua. H» los Ret/es {Lima), Francisco del Canto, 1614, 8vo. (Bibliotheoa Heberiana, VI, 85, No. 512, X, 18, No. 522.) A short Vocabulary, pp. 477, 478 of : Joan, db Laet, Noyus Orbis. Xittgduni Batavorum, Elzevir, 1633, folio. Giiii, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, pp. 355 et seq. Heevas, Origine, pp. 27, 29, 37, 41, 44, 45, 49, 79, 118, 135, 136, 139, 140, 177, 178, Tabb. XLIX, L, LI. 160 QUICHUA. Hebvas, Vooabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq. (Kicliua o PeruaDO-Kichua dell' anno 1560, Kitena), p. 224. (Kiohua e Kitena). Heevas, Aritmetica, pp. 100, 101 (Kiohua, Kitena, Lamano, Chinchaysuyu). Heevas, Saggio, pp. 88, 89. John Reinhold 'Foestee, Obserrationa made during a Toyage round the World, on Physical G-eography, Natural History, and Ethic Philosophy. London, Eobinson, 1778, 4to. German translation — TJebersetzt und mit.Anmerkungen versehen TOnG-. Forster. Berlin, Haude and Spener, 1783, 8to, pp. 254. Smith Baeton, New Tiews, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 522, 537, 538, 547, 571 (from Heetas, Toeees, and Holghin). Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLT, No. 459 (dialect Quitafia)i Will. Maesden, Miscellaneous Works. London, Cox and Son, 1834, 4to, p. 104. Vocabulary of Twenty-three Words, pp. ]62, 164 of Vol. I of: A. D'OebiGNY, L'Homme Americain. Pour Quiehua Words compared with Arrowact, Atoray, Maipure, and Moxos, Appendix VI, p. 166 of: J. A. tan Heitvel's El Dorado. Hew York, Winchester, 1844, 8vo. A MS. Vocabulary of the Chio?nia Language is in the library of the Boyal Geographical Society of London (Journal, etc., Vol. X. London, Murray, 1811, 870), p. xxiv. . J. J. TON TsCHTJDl (see Grammars). Vocabulary of Eighty-eight Words, Inoa, Quichoa, and Italian, and numerals 1 to 20, 30, 40, etc., to 100, 200, etc., to 1000, pp. 49—50 ; and : Alcuni Vocabuli piu communi in Lingua Quichoa, pp. 289 — 300 of: Gaetano Osculati, Ex- ploracioui delle regioni equatoriali lungo il Napo ed il fiume delle Amazoni, etc. Milano, Typographia Bernardoni, 1850, 8to. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Gramatica 6 Arte de la Lengua general de los Indios de los Keynos del Peru. Nuevamente compuesto por el Maestro Pray Domingo be S. Thomas, de la Orden de S. Domingo, Morador en los dichos Keynos. Impresso en Val- ladolid, por Prancisco Fernandez de Cordova, 1560, small 8vo, of 8 and 96 leaves. The Vocabulary by the same author (see Vocabularies) is generally found annexed to this Grammar. Both are reprinted in : Arte y Vocabulario en la Lengua general del Peru, Uamada Quiehua y en la Lengua Espanola. En la Ciudad de los Seyes, por Ant. Kicardo, 1586, small 8vo. The Vocabulary has a separate title, givea by Brunet, IV, p. 676 : Voca- QUICHUA. 161 bulario en la Lengua general del Peru llamada Quichua y eu la Lengua Espanola. En loa Reyes, por Ant. Kicardo, 1586, small 8vo. The preface of this Vocabulary is signed "flicardo." Eivero and Tschudi name Antonio Rioaedo as the author of the Vocabulary and Grammar. DlEao DE ToEEES KuBlo (see Vocabularies above). P. DiEQ-o Gonzales HoLGtriN, de la Compania de J^sus, Natural de Caceres, Gramatica y Arte nueva de la Lengua general de todo el Peru llamada Quichua, d Lengua del Lica, anadida y cumplida, en todo lo que le faltava de tiempos y de la Gramatica, y recogida en forma de Arte lo mas necesario en los dos primeros Libros. Con mas otros dos Libros postreros de Adiciones de Arte, para mas perficionarla, el uno para aloanzar la Copia de Vocablos, y el otro para Elegancia y Ornato. Impresso en la C'mdad de los Reyes del Peru, por Francisco del Canto, 1607, 4to, of 4 and 144 leaves. Reprinted : Nueva Edicion, revista y corregida s. 1. Genova, Pagano, 1842, 8to, pp. 320. D. Alonso de Huerta, Arte de la Lengua Quechua general de los Tndios de este Reyno del Peru. Impresso por Francisco del Canto, En los Reyes, 1616, 4to, of 8 and 40 leaves. A MS. copy of this Grammar was in the library of M. Chaumette dea Fossees (see MSS., p. 162). DiDAC. DE Olmos, Gramatica de la Lengua Indica. Lima, 1633, 4to. (Tschudi has " 1634.") D. Jttait Eoxo Mexia t Ocon, Natural de la Ciudad del Cuzco, Arte de la Lengua general de los Indies de Peru. Impresso en Lima, por Jorge Lopez de Herrera, 1648, small 8vo, of 18 and 88 pp. El Bachiller Don Esteban Sancho de Meigae, Arte de la Lengua genera] del "Snga llamada Qqechhua. Lima, Diego de Lyra, 1691, 8vo. Langue du'Pferou, pp. 525 — 533 of Vol. VIII of: Cottet de Gebelin, Monde Primitif. Fans, 1772, 4to. Keprinted, pp. 334—336 of : J. B. Scherer, Reoher- ches Historiques et Gfographiques sur le Nouveau Monde. Faris, Brunet, 1777, 12mo. GlLil, Saggio, Vol. Ill, pp. 233—243. Mithridatee, Vol. Ill, pp. 526—534. A. D'Oebiqnt, L'Homme Americain, Vol. I, pp. 272 — 274. La Lengua Quichua, Cap. V, pp. 86 — 115, of: Maeiano Edtjaedo de Eiteea y Juan Dieoo de Tschudi, Antiguedades Peruanas. Fienna, impreuta imperial, 1851, 4to. J. J. ton Tschudi, Die Kechua Spraohe. Erste Abtheilung : Sprachlehre. Zweite Abtheilung : Sprachproben. Dritte Abtheilung : Worterbuch. Wien, K.K. Hof undStaatsdruckerei, 1853, 3 vols.Svo ; pp. iv, 268; vi, 110, 1 ; viii, 508, 2. Y 162 QUICHUA. On the Language and Literature of the Incas, pp. 161 — 201 of : Ctrzoo, A Journey to the Ancient Capital of Peru, with an Account of the History, Language, Literature, and Antiquities of the Incas. And :• Lima ; a Visit to the Capital and ProTinces of Modern Peru ; with a Sketch of the Viceregal Government, History of the Eepublic, and a Keview of the Literature and Society of Peru. With illustrations and a map. By Ciements B. Maekham, F.E.G-.S. Crown 8vo, pp. 420. London, 1856. A Sketch of the Grrammar, etc., of the Incas, with Vocabularies and Specimens of Composition in Quichua ; Appendix A of the aboTe work, pp. 389 — 408. DIALECTS. 1. Quito. — Breve instruction 6 Arte de la Lengua Commune de los Indios, segun que se habla en la Provincia de Quito. Lima, en la imprenta de la Plazuela de San Christoval, 1753, small 8vo. 2. Chinchaisuya. — ^Vocabulario de la Lengua Chinchaisuyo, por Jttan de FlQUBEEBO (see Vocabularies above, suh voce : De Tokbes Bueio) . J. J. VON TscHUDi, Peru. Keiseskizzen aus den Jahren 1838 — 1842. Sanct Gallen, 1846, 2 vols. 8vo ; Vol. 11, p. 379 ; also in the first part of: Die Kechua- spraohe, pp. 257 — 262. 3. Yunga (see under Yunga, regular Alphabet) . PEEUTIAN MS. VOCABTTLAEIES AND GEAMMABS. A MS. Grammar, late of the library of Wilhelm von Humboldt, is now in the Eoyal Library at Berlin. In the library of the late Pi-ench Consul at Peru, M. Amed^e Chaumette des Foss&s (Catalogue, Paris, Labitte, 1842, 8vo), many linguistic MSS. concerning Peru were contained, viz. — ■ Alonzo be Huerta, Arte de la Lengua Quechua (Catal., p. 50, No. 574). Arte de la Lengua general del Inea Uamada Quichua. MS. on paper, 12mo (Catal., p. 50, Wo. 575).^ Vocabulario de la Lengua de los Campos en la Pampa del Sacramento nel Peru. MS. on paper, 4to. Copied from a MS. in possession of D. Manuel Arnes, Governor of Anda- namarea (Catal., p. 51, No. 581). Vocabulario de la Lengua Passa 6 Setaba. MS. on paper, 1795, Svo, oblong (Catal., p. 51, No. 582). Arte de la Lengua Cholona, advertencias para el idioma Chiriguano. 2 vols. 12mo, MS. on paper (Catal,, p. 51, No. 583). Vocabulario de la Lengua Caniba, por el P. Buenavbntttea Maeq-ues, predi- cador en Ucayali (Escrito en favor del Colegio de Ocopa), MS. 4to (Catal., p. 51, No. 584). Cuaderuo quo contione el Vocabulario en Lengua del Inca scgun se habla en el RICCAREES RUMSEN. 163 Obispado de Maynas y TJcayali, escrito por el Hermano Fray Geeonimo de loa DoLOBES Y Leceta, Conversor de I03 Pueblos de Pisqui y Cuntamana de Manoa, Mayo 21, 1814. In the Missionary Convent of Santa Bosa de Ooopa, prOTinoe of Jauja. (See Tschudi's Vocabulary, preface, p. vii.) RICCAREES, Ricaras, Aricaras ; also, SatraJie. Indians of the Pawnee stock, on tte right banks of the Missouri. WORDS AND TOCABITLAEIES. Eiccaree Yocabulary in : Geo. Catliit, Letters and Notes on the Manners, Customs, and Condition of the North American Indians. Fourth edition. London and New York, WUey and Putnam, 1842, 2 toIs. 8vo ; Vol. II, pp. 262-265. Beise dea Priuzen Maximilian zu "Wibd. Cohlenz, 1839—1841, 2 vols. 4to j Vol. II, pp. 465—474. Fifteen Rieoaree Words (from Prince Maximilian) compared with Pawnee, Eichai, Witohifca, and Nueoo, pp. 68, 69 of : Report upon the Indian Tribes (added to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Report in : Pacific Railroad Report, Vol. II. Washington, 1856, 4to). RUMSEN, RUNSIENES, Indians in the neighbourhood of Monterey, California. The Achastliers speak a dialect of the same language. WORDS AS"D VOCABULARIES. J. F. BoiTEOOiNG, Kelation d'un Voyage recent des Bspagnols sur les C6tes Nord- ouest de I'Amerique septentrionale. Paris, 1789, 8yo, p. 78. Third edition. Paris, 1803, 8vo. German translation — Jena, 1789, Svo. Eelacion del Viage hecho por las Goletas Sutil y Mexicana en el anno de 1792, para reconocer el estreoho de Fuca, etc. Madrid, en la imprenta real, 1802, 8vo ; pp. 172, 178. P. 127 of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II. De la P^eouse, Voyage autour du Monde, etc. Paris, 1797, 4 vols. 4to; Vol. I, Chap. 12. Translation — -London, Robinson, 1799, 2 vols. 4to. German translation, by 3. R. Forster and Math. Chr. Sprengel. Berlin, Voss, 1799, 1800, 2 vols. 8ro ; Vol. I, p. 388. (From ; Magaziu der merk- wiirdigsten Eeisebeschreibungen. Berlin, Voss, 1790 — 1810, XXXI, 8to.) 164 SABUJA SACllAMENTO INDIANS. Archives Litt^raires de I'Burope, 1804. (Publics par une Sooiete de Gens de Lettres, Messrs. StJAED, Mobkllet, Degekando, etc.) Paris and Tuhingue, 1804 — 1808, XYII, 8to ; No. IV, p. 87 (from BouBKOiNG). A. DE HcMBOLDT, Essai Politique sur le Boyaume de la NouTelle Espagne. Paris, F. SohoeU, 1811, 2 toIs. 4to ; Tol. I, p. 321. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 205 (from BouEGOlNa, and Acliastliers from De Lamanon). Balei, Atlas Ethnographiciiie, Tab. XLI, No. 830. SABUJA, KIRIEI. Or Cariri. Two tribes of christianized IndianSj in the Brazilian province Bahia, near Cochoeiraj now inhabiting the villages Caranquejo and Villa da Pedra Branca. Their languages are nearly the same. WORDS AND VOCABDLAE,IES. Heetas, Vooabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq., 237 (numerals 1 — 10). Herras derives the Eiriri from the Charib). Heetas, Saggio, p. 108, and " Dialetto Rozzo,'' p. 109. J. B. TOK Spix and F. Ph. ton Maetius, Reiae in Brasilien. Miinchen, 1823^ ■ 1831, 3 vols. 4to; Vol. II, p. 615 (Sabuja). Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 466, 469. Baibi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 509 (Kiriri, dialect Sabuja). GRAMMAKS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. P. LtTis ViNCBNCio Mamiani, f- S. J., Arte de Grammatica da Lingua Bra- silioa da Nagam Kiriri. Lisboa, Miguel les Condes, 1699, 18mo, pp. 124. The same author has published ; Cateeismo da Doutriua Christiana, na Lingua Brasil da Nagao Kiriri. Lisboa, 1698, 8vo. German translation — Grrammatik der Kiriri Sprache. Aus dem Portugies- ischen des P. Mamiani, iibersetzt von H. C. von der Gabelentz (Beitrage zur Sprachenkunde, 3* Heft). Leipzig, Brookhaus, 1852, 8vo, pp. 62. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 468, 469. SACEAMENTO INDIANS. The Indians living on the Upper Sacramento River, in California, were visited by James D. Dana, attached to the United States Exploring EKpedition ; Dana could not, however, learn the name sAKi — SAINT John's Indians. 165 of the tribe. The Pujuni, Sekumne, and Tsamak live on the western banks. Dana has likewise collected vocabularies of their languages. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Hob. Haxe, Ethnography and Philology of United States Exploring Expedi- tion. FMladelpMa, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio ; pp. 630, 631, 632, 633. Beprinted in: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II, pp. 122. 124, 123. "Words of the Language of the Indians near to Mag Headings, on the upper water of the Sacramento River, by Adam JoHifSoif, pp. 414, 415 of Vol. IV of ; Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes, United States. SAKI, OTTOGAMI. Also Sanhees, Sacs, Sakewi, Sawkis or Saques, and the latter Onthag amies, Utagami, Foxes. Two Indian tribes, closely- related, west of the Mississippi. The Kikkapoes speak the same language. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. William H. Kbatingj, Vocabulary of the Sakewi or Sauk, in ; Narrative of an Expedition to the Sources of the St. Peter's River, performed in the year 1823, under the command of Major Stephen H. Long. Philadelphia, Carey and Lea, 1824, 2 vols. 8vo ; Vol. I, Appendix IV, pp. 450—459. BlLEi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, K"o. 806. Reiae des Prinzen Maximilian zu Wied. Coblenx, 1839—1841, 2 vols. 4to ; Vol. II, pp. 522 et seq., 633 et seq. No. IV, 24, of Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305—367). to A. Q-allatin's Sy- nopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II), and (partly) under Q, IV, 4, p. 113, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II (from Keatiko). HAINT JOHN'S INDIANS, ETCHEMINS. A tribe of the Etchemins, speaking the same language as the Passamaqicoddies. They belong to the Lenape stock. WOEBS AND VOOABITLAIIIES. Joan, de Laet, Novus Orbis, seu Descriptionis Indise occidentalis, libri XVIII. Lugduni Sataoorum, Elzevir, 1633, folio, p. 54. 166 SALIVA SANKIKANI. French translation — Histoire du Nouveau Monde. Leyde, Elzevir, 1G40, folio. Dutch translation — Leyden, Elzevir, 1644, folio. HeetaS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 240 (numerals). Smitb: Babton, New Yiews, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies. Key. Elias Keli,o&&, Vocabulary of Words in the Language of the Quoddy Indians (Passamaquoddi, i. e., Pollock-fish), located in Perry, Pleasant Point, State of Maine, on the waters of the Schoodai, adjoining the British Provinces (Collec- tion of the Historical Society of Massachusetts, Third Series, Vol. Ill, pp. 181, 182. Cambridge, Metcalf and Co., 1833, 8vo). No. IV, 13 (Etchemins Passamaquoddi), of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305 — 367) to A. Q-allatiu's Synopsis, etc. (Arohteologia Americana, Vol. II) ; and (partly) under O, IV, 4, p. 109, of Vocabularies, in: American Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. II (from Kemogq-'s and Tbeat's MS. notices). David TenesleS, by Joseph Barratt, M.D., The Indian of New England (see Miimak). GEAMMAKS AND GUAMMATICAX NOTICES. H. Hale, Bemarks on the Language of the St. John's or Colastukweok Indians, with a Penobscot Vocabulary. Boston, 1834, Sco ; printed for the author. SALIVA. Indians on the left banks of the Orinoco^ between the rivers Guaviare and Meta, in the New Granadian province Boyaca. Dialects of their language are spoken by the Atures, Quaquas (whom the Tamanaques call " Mapoje"), and the Macos, or Piaroas. WOEDS AND VOCABTTLAEIES. GiLil, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, p. 212. Hebvas, Saggio, pp. Ill, 230, 231. Heetas, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 628—629 (from G-ILII and Hebtas). Baibi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 604. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 624—627. SANKIKANI. Ojibway tribe, late of the eastern banks of the Hudson. A kindred dialect of this language was spoken by some of the Indians of New Sweden. SANTA BAKBARA. 167 WORDS AND VOCABULAEIES. A short Vocabulary, pp. 75, 76 of: Joan, de Laet, jSTotus Orbis, seu Descrip- tionie Indise occidentalis, libri XA'"III. Liigduni Batavorum, Elzevir, 1633, folio. French translation — Ibid., 1640, folio. Dutch translation — Ibid., 1644, folio. 6-erman translation in ; (J. Jo. Soliwabe) AUgemeine Historie der Eeisen zu Wasser und Lande {Amsterdam, AAsies, 1747 — 1774, 21 vols. 4to), Vol. XVI, pp. 605 et seq. Smith Babton, Wew.Views, etc. — ComparatiTO Vocabularies. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 374—376 (from De Laet). Balbi, Atlas Etbnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 811. No. IV, 19, B, p. 371, of tbe Vocabularies to A. G-allatin's Synopsis, etc. (Arohseologia Americana, Vol. II ; from De Laet). SANTA BARBARA. Indians of California; Mission S. Barbara. "WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 201, 202, 205. The words taken from : An Historical Journal of the Expeditions by Sea and Land to the North of California, in 1768, 1769, and 1770, when Spanish Establishments were first made at San Diego and Monterey. !From a Spanish MS., translated by William Kevely, Esq. Published by A. Dal- rymple. London, Elmsley, 1790, 4to, pp. 76. This book is, without doubt, a translation of ; Diario Historico de los Viages de mar y tierra hechos al norte de California, de orden del Virrey de Nueva Espanna Marques De Croix y por direccion de D . Jose de Q-alvaz. Exeoutados por la tropa destinada h, dicho objeto al mando de D. Gaspar de Portola, y por los Paquebotes S. Carlos y S. Antonio de orden del Exc. Sr. Virrey. En la imprenta del G-obierno. Mexico, 1770, folio, pp. 56. Signed : D. Miguel Costauso. Printed merely for private distribution. Extracts translated in : P. E. Bruns and E. A. W. Zimmermann's Eeposi- torium fiir die Neueste Geographic, etc. Tubingen, Cotta, 1792, 1793, 3 vols. 8vo ; Vol. I, p. 25. Baibi, Atlas Etbnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 829. Vocabulary, by Db. John Scotjiee, pp. 247, 249, 251 of : Journal of the Eoyal Geographical Society of Loudon, Vol. XI. London, Murray, 1841, Svo. Reprinted, W, 3, p. 129, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II. 168 SAPIBOKONI SAVANERIC. SAPIBOKONI. Indians of tlie province of Moxos. Their language is related to the Quiehua. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Heetas, Vooabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq. Heetas, Aritmetica, p. 102. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 571, 576 (from Heevas). Baibi, Atlas Ethnograpliique, Tab. XLI, No. 467. SAEABECA. Christianized Indians of the Mission of Santa Anna, in the pro- vince of Chiquitos, now Bolivia. Their language is nearly lost, like that of other Chiquito tribes. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Vocabulary of Twenty-three Words : D'Oebi&nx, L'Homme Americain, Vol. I, pp. 163, 164 ; Vol. II, 136, and pp. 172, 173, where a general view of the character of the Sarabeca language is given. SASTE, SHASTIES. Indians of south-western Oregon, on the northern frontiers of Upper California. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. No. 10, V, of the Vocabularies of North-westeru America, pp. 569 — 629 of: Hoe. Hale, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expe- dition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, foUo ; and, E, XXX, pp. 98 — 100, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II. SAVANERIC. Indians of the New G-ranadian province Veraguas, near the village Las Palmas. SEMINOLES SENEKAS. 169 ■WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Bbethold Sbemann, The Aborigines of the Isthmus of Panama (Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. Ill, p. 1, pp. 179 — 181). SEMINOLES. Orj Isty-semole (wild men). Tribe of the Creek Confederacy in Florida. They are said to speak the Muskoghee. WOEBS AND VOCABTTLAKIES. Names of Seminole Chiefs, pp. 9, 10, 30 of: The War in Florida .... by a late Staff Officer. Saltimore, Lewis and Coleman, 1836, 12mo. A Vocabulary of tlie Seminole Language, pp. 97 — 105 of: Notice of East Florida, with an Account of the Seminole Nation of Indians. By a recent Trayeller in the Province. Charleston, South Carolina, 1822, 8vo. A Vocabulary of the Seminole Language, pp. 90 — 108 of : Sketch of the Semi- nole War, and Sketches during a Campaign, by a Lieutenant of the Left Wing .... Cliarleston, SoviJi Carolina, Dan. F. Dowling, 1836, 12mo. SENEKAS. Tribe of the Iroquois, near Buffalo and Niagara, in western Ne-w York. WOEDS AJTD TOCABTTLAEIES. Hbbtas, Vooabolario PoUglotto, p. 239 (numerals). Smith Baeton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies, and Appendix, p. 20. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 318, 834, 335 (from Smith Baeton). A short Vocabulary in the Language of the Seneca Nation, and in English. TTng-eish-neut ten-au-geh noh-nidi, yoh-weh-neut-sah eng-lish. London, printed by W. and S. Graves, 1818, 8to, pp. 35. Annual Report, Civilization of Indian Tribes. Newhaven, 1824, Svo, pp. 63—65. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 798 (Seneca or Macehachtini) . No. V, 29, of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305 — 367) of A. G-aliatin's • Synopsis, (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II). Eeprinted (partly) under K, V, 2, p. 114, of the Vocabularies in : American Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. IL Z 170 SEVERNOYSKIA SHAHAPTAN. Seneoa Vooabiilary (of 452 Words and Phrases), from a MS. in the "War Depart- ment of the United States, pp. 381—597 of A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc., in : Arehseologia Americana, Vol. II. Seneca Appellative Words, Note B, pp. 158—164, of: Rev. Timothy Alden, An Account of sundry Missions performed among the Senecas and Muusees. Sevo YorTc, printed by J. Seymour, 1827, 18mo, pp. 180. Vocabulary of Concrete Terms and Conversational Forms, 16 pp. at the end of: Diabsawahgwah G-ayadoshah. Hoston, Crocker and Brewster, 1836, 8vo, pp. 42. Seneca Vocabulary (from Ely S. Paekee, Schoolckaft, etc.), in Comparative Vocabulary of the Iroquois, pp.393 — 400 of: H. B. Schoolcraft, Notes on the Iroquois. Jfftany, Pease and Co., 1847, 8vo. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Diahsawabgwah G-ayadosbah. Heading Lessons, by Kev. A. Weisht, Mis- sionary. Hoston, Crocker and Brewster, 1836, 8vo, pp. 42. Eev. A. Weight's System of Writing the Seneoa — is given in the preface to : Gaa-na-sbob-ne Deowaabsaonyohgwah Na wen ni yuh (Hymns) Dosyowa (Buffalo Creek). Mission Press, 1843, 18mo, pp. 136. Table, exhibiting in the Seneca Dialect the conjugation of the Verb " Gre-jase," "I shoot," Appendix 11, pp. 475 — 477 of: Lewis H. Moeqait, League of-the- Ho-de-no-sau-nee, or Iroquois. Rochester, Sage and Brother, 1851, 8vo. G6-wana Gw6-ih sat' hah you d^ yas dah' gwah — a Spelling-book in the Seneoa Language, with English definitions. Siiffalo Creek Reservation, Mission Press, 1842, 12mo, pp. 112. SEVERNOYSKIA, SEVERNOVZEE. Or, " Northerners." Indians north of Bodega Bay. They call themselves Chwachamaja. WORDS AND VOCABTJLASrES. Woerter aus zwei Sprachen Neu Kaliforuiens von Kosteomitot. Sevemovzi (Chvachamaja), pp. 234 — 254 of: K. B. ton Baeb und &E. von Heimeesen, Beitrage zur Eienntniss des Eussisohen Reichs, Band I. St. PetersTmrg, 1839, 8to. (Russian, German, and Severnovze, printed in Russian type.) SHAHAPTAN, CHOPUNISH, SAHAPTIN. The Nez-percSs of the Canadians. The Kliketat, near Mount Rainier, the Walla- Wallas, and the Okanagan, on the upper part of Frazer's River, speak kindred dialects. SHAHAPTAN. 171 WORDS AND VOCABULAKIES. Kliketat, Shahaptan, and Okanagan Vocabularies, by Dr. John Scoulee, in : Journal of the Koyal Geographical Society of London, Vol. XI (London, 1841; 8vo), pp. 236, 238, 240 ; and Shahaptan, Wallawalla, and Kliketat Words, by same, pp. 250 — 252 of: Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, Vol. I. Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo. Words used in the Nez-perce Language, pp. 152 — 157 of: Joel Palmeb, Journal of Travel over the Eocky Mountains to the Mouth of the Columbia Eiver. Cincinnati, J. A. and TJ. P. James, 1847, 12mo. Salish and Okanagan Words, p. 158 of : E. Gc. Latham, The Languages of the Oregon Territory, pp. 154 — 166 of: Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, Vol. I. Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo. Sahaptin Vocabulary, divided into — 1, M. Sahaptin (Nez-percfes). 2, N. Wal- lawalla, which is again divided into — a. i. Pelus (Peloses) ; b. j. Joakema (Yakemas); c. Ic. Tlakatat (Klikatats) ; pp. 569—629 of: Hokatio Hale, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition. Phila- Ma, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio. The Vocabulary M reprinted in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II, pp, 88, 90, 92, 94. Vocabulary of the Nez-perce Language, pp. 827 — 330, and Vocabulary of the Clicatat Nation who inhabit the country north of the Cascades, pp. 330 — 333 of: Ecv . Samuel Paekbe, Journal of an Exploring Tour beyond the Kocty Moun- tains, under the direction of the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, performed in the years 1835, 1836, and 1837. Ithaka, New YorJc, printed by Mark Andrus and Woodruff, 1838, 12mo. Vocabulary of the Languages spoken' by the Nez-perces and other tribes inhabiting the country about the Great Porks of Columbia Eiver, pp. 313 — 322 of Vol. I of: The Fur Hunters of the Ear West, by Alexakdeb Eoss, 2 vols. Svo. London, 1855. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Nez-perces' Eirst Book. Designed for Children and New Beginners. Clear Water Mission Press, 1839 , 18mo, pp. 20. Sahaptin Family (Grammatical Notes), pp. 542 — 561 of: EoEATio Hale, Ethnography and Philology, United States Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio; and : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II, pp. 34—55. 172 SHAWANOE. SHAWANOE, SHAWANEES. Formerly of Pennsylvania, OHo, and Kentucky ; afterwards in Indiana and Illinois, now west of Missouri. They were divided into the tribes — Piqua, Mequachake, Kiskapocoke, and Chili- cothe. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Shawanee Vocabulary, p. 209 of : J. LoNa, Voyages and Trayels of an Indian Interpreter and Trader, etc. ; to wliieli is added a List of Words in the Shawanee Tongues; London, Robson, et al., 1791, 8vo. German translations — Hamburg}/,, 1791, 8vo, by G-. Foreter. Serlin, Voss, 1792, 8to (part of : Geschiohte der Eeisen die seit Cook an die Nord- westtiiste Ton America unternommen worden sind. Aus dem EngKsohen Ton G-. Forster. Berlin, Voss, 1791, 1792, 3 vols. 4to, and 3 vols. Svo), and together with Forster's translation of Portlock's and Mortimer's Voyages. Serlin, Voss, 1796, 4to. Heetas, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 240 (numerals). Hektas, Saggio, p. 126. Smith BABioif, New Views, etc.- — Comparative 7ooabularies, Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pai-t 3, pp. 343—346, 360—362 (from Grenerals Bftiab and Gibson) . Vocabulary of the Language of the Shawanoese, pp. 287 — 292, and : Names of Eirers, by the Shawanoese, pp. 297, 298 of: John Johnston, United States Indian Agent at Piqua, Account of the Present State of the Indian Tribes inhabiting Ohio (Archseologia Americana, Vol. I, pp. 269 — 299). Forty-fiTe "Words in Shawanese are given in the : Comparative Vocabulary of Professor T. Sat, in Note 15, pp. 13S— 145, to John Pickering's edition of Dr. Edwards's Observations on the Mohegau Language (CoDections of the Massa- chusetts "Historical Society, Vol. X of the Second Series. Boston, printed by Phelps and Farnham, 1823, Svo. Eeprinted, ibid., Little and Brown, 1843, Svo j pp. 81—160.) Baibi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 805. Shawnee Vocabulary, by Me. CtTMMlNas, Indian Agent, pp. 470—481 of Vol. II of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States. IV, 23, of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305—367) to A. GtAlxatin's Synopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II) ; and (partly) under Q, IV, 8, p. 113, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. (From MS. Notices of Jeseeeson, . in the War Department, and from Barton, G-ibsok, Butlae, and Paesons.) SHEBAYI — SHINICOOKS. 173 Shawnee Vocabulary, taken by Lieutenant A. W. Whieplb, pp. 56 — 60 of: Whipple, Thomas Ewbank, and Professor W. W. Turner's Report upon the Indian Tribes ; added to his Report on the Eoute near the 35th Pai-allel in : Pacific Eailroad Eeports. Wasliinqton, 1856, -llo. Eev. M. Heokeweldeb, A Vocabulary of the Shawano, taken from the mouth of a white woman who had been twenty years a prisoner with that nation. (MS. in the library of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia). A Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni Lenape Proper, the Minsi dialect, the Mohieanni, Natik or Nadik, Chippeway, Shawano, and Nanticoke. (MS. in the same Ubrary.) J. HowsE, Vocabularies of certain North American Indian languages, Shawnee (Miami Eiver), Nipissing, Brunswick, Duplicate Blackfoot, pp. 102 — 113 ; Pro- ceedings of Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1850. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 354—856 (from General Butiab's MS.) Sivrinowe Eawekitake. Shawnee Speller and Eeader, by Johnston Ltkins. Shawanoe Mission, J. Meeker, printer, 1834, 18mo, pp. 54. Summary of the same (by Pratt). Ibid., 1838, 18mo, pp. 24. SHEBAYI. Indians of French. Guyana^ near Cayenne. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. A short Vocabulary (compared with Arrowac and Yaoi),pp. 642 — 643 of: Joan. DE Laet, Notus Orbis, etc. Lugduni Satavorum, 1633, folio. SHINICOOKS, MONTAUK. Indians of Long Island^ neighbours of the Unschagogs and MontauJiS, who spoke kindred dialects. WORDS AfD VOCABULARIES. SiiAS Wood, Sketch of the Pirst Settlement of the several Towns on Long Island. SrooMyn, 1824, 8vo. Eeprinted, Hid., Spooner, 1828, 8vo, pp. 183. Gives a MontauJc Vocabulary (from a MS. of John Gaediner), which is Eeprinted in : James Macauley, The Natural, Statistical, and Civil History of the State of New York. New York, Gould and Banks, and Albany, Will. Gould and Co., 1839, 3 vols. 8vo ; in Vol. II, pp. 263, 264, 265 ; and (from Wood) the Montauk Words are given in : No. IV, 18 (Montaucs, Long Island), of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 805 — 174 SHOSHONEES. 367) to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. (Archaeologia Americana, Vol. II) ; and (partly) P, IV, 4 (Long Island), p. Ill, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II. The MS. of Thomas Jefpekson's Vocabulary of the Language of the Unquachog Indians is in the libraiy of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia. SHOSHONEES. Also Snake Indians, Serpens. Indians of the Rocky MountainSj on the sources of the Missouri and Columbia rivers. They are divided into the Shoshones Proper and the Gens de Pitii, or Radigeurs (Root- diggers, by the Spaniards called Maradigos). WOEDS AND TOCABTJIiAlirES. p. Ixxix of : T. Sat's Vocabularies in : Astronomical and Meteorological Kecords and Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken in the Expedition for Exploring the Mississippi and its Western Waters, under the command of Major J. H. Long. Philadelphia, 1822, 4to. C. S. Kapinesque, Atlantic Journal, and Friend of Knowledge. Philadelphia, 1832, 12mo, p. 133. No. xxii, 57, p. 378, of the Vocabularies to A. Grallatin's Synopsis, etc. (Archaeologia Americana, Vol. II; from Say). Keise des Prinzen Maximilian zv Wied, etc. Cohlenz, 1839 — 1841, 2 toIs. 4to ; Vol. II, p. 635. Vocabularies of Languages of Worth- western America. W. 12, Shoshoni; i, Shoshonees, Snakes ; y, WihinasM (Western Shoshonees). Pp. 569 — 629 of : HoE. Hale, Ethnography and Philology, United States Exploring Expedition. Fhila- delphia. Lea and Blanohard, 1846, folio. And in the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II, C, No. xxxii (East Shohoneea), pp. 88, 90, 92, 94 ; U, No. xxxii (Wihinasht), p. 121. Shoshone Words, p. 159, and Shoshone and Sussee Words compared, p. 161 of: K. Gr. Latham, The Languages of the Oregon Territory (Journal of the Ethnolo- gical Society of London, Vol. I, pp. 154 — 166. lEdinburgh, 1848, 8vo). Vergleichendes Worter Verzeiohniss der Schoshonen und der Komantschen Sprache (Willinascht), p. 54 of : Dr. Beeghaits' Q-eographisches Jahrbuch, No. III. Gotha, Perthes, 185], 4to. Snake Language. Vocabulary of Forty-nine Words, on pp. 153 — 154, Vol. I, of : Alexandee KosS, Fur Hunters of the Far West ; a Narrative of Adventures in the Oregon and Eooky Mountains, 2 vols., crown 8vo. London, 1855. Seventeen Words of Shoshonee Dialects compared with Eioway, by Professor SHYBNNES SITKA. 175 W. W. TiTENEH, p. 80 of the : Eeport upon tlie Indian Tribes (added to Lieute- nant A. W. Whipple's Eeport, PaciHc Eailroad Eeports, Vol. II. Washington, 1856, 4to). SHYENNES, CHEYENNES. Also, Sliara, Shawhays, on the River Cheyenne, one of the tributaries of the Missouri. "WOBDS AND VOCABlrLAii,rES. Names of Shyenne Chiefs who signed the treaty of July, 1825 (with correspond- ing Sioux words), No. VI, 9, p. 379, of the Vocabularies to A. Gaiiatiit's Synopsis, etc. (Arohseologia Americana, Vol. II). Eeise des Prinzen Maximiliak zu Wied. Coblenz, 1839 — 1841, 2 vols. 4to ; Vol. II, pp. 487—489. Affinities of the Shyenne with Languages of the Algoniin Family, pp. cxiv, cxy; and Vocabulary of the Shyenne Language, with some Notes by Lieutenant J. "W. Abebt, Top. Eng., pp. oxvi — cxviii of ; Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II ; originally in Abert's Eeport of his Examination of New Mexico, in the years 1846, 1847, pp. 417 — 548 of ; Notes of a Military Eeconnaissance, etc., by Lieutenant-Colonel W. H. Emory. Washington, 1848, 8vo. Langue des Indiens Cheyennes (numerals), Bulletin de la Societe de G-eographie {Taris, 1846, 8vo, Third Series), Tome VI, pp. 384—386. John S. Smith, Cheyennes Vocabulary, pp. 346 — 459 of Vol. Ill of : School- craft's Indian Tribes of the United States. GKAMMAES AND GEAMMAIICAL NOTICES. Lieutenant J. W. Abeet (see Vocabularies). SICANNIS, SIKANNI. Dialect of New Caledonia, related to the TacuUies. TTOEDS AND V0CA3I7IAIIIES. Vocabulary of the Siltanni Dialect of New Caledonia, J. Howse's Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Languages — Sikanni, Chepewyan. I and II, Beaver, I and II, Dialect of New Caledonia. Pp. 192— 198 of: Proceedings of the Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1850. SITKA. Sitka proper is but a name for King George Ill's Archipel, inhabited by Kolusches. In general, the name Sitka is applied to 176 SKETAPUSHOISH. tlie languages of some ten tribes^ wlio live between the 50th and 55th degrees of northern latitude. The tribes who speak this lan- guagOj and who may number some 6500 soulsj are the Chilcart, the most numerous and influential tribe ; Sitka, on King George Ill's Island ; Hoodsunhoo, at Hood's Bay ; Ark, and the Kake, on Prince Frederick's Sound; Eclikino, in Chatham's Strait; Kooyen, near Cape Decision ; Hennega, on the Island of the Prince of Wales; Stickeen, and the Tumgarsee. (See Note to A. Gallatin's Synopsis^ etc., p. 303 of: Archseologia Americana, Vol. II.) WOEBS AND TOCABtrJA"SIES. Vocabulary of the Languages of the Islands of Cadiack and Oonalaschka, the Bay of Kenay and Sitka Sound, Appendix, No. Ill (pp. 329—337), to : TJbey LisiANSKY, A Voyage round the World, in the years 1803—1806. London, John Booth, Longman, Hurst, Eees, Orme, and Brown, 1814, 4to. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 851 (Kolouches de Sitka Sound). Sitoa (ICoulishen) Vocabulary, under &, XVIII, 2, p. 102, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II. Sitoa, Cadiack, and Tunghaase "Words, p. 163 of R. G-. Latham, The Languages of the Oregon Territory (Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, Vol. I. HdinburgTi, 1848, 8to, pp. 154—166.) SKETAPUSHOISH, SHESHATAPOOSH. Also Mountaineers {Montagnards) , or Skoffies {Escopies). Indian tribes west of Labrador, speaking a language closely related to the Knistenaux. (See Massachusetts Indians.) WORDS AfTD TOCABULAEIES. Specimen of the Mountaineer, or Sheahatapooshshoish, Skoffie, and Miomao Languages (from an Indian boy, Gabriel), pp. 16 — 33 of: Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society for the year 1799, Series I, Vol. VI. Soston, printed by Samuel Hall, 1800, 8yo ; and (from this Vocabulary) Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 344, 418, 419. No. IV, 11, of the Comparative Vocabularies (pp. 305 — 307), to A. GaIiLATin's Synopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II). And No. O, IV, 1, p. 108, of the Vocabularies in : American Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. II. Scoffie Vocabulary — IV, g, p. 369, of the Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, SOURIQUOIS — STONE INDIANS. 177 etc., aud O, IV, 2, p. 108 of the Vocabularies in : American Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. II. SOURIQUOIS, ACADIANS. Indians of the Algonquin stock at the Bay of Fundy, Nova Scotia. They are sometimes also called Micmacs. "WOEDS AND TOCABTJIAEIES. Maeo l'Escaebot, Histoire de la Nouvelle France. Paris, Jean Milot, 1609, small 8vo, pp. 888 ; p. 688. Beprinted, Paris, Milot, 1612, small 8vo ; Paris, Adv. Perier, 1618, small 8vo. A sliort Vocabulary, p. 53 of : J. DE Laet, Novus Orbis, etc. Lugduni Bala- varum, 1633, folio. Heetas, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 240 (numerals). Smith Babton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies (from De Laet). Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 402^404 (from L'Escaebot). No. IV, 12, B, p. 369, of the Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II). SQUALLYAMISH. Indians at Puget's Sound, related to the Haeeltzuk and the Indians of Nootka Sound. ■WOEDS AND TOCABTOAEIES. Squallyamish Vocabulary, by Dk. John Scotjlee, in : Journal of the Eoyal Q-eograpMoal Society of London, Vol. XI. London, 1841, 8vo ; pp. 242, 244 — 247. STONE INDIANS, ASSINEBOINS, ASSINI- POILS, ASSINIBULES. The Stone Indians are the most numerous of any of the tribes inhabiting North-western America. They are about 1,200 to lj400 tents. They inhabit the mid-country from between the Missouri and Assineboin rivers from within fifty miles of Red River, westward, to the sources of Qu'Appelle River, about the source of the Elbono, or north branch of the Assineboin River, and from thence to the Red Deer's River, Saskatchewan. The Swampy Ground Stone Indians are now living close to the Rocky Mountains, near the source of the Red Deer's River, A A 178 SUSSEE — TACULLIES. Saskatchewan. The Iroquois, Mohawk, and Huron are mem- hers of the same class of languages. The place of the Stone Indian is more equivocal ; although generally separated hy most authors from the Mohawk (or Iroquois) tongues, it has, by some, been connected with that group. (See also under Dahhotah.') WOEDS AND TOCABtTLABIES. J. HowsB, Vocabularies of certain American Indian Languages — Stone Indian,- Iroquois, Mohawk, Huron, pp. 113 — 121 of: Proceedings of the Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1850. SUSSEE, SUESEE. On the sources of the Saskatchewaine, a tribe of the Cheppe- wyans. WOEBS AND TOCABULAEIES. Edwabd Umpeetille, The Present State of Hudson's Bay ; containing a Specimen of Five Indian Languages. London, Walker, 1790, 8to, p. 202. German translation, by E. A. W. Zimmermann. Selmstedt, Fleckeisen, 1791, 8vo, p. 148. Reprinted in : No. Ill, c, p. 374, of the Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II) ; and a few words in : Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 254. Baibi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, Wo. 769. Sussee "Words and Sussee compared with Shoshone, pp. 160, 161 of: E. G. Latham, The Languages of the Oregon Territory (pp. 154 — 166 of Vol. I of: Journal of the Ethnological Society of London. Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo) . Sussee Vocabulary (from TJmfbeville) compared with the other Languages of the Athapascan Stock, pp. 177 — 222 ; and, with the same, the Kinai and Koleschian Languages, pp. 269 — 318 of : Buschmann, Athapaskischer Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856, 4to. TAOULLTES, OAREIERS, NAGAILER. Indians of North-western America, on the sources of Eraser's River. The Sioaunies are related to them. Mackenzie calls them Nagailer and Carrier Indians. WOEDS AND TOCABTTliBIES. Nagailer or Chin Indian Words, pp. 257, 258 of: Axexandee Mackenzie's Voyages. London, 1801, 4to. TAH-LE-WAH. 179 And (from Iiim) Mitliridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 424. A Specimen of the TalcuUy or Carrier Tongue, pp. 403—413 (p. 413, numerical terms) of: Daniel Williams Harmon, A Journal of Voyages and Travels in the Interior of North America ; to which are added a Description of the Inhabitants and considerable Specimens of the Languages most extensively spoken. Andover, Flagg and Grould, 1820, 8vo. Professor W. W. Turner (from Habmon) Comparative Vocabulary of Twenty- five Words of TaouUy, Hudson's Bay, Chepewyan, Umkwa, Hoopah, Navajo, and Apache, pp. 84, 85 of the : Beport upon the Indian Tribes ; added to Lieutenant A.W.Whipple's Report, in Vol. II of the : Pacific Kailroad Reports. WasMngton, 1855, 4to. Baxbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 822. No. Ill, 5, of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 307—367) to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II, from Harmon). Tahkali (Carriers) Vocabulary, No. 1, A, of the Vocabularies of Languages of North-western America, pp. 569— 629 of : Hob. Hale, Ethnography and Philo- logy, United States Exploring Expedition, Philadelphia, Lea and Blanohard, 1846, folio. Hale divides the (1) TaKkali TJmpqna language into — A. Tahkali (Carriers). B. TlatsTcanai, with the dialects a. Tlatslcanai. b. Kwalhioqua, C. Xfrnkwa (CJmpqua). . The Tahkali Vocabulary was furnished to Hale by Mr. Anderson of the Hudson's Bay Company. It is reprinted, pp. 78, 80, 82, under A, III, in Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. TacuUies Vocabulary (from Mackenzie, Harmon, and Hale) compared with the other Languages of the Atbapaskan Stock, pp. 177—222, 269—318 of: Busch- mann, Athapaskisoher Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856, 4to. GEAMMAES ATTB GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. A short notice of the Character of the Language is given, pp. 534, 535 of: Hob. Hale, Ethnography and Philology, United States Exploring Expedition. Fhila- delphia, 1846, folio. TAH-LE-WAH. Califomian tribe^ on the Klamath River. WOEDS AND VOOABUIAEIES. Geoege Gibes, Vocabulary in: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes, Vol. Ill, pp. 440—445. ]80 TALATUI TAMANAQUE. TALATUI. Indian tribe on the Kassima River, a tributary of tbe Sacra- mento, in California. ■WOEDS AUD TOCABTJLAEIES. Hoe. Hale, Ethnography and Philology, United States Exploring Expedition. Fhiladelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio, p. 631. (Erom James D. Dana.) Kepriated in: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II, p. 123. TAMANAQUE. Indians of South America, on the banks of the Orinoco, near the Mission Encaramada. Their language, related to those of the Charibs and Chaymas^ is spoken by the Parechi, TJara- Mukura, Uaraca-Paccili, Paiure, Acherekotti, and Oj'e; kindred languages are those of the Palencas, Pariagotos, or Parias, and still more so the Cumanagota. (See also under Cumana.) WORDS AND TOOABTLAKIBS. GiLii, Saggio di Storia Americana, Tomo III, pp. 375—382 386—389. Heetas, Origine, pp. 27, 29, 49, Tabb. XLIX, L et seq. Hertas, Saggio, pp. 112, 113. Heetas, Vooabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq. Heetas, Aritmetica, pp. 104, 105. Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 618, 696, 697 j p. 655 (with some Pajure and Avarigote Words, from GiLii) . A. DE HuMEOiDT and A. Bonpiabd, Voyage aux Regions Equinoxiales da NouTcau Continent {Paris, Schoell, Dufour, Gide, and Maze, 1816 — 1831, 13 vols, 8vo), Vol. I, pp. 482 et seq. German translation — Stuttgart and 2'ubingen, 1818, Vol. I, pp. 217 et seq. A. D'Oebi&nt, L'Homme Am&icain, Vol. I, p. 162. Baibi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 581, 582 (Oumanagita), p. 274 (Tamanaqne, Pariagotos dela KiTifere Omabiche etdu G-olfe deParia-Tamanaque). SiE EoBEET H. ScHOMBUEaK, ComparatiTe Vocabulary of Eighteen Words of TwelTC Dialects of the Caribi-Tamanakan Stock, pp. 97, 98 of his Vocabularies of Eighteen Languages and Dialects of Indian Tribes inhabiting Guyana (British Association Report, Swansea Meeting, 1848. London, 1849, 8to). TARAHDMARA. 181 GEAMMAUS AND GEAMMATXCAL NOTICES. Gnu, Saggio di Storia Americana, Tomo III, pp. 176 — 185. Gilii wrote a ftrammar of tlie Tamanaka, which, however, was never published. Mithridates, Tol. Ill, pp. 656, 662, 666 (from GiLii). P. Fr. Feancisco de Tattste, Arte y Voeabulario de la Lengua de los Indies Chaymas, Cumanagotos, Cores, Parias, y otros Diversos de la Provinoia de Cu- mana 6 Nueva Andalusia ; con un Tratado a lo ultimo de la Boctrina Christiana y Cateoismo de los Misterios de Nuestra Santa I?^. Traducido de Castellano en la dicha Lengua Indiana. Madrid, Bernardo de ViJladiego, 1680, 4to ; pp. 16, 187 (without the Doetrina, etc.) In : Bibliotheca Soriptorum Capucoinorum a P. Dionysio Genoensi ; con- testa, retesta et extensa a F. Bernardo a Bononia (Venetiis, Sebast. Coleti,, 1747, folio), p. 94, it is stated that this author's name was Fkanoisous de Hattsie, and that, in 1684, he was poisoned by the savages. It is further stated that he published : Dictionarium Indioum, adjuncto Oatechismo in Lingua Indioa. Matriti, 1680, 4to. Brunet, however (IV, 404), calls him De Tauste, and he appears under the same name in : Bibliotheca Heberiana, VI, p. 255, No. 3482. A MS. copy of the book is in the Eoyal Library at Berlin ; the author is named " De Tauste." Mantjei, de Tangues, Prineipios y Eeglas de la Lengua Cummanagota general en varias Waciones que habitan en la Provincia de Cumana en los Yndios Ocei- dentales, con uu Diooionario. Burgos, 1683, 4to. The Dictionary bears tlie following title : M. Ktriz Blanco, Dicoionario de la Lengua de los Indies Cu- managotas y Palenques. According to Gilii, 1. 1., Vol. Ill, p. 410, P. Euiz has printed a Grammar of the Cumauacotti language. TAEAHUMARA. Language of Nueva Biscaya^ or Northern Mexico; related to the Mexican. "VVOEDS AND TOCABXrLAEIES. Heevas, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 238 (numerals). Hebtas, Saggio, pp. 122, 123. Heetas, Origine, Tabb. L et seq. P. Math. Stefeel, Tarahumarisehes Worterbuch, nebst einigen Naehrichten von den Sitten und Gebrauehen der Tarahumaren iu Neu-Biscayain der Audiencia 183 TAEASCA. Guadalaxara im Vieekonigreiehe Alt-Mexico oder Ifeu Spanien. Briinn, 1791, 8to. Beprintedin: Christoph Gottlieb Ton Murr, BTachricliteii von verschie- denen Landern des Spanischen Amerika, aus eigenhandigen Aufsatzeu einiger Missionare der Gresellsohaft Jesu herausgegeben. Salle, Heudel, Band I, No. 1 and 2, 1809, 8vo. Mitbridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 87, 88, 146, 153, 154. Balbi, Atlas Etbnographique, Tab. XLI, Ifo. 719. Nouvelles Annales des Voyages, Vol. IV {Paris, 1841, 8to), pp. 261—287. A Vocabulary bas been taken by John R. Bartiett, tbe United States Boundary Commissioner; Arte y Vocabulario completo de la Lengua Tarahumara general en toda la Custodia del Parral, por Pr. Jose Victoeino, Lector de ^Teologia en el Gonrento de Zacateoas. MS. (De Souza). Arte y eopioso Vocabulario de la Lengua Tepehuana y Tarahumara, y Catecismo, y Confessionario en dicba Lengua, por Pr. G-eeonimo Figtjeeoa. Kgueroa was born in Mexico, 1640 ; went as Jesuit' Missionary to Paoaca, among the Tepehuanas, and died in the city of Mexico, in 1683. He left four copies of the above "Arte " in his own handwriting. GKAMMAES AND BKAMMATICAl NOTICES, Mitbridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 146—153 (from P. Stepeei,). P. Fr. MlG-FEL Tellbohea, Compendio Grammatical para la Inteligencia del Idioma Tarahumar. Mexico, imprenta de la Pederaoion, 1826, small 4to, pp. 16, 162, 10. Clavigero mentions MS. Grammars of : AaosTiNO de Koa and Gieolamo FiSTJEEAS (with Dictionary). P. Steffel mentions a Grammar begun by P. Thomas Guadalaxaea. De Souza mentions likewise : Arte para aprender el Idioma de los Tarahumares, por P. AirairsTiN RoA, Misionero. MS. Eoa died in 1723. TARASOA. Language spoken in Michoacan. (See also under Pirt'nda.) WOEDS AND VOCABUIAEIBS. Vocabulario de la Lengua Tarasoa de Michoaoan, dirigido al Illmo. D. Vasoo de Quirogo, primero Obispo de aqueUa Proyinoia, por Fr. Mattjeino Gilebbti. Mexico, 1559, 4to. Also, by the same author : Dialogo de la Doctrina Cristiana en Lengua Tarasca ; Dedioada al Virey D. Luis de Velaseo. Mexico, 1555. Vocabulario y Sermones en Lengua Tarasca, por Fr. Juan Ramibez, Maestro en Teologia de la Provincia de S. Nicolas Tolentino de Michoacan. (MS., accord- ing to De Souza.) TARIANA. 183 C. S. Eahnesque, Atlantic Journal, pp. 9 et seq. Mithridates, Tol. Ill, part 3, p. 129. Heetas, Saggio, p. 120. Heetas, Origine, Tabb. XLIX, L et seq. Hebvas, Aritmetioa, p. 107. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Arte de la Lengua de Michoaean (Tarasoa), por Fr. Juan Beavo. Mexico, 1574. This Qramniar formed part of three Yolumes in 8vo, printed by Pedro Balli, in the same year. It was accompanied by a Confessionario, etc., in the same language. Souza says of the ]?!•. BraTO, " fue maestro peritisimo de la lengua Pirinda, llamada Tarasca.'' Arte de la Lengua Tarasca, y Sermones eu la Misma, por P. Tomas Chacon, 1630. MS. in the library of the College of San Gregorio, in Mexico. (Souza.) Manuel trilinque, Latino, Castellano, y Tarasco, para administrar los Sacra- mentos a los Espanoles y &. los Indies, por Fr. Ansel Seeba. Mexico, 1697, 4to. Sbeea also wrote : Arte, Diccionario, y Coufesonario de la Lengua Tarasco, which was prepared for the press, but never published ; probaby in the city of Querfetaro. Arte y Diccionario de la Lengua Tarasca, por Illmo. D. Pr. Juan Aiq-oea. Mentioned by Nicholas Antonio, and quoted by De Souza. P. Nicolas de Quixas, Arte de la Lengua Tarasca, del P. DiEaoBASAiENQUE. Mexico, 1714, 8to. An extract of this Grammar is given by A. Gallatin, Appendix I, No. 2, pp. 245 — 252, to : Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico, etc. (Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. I. New YorJc, 1845, 8vo). See also pp. 34, 45—48, ibid:,. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 126—128. Clavigero mentions Grammars and Dictionaries by Matuein Gileeet and Angelo Sibera (see titles above, from De Souza), and a Grammar of Juan Batiisia de Lagunas. TARIANA. Brazilian Indians of the province Eio Negro. (MabtiuSj VII, p. 308.) WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Vocabulary (of Ninety-eight Words), pp. 521—541 of: Alebed B. Wallace, A Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Eio Negro. London, Eeeve and Co., 1853, 8vo. 18-1 TCHO-KO-YEM — TEHUEI.HET. TOHO-KO-YEM. Indian band of Sonoma Valley, in north-western California. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. GrEOBGE GiBBS, Vocabulary (Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes, Vol. Ill, pp. 428 — 434). TEHUELHET, PATAGONIANS. Is the general name of the Indians inhabiting Eastern Pata- gonia. They are divided into — Tehuel Cunny, to whom belong the Yacana Cunny, Sehuah Gunny, and Culilan Cunny, and Tehuelhet proper, or Callilehet (m.ountain people), by the Spaniards called Serranos. Their language is said to be related to the Araucanian. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Thomas Falknee, Description of Patagonia (see Arauoan). Sereford, 1774, 4to, p. 132. German translation, by Sohaok H. Ewald. Golha, Ettinger, 1775, 8to. Primo viaggio intorno al globo terraoqueo, oseia ragguaglio della narigazione alle Indie Orientali per la via d'occidente, fatta suUa squadra del Capitano Mag- galianes negli anni 1519 — 1522, dell Cat" Antonio Pigasetta. Milano, 1800, 4to, pp. 191 et seq. Edited by Dr. Charles Amoretti, from a MS. in the Ambrosian Library of Milan. French translation, by the author himself .... suivi de I'extrait du traite de navigation du m^me auteur ; et d'une notice sur le Cheyalier Martin Behaim, aveo la description de son globe terrestre (par H. J. Jansen). Paris, Jansen, 1801, 8vo ; pp. 241 et seq. Captain James Bttenet, A Chronological History of the Discoveries in the South Sea or Pacific Ocean ; Part I commencing with an account of the earliest discoveries of that sea by Europeans, and terminating with the voyage of Sir Francis Drake, in 1579. London, Hansard, 1803 — 1817, 5 vols. 4to; Vol. I pp. 37 et seq. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, p. 423 (from Falknek). Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 443 (Patagouien du Port St. Julien). Vocabulary of Twenty-three Words, pp. 162, 164 of Vol. I of: A. D'Oebignt, L'Homme Americain j and Eight Words from Pigaeetta, 1520, and D'Obbiqnx 1829, compared, p. 59, Vol. II, ibid. TEPEGUANA TEQUIMA. 185 TEPEGUANA, TEPEHUANA. Indians of north-western Mexico, in the province of Sinaloa. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. POKTE. \ FiGUEEOA. „ ^ _ rbee (xrammars. Teenanbez. KlNAlDlNI. I GBAMMABS AND GEAMMATICAL NOTICES. Arte y Vocabulario de la Lengua Tepehuana, by the Padre Juan Fontb, a Jesuit, and missionary amongst the Tepehuanas, by whom he was killed in 1616. Arte y Copioso Tocabulario de las Lenguas Tepehuana y Tarahumara, y Oate- cismo y confesonario en diohas Lenguas, per el Fr. Jekonimo Figueeoa. Figueroa, born in Mexico, 1604, Jesuit, went to Oaxaca, as missionary amongst the Tepehuanas, and died in the city of Mexico, 1683. He left four copies of the above " Arte" in his own handwriting. Arte y Vooabulario de la Lengua Tepehuana, generica en la Sierra Madre, por Fr. Jose Feenaudez, Franciscano. Fernandez went to Zacatecas in 1717) where he was Provincial (Arlegui's authority). P. Bemito Rinaldini, Arte de la Lengua Tepeguana, con Vooabulario, oonfes- sionario y Oatechismo. Mexico, vidua de Ignazio Bernardo de Hogal, 1743, 4to ; pp. 72, 43, and 148. N.B. — Clavigero mentions MS. Grammars and Vocabularies of Tommaso DE GrUADAI/AJAEA and of GlEOtAJIO FlGITEBOA. TEQUIMA, OR OPATA. One of the languages spoken in the seventeen Jesuit Missions of Sonora. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Voeabulario de la Lengua Tequima y Platicas doctrinales en ella, por Natai LoMEAEDO. Mexico, 1702. Hbbvas, Saggio, p. 47. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Arte de la Lengua Tequima, vulgarmente llamada Opata, por Natal Lombaedo. Mexico, 1702, 4to. B B 186 TETONS — TICORILLAS. TETONS. Sioux tribe between the Mississippi and Missouri. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Keise des Prinzen MAXiMiLiAif zu WiBD. Cobleni, 1839—1841, 2 vols. 4to ; Vol. II, p. 498. TEXAS INDIANS. In : Museo MexicanOj Tomo III, p. 537, mention is made of " Manuel para administrar los SS. Sacramentos a los Indios de las Naciones — Pajalates, Orejones, Pacaos, Pacoas, Pilijayas, Ala- sapas, Pamanes y otras muchas, come son : los Pacahuches, Mescalos, Pampopas, Tacames, Chapopines, Venados, Pamaques y toda la juventud de Pihniques, Borrados, Samipaos y Manos de Perro. Compuesto por el P. Pray Babtolomeo Garcia, Predicadof Apostolico .... Franciscano de la Mission de San Antonio de Texas, 1769, 4to." TICORILLAS. Apache Indians of western New Mexico. Their language shows affinity with the great Athapaskan stock of languages. , WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. James H. Simpson, Comparative Vocabulary of Words in the Language of the Pueblo, or Civilized Indians of New Mexico, and of the Wild Tribes inhabit- ing its borders, Appendix B, pp. 140 — 143, to : Journal of a Military Eecon- naissance from Santa Fe, New Mexico, to the Navajo Country, etc. (Reports of the Secretary of War, with Beconnaissauces of Routes from San Antonio to El Paso .... also .... the Report of Lieutenant J. H. Simpson, of an Expedi- tion into the Navajo Country. Exec. Dooum. Senate, No. 64, Congress 31, Sess. 1. Washington, Union Office, 1850, 8vo ; pp. 86—168). Comparative Vocabulary of the Athapascan and Einai Languages (also Navajo and Tioorilla), pp. 269—318 of : BuscHMAirar, Athapaskischer Spraohstamm. Berlin, 1856, 4to. TICUNAS TXMUACA. 187 TIOUNAS. Brazilian Indians on the Amazon. (Maktius.No. 179) . Tacunas, Tecunas, Ticonas, Tucunas, on the River Intahy. (See Voyage, Vol. Ill, p. 1196.) WORDS AND YOCABULAEIES. Langue des Ticunas (Cavallo ooclie), Vocabulary, No. XXIV, pp. 298, 299 of: CASXEUfAir, Vol. V, Appendioe. TILUEX, TEGUAS, KIWOMI. Pueblo Indians, belonging to the Keres family, residing at the pueblo of Santo Domingo, in New Mexico. WORDS and vocabularies. A Vocabulary has been taken by the United States Boundary Commisaloner, John R. Baetiett. Kiwomi Vocabularies (one from the chief, the other from another member of the tribe) taken by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, pp. 86 — 89 of the Keport upon the Indian Tribes, added to his Report on the Route near the 35th Parallel (Pacific Railroad Reports, Vol. II. Washington, 1856, 4to) . TIMBIRAS, CEANS. Brazilian Indians of the province of Groyaz. They are related to the Ges, and their language shows a close aflBnity to that of the Ges. Their three principal tribes are called Timiiras de Mata, Timbiras de Ganella fina, and Timbiras de Bocca furada. (Martius, IV, No. 81.) WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 511 (Timbiras de Canella fina). TIMUACA, TIMUIQUANA, TIMUICANA. Language of Florida Indians, in the neighbourhood of S. Augustin. 188 TINQUA TLAOQUATCH. WOEDS AND VOCABULAEIES. Hebtas, Aritmetioa, p. 113. Heevas, Origine, formazione e meccanica degli Idiomi (p. 180, Wo. LXV) Lingua Timuacana Sella Florida ; on two tables. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 285, and (from Mithridates) in : Norton's Literary Gazette {New Yorh, 4to), 1855, No. 5 (March), p. 95 (Timuacana or Timuaca Language). Eai-bi, A-tlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 785. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Gramatioa de la Lengua Timuiquana de Florida, por Fr. FsAlfOlBOO Paeeja. Mexico, 1614. Also, by the same author : Confesonario en Lengua Timuiquana. Mexico, 1612. Catecismo de la Doctrina Cristiana en Lengua Timuiquana. Mexico, 1617. Pareja was a native of Toledo, in Spain, and was one of the founders of the Franciscan Order in Sa. Elena, in Florida, and Guardian of t he first convent established there. TINQUA. A language of Florida, in which were written a " Doctrina Cristiana," and a book on the administration of the sacraments, by Fray G-regorio Morilla, which were printed, the first at Madrid in 1631, and afterwards reprinted at Mexico in 1635, and the second at Mexico in 1635 (Souza). TLAOQUATCH, TLOQUATCH. Indians of the south-western coast of Vancouver's Island. Their language appears to be the same as that of the Nootka Sound Indians, and is related to that of the Haeeltzuk. WOEDS AND VOCABULAEIES. Tloaquatoh Vocabulary, by Dr. John Sooitleb, in : Journal of the Eoyal Geographical Society of London, Vol. XI {London, 1841, 8vo), pp. 242, 244, 246. Dr. John Scouleb, Chikeelis and Tlaoquatch Words, p. 236 of: On the Indian Tribes -inhabiting the North-west Coast of America (pp. 228 252 of the: Journal of the Ethnological Society of Iiondon, Vol. I. Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo). TLAPANEKA TLATSIiANAI. 189 Tlaoquatoh and Nootka Words, p. 156 of: K. Gr. Latham, The Languages of the Oregon Territory (pp. 154—166 of Vol. I of the same Journal). TLAPANEKA. Indiaas of Tlapa, in the Mexican State of Puebla. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. HuMBOiDT (Essai politique sur le Eojaume de la Nouvelle Espagne, Tol. I, p. 243) mentions that at Tlapa a particular language is spoken. TLASOALTEKAS. Indians of San Salvador^ who speak a dialect of the Mexican language. WORDS AND YOCABULAfllES. Dr. Kael Scheezek, Spraehe der Tlasoaltekas Indianer im Dorfe Isalco ira Staate San Salvador, pp. 28 — 35 of Vol. XV of; Sitzungsberichte der Philo- sophisch-Historischen Klasse der Kaiserliehen Akademie der Wissenschaften. Vienna, 1855, 8vo. A Iso under the separate title of : Spz'achen der Indianer Central- Amerika's. Vienna, 1855, 8vo, pp. 11. TLATSKANAI, KWALHIOQUA. Indians of the Athapaskan stock and the TacouUie-Umpqua family of north-western America^ speaking different dialects of one language. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. 1, B, a, b, pp. 569—629, of the Vocabularies of Korth-western America, in : HoEATio Hale's Ethnography and Philology, United States Exploring Expe- peditiou. Philadelphia, Lea. and Blanchard, 1816, folio. Hale's Vocabulary compared with the other Athapaskan, pp. 177—222, and ■with the Kinai Languages and Kolosnhian, pp. 269—318, of: Busehmann's Atha- paskischer Sprachstamm. Serlin, 1856, 4to. M, III, p. 105, of the same Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. VI. 190 TOTONAKA. TOTONAKA. Language of Indians in the districts of Zacatlau, State of Puebla, and in the State of Vera Cruz. The four dialects of this language are the Tatiquilhati, Chacahuazti, Ypapana, and Tatimolo. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Hbbtas, Saggio, pp. 118, 119. Hebtas, Origine, Tabb. L et seq. Mitbridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 60 (tliree dialects of the Sierra Caja, Sierra Alta, and others). J. S. Vateb, Proben, etc. ; Seetzen's Linguistisoher Nachlasa. Leipzig, Vogel, 1816, 8vo ; pp. 352—375. Balbi, At\&a Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 699 (Totonaca, Sierra-alta). Nouvelles Annales des Voyages. Paris, 1841, 8vo ; Vol. IV, pp. 261 — 267. N.B. — Clavigero saj's that Andbeas de Olmos and CeisiotalDiaz de Anaya have written Q-rammars and Vocabularies of the Totonaka language. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Arte de Lengua Totonaca, conforme el Arte de Antonio Nebrija. Compuesto por D. Joseph Zambeako Boniila, Cura beneflciado, etc. Dedicado al Bxmo. Sr. D. Domingo Pantaleon Alvarez de Abreu, Arzobispo, Obispo de esta Diocesi. Lleva anadido una doctrina de la Lengua Naolingo, con algunas voces de la Lengua de aquella Sierra y de esta de Aca, que por orden de su lUustrmo. se imprimo. Su autor el Lie. D. Francisco Dominguez, Cura de Xalpam de los Angelos. Puebla, 1752, 8vo, pp. 134, 79. {Naolingo is the dialect generally called Tatimolo.) Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 46—59. Adelung (Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 92) mentions, upon Marsden's authority : Eu&EHiO EoMEEO, Arte para aprender las Lenguas Mexicana y Totonaca. According to De Souza, the title is as follows : — Arte 6 Gramatica de la Lengua Totonaca, por D. EuGENlo Eomeeo, de Antequera. MS. Arte y Vocabulario de la Lengua Totonaca, y varios Opuscules Catequisticos en la misma, por lUmo. D. Er. Pbanoisco Toeal, Obispo de Yucatan. MS. Toral died in Mexico, 1571 (De Souza). Arte para aprender el Idioma Totouaco, and also : Vocabulario Totonaco-Cas- tellano, by Ceistobal Diaz Anaya, Cura of Olintla, in the province of Puebla, Mexico. MSS. (De Souza). TSCHUGATSCHI TSCHUKTCHI. 191 TSOHUGATSCHI. Eskimo tribe, driven from the Kadjah Islands to Prince Wil- liam's Sound and Cook's Inlet. ■WOKDS AND VOCABULAUIES. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 340, 341, 458, 459, 466 ; Vol. IV, pp. 251— 253. Balbi, Atlas Ethnograpliique, Tab. XLI, No. 857 (Tchougatolii — Konaga). K. B. T. Baeb und Gr. T. HELMBESEif, Beitrage zur Kenntniss des Eussisohen Eeiclis und der angranzenden Lauder Asiens, Baud I. St. Fefersitirff, 1839, 8vo, p. 259. TSCHUKTCHI. They occupy the north-western part of Russian Asia, and the opposite shores of north-western America. A part of them are settled in Asia, and call themselves Namollo. They are un- doubtedly Eskimos. The Wild, or Reindeer, Tchuktchi call themselves Tchouktschee, Tchekto, and have been invaders, possibly, of the Korjake nation. Only the settled Tchuktchi belong to the American continent. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Smith Bakton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies. J. Billing, Putesohestvie, &c. (Russian edition of liis Voyage, by Sarytsolier, with Twehe Vocabularies). St. Petersburg, 1811, 4to, pp. 190 ; pp. 102—111. (The Vocabularies collected by the Head Physician, Dr. Eobeck). Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 340, 341, 407, 408; Vol. IV, pp. 242, 251— 253 (from Eobeok, Merck, and Kosohalefp). A. J. KEirSENSTEEN, Wiirter-Sammlungen aus den Sprachen einiger Volter des oestlichen Asieus und der Nordwestkiiste von Amerika. St. Feterslurg, 1813, 4to ; pp. 33—44. J. S. Vateb, Proben deutsoher Volksmundarten and Seetzen's Lin- guistischer Naohlass. Leipzic, Vogel, 8vo, 1816 ; pp. 149 — 167. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 860, Tchouktchi Asiatiques; 859, Tchouktchi Am^ricains. N.B.— No. I, 3, of A. Gallatin's Comparative Vocabulary, pp. 307—367 of : Archseologia Americana, Vol. 11 (the Asiatic Tshutchi). 192 TUBAR — TUSCABORA. TUBAE,. Indians of Sinaloa, speaking a language related to the Tepe- guana and Tarahumara. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Hbbvas, Origine, Tabb. XLIX et seq. Heetas, Saggio, p. 122. And (from him) in the Mithridates, III, 3, pp. 139—141. TUOANO. Brazilian Indians of the province Kio Negro. Martius (VIIj 196) enumerates them' among the tribes of Juris. WORDS AND YOCABULAKIES. Vocabulary (of Ninety-eight Words), pp. 521—541 of: Alfeed R. Wallace, A Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Eio Negro. London, Reeve and Co., 1853, 8vo. TUNGHASE. Indians of the south-eastern part of Prince of Wales's Archi- pelago. Their language is closely related to that of Sitka. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Vocabulary by Dr. John Scottlbe, in : Journal of the Eoyal G-eographioal Society of London, Vol. XI {London, 1841, Svo), pp. 231, 233—235. Tunghase and Sitka Words, p. 163 of: R. O. Latham, The Languages of the Oregon Territory (pp. 154 — 166 of: Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, Vol. I. Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo). TUSOARORA. Indians formerly of North Carolina. They joined afterwards (a.d. 1714) the Five Nations^ or Iroquois^ and are now in the west of the State of New York. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. A small Dictionary of Tusterura, Pamptieough, Woecon, pp. 225—230 of: John Lawson, Surveyor-General of North Carolina, A New Voyage to Carolina; TZENDALES. 193 containing the Exact Description and Natural History of tliat Country, together with the Present State thereof; and a Journal of a Thousand Miles travelled through several Nations of Indians, giving a particular account of their Customs, Manners, etc. London, 1709, 4to. Keprinted, ibid., 1714, 4to, and 1718, 4to (only new title-pages). First printed as part of : A New Collection of Voyages and Travels .... by Captain John Stevens .... London, December, 170S, 4to ; to be con- tinued montVily (inTol. I). (?enna« translation, ITamlurg,\772f,8yo. And in the plagiarism upon Lawson's Voyage : John Brickell, M.D., The Natural History of North Carolina, with an Account of the Trades, Mauners, and Customs of the Christian and Indian laliabitants. Dublin, 1737, 8vo ; and, with new title-page, 1743, Svo. HebTas, Aritmetica, pp. 113, 114. Smith Baeton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies, and Appendix, p. 20. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 318, 334, 335. Eaibi, Atlaa Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 800. No. V, 31, of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 307—367) to A. G-allatiu's Synopsis, etc (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II) ; and under R, V, 5, p. 115, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II (from MS. Notes of Parish). Tuscarora Vocabulary, Vol. II, Appendix B, pp. 262—265, of: Geo. Catlin's Letters and Notes on the Manners, Customs, and Condition of the North American Indians. London and New Tori;, Wiley and Putnam, 1841, 2 vols. Svo. Vocabulary of the Tuscarora, from William Chew, written out by the Eev. Gil- bert Eockwood, Appendix H, pp. 251—258, to : Henry E. Schoolcraft's Notes on the Iroquois. New York, Bartlett and Welford, 1846, 8vo. (New York State Document, 1846, Senate No. 24.) And in the Comparative Vocabulary of the Iroquois, pp. 393 —400 of the same Eeport, published as a separate book. Albany, Pease and Co., 1847, Svo. Comparison of Tuscarora (from LAWSON),Pampticough, and Waccoa, pp. 552— 556 of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. V. TZENDALES, OELDALES. Indians of Chiapas, speaking a dialect of the Maya. Abbe Brasseur considers the Celdal the parent language, and the Maya a dialect. ■WORDS AND VOCABDLAEIES. C. S. Eaeimsqub, Atlantic Journal, and Friend of Knowledge. PTiiladelphia, 1832, 1833, 8vo ; pp. 196—198. C C 194 UAINAMBKU — UGALENZI. A short MS. Vocabulary of the Tzendal Language, brought from Chiapas -by John L. Stephens, is mentioned by A. Q-allatin, in his Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico, etc. (Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. I, p. 5). GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Fr. De Cbpeda, Arte de las Lenguas Chiapa, Moque, Celdales y Cinancateca. Mexico, 1560, 4to. UAINAMBEU. Brazilian Indians of the province of Rio Negro. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Vocabulary (of Ninety-eight Words), pp. 521—541 of: AxEEED E. Waiiacb, A Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Kio Negro. London, Reeve and Co., 1853, 8vo. UCHEE. Creek Indians, east of the rivers Coosa and Chatahoochee. Their language is very harsh and guttural. They are now partly in Florida, partly in the west. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. No. XI, 46, of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 35 -r367) to A. Grallatin's Synopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II ; from Ware, and MS. Notes of Eidge). And No. D. XI, pp. 94, 96, of: American Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. II. UGALENZI. Indians of Russian America, west of Cape St. Elias, and near the Island of Kadjak. Their language seems to be a dialect of the Koloschian. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. V. Wbangel, Some (Eleven) Words compared vith Atna and Kolusch, p. 99 of ; K. E. VON Baer und &r. v. Helmeesen, Beitritge zur Kenntniss des Eus- sischen Eeiohs und der angranzenden Lander Asiens, Band I. St. Petersburg, 1839, 8vo. Comparative Vocabulary of the Athapascan and Kinai (among them the Ugalenze) Languages, pp. 269—318 of: Bcschmann's Atliapaskisoher Spraoh- stamm. Serlin, 1856, 4to. UMPQUA -UNALASCHKA. 195 UMPQUA. Indians of Oregon, of the Athapascan stock, family of Tahkali- Umpkwa. ■WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. TJmpqua Vocabulary, by Dr. John Sooulee, in ; Journal of the Eoyal Geogra- graphioal Society of London, Vol. XI. London, 1841, 8vo, pp. 237 — 239, 241. Umptwa Vocabulary, 1, C, of the Vocabularies of North-western America, pp. 569 — 629 of: Hoeatio Hale, Ethnography and Philology, United States Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanehard, 1846, folio. And M, III, p. 105, of the Vocabularies of North-western America (Transac- tions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.) Professor W. W. Turner (/rom Hale), Comparative Vocabulary of Twenty- five Words of Umpkwa, Hudson's Bay, Chepewyau, Tacully, Hoopah, Apache, and Navajo, pp. 84, 85 of the Beport upon the Indian Tribes ; added to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Keport (Pacific Eaiboad Keports, Vol. II. Washington, 1856, 4to). Umpqua compared with the other Athapascan languages, viz., Chepewyan, Tahkali, Kutchin, Dogrib, Sussee, and Tlatskanai, pp. 174 — 222; and compared with the same, the Kinai languages — Koloschian, Navajo, and Ticorilla, pp. 269 — • 318 of: BusCHMANir, Athapaskischer Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856, 4to. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. A Grammatical Notice, see pp. 534, 535 of : Hoeatio Hale, Ethnography and Philology, United States Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanehard, 1846, foho. UNALASCHKA. The largest of the Pox Islands, inhabited by Eskimos. The language of Unalaschka is spoken over all the Fox Islands, and also on the peninsula of Aljaska. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. William Coxe, Account of Russian Discoveries between Asia and America, etc. London, 1780, 4to (reprinted, ibid., 1784 and 1804), p. 303. French translation — Paris, 1781, 4to. Neiifchatel, 1781, 8vo, p. 172. German translation — Frankfurt and Leipzig, JTleischer, 1784, 8vo. A Table to show the Afiinity between the Languages spoken at Oonalashka and Norton Sound and those of the Greenlanders and Esquimaux, Appendix VI to Vol. Ill of: A Voyage to the Pacific Ocean, performed under the direction 196 UTAHS VILELA. of Captains Cook, Clark, and Gore, 1776—1780. London, 1784, 3 vols. 4t0 5 Vol. II, Appendix VI, p. 554. Edit. Dublin, 1784, 3 vols. 8vo ; Vol. Ill, pp. 554, 555. Mithridatea, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 458, 459 (from Besan op]?) . Vocabulary of the Languages .... of the Islands .... Oonalaschta .... Appendix Wo. Ill, pp. 329 — 337, of: Ueey Lisianskt's Voyage round the World. London, John Booth, 1814, 4to. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, K^o. 858. ]?EED. LuTKE, Voyage autour du Monde ex&nt6 sur la Corvette le Seniavine, etc., 1826 et 1829. Traduit du Eusse par E. Boye. Faris, Firmin Didot, 1835, 1836, 3 vols, 8vo, and Atlas ; Vol. I, pp. 236 — 247. The Russian original— Tedor Litke, Puteschestvie vokrug svjeta — appeared at St. Petersbwg, 1834 — 1836, 3 vols. 8vo. Some Words (31 — and numerals 1 — 5) of the Unalachka compared with Eskimo and Kadjak, p. 123 of: Von Baeb und Von Helmersen, Beitrage zur Kentniss des Eussischen Eeiuhes, Band I. St. Petersburg, 1839, 8vo. Oonalashca Vocabulary, sub lit. X, p. 130, of the Vocabularies of North America, in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II. (Grallatin says, concerning this language, p. 77, "not in America.") GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 460. UTAHS. Wild Indians on the borders of New Mexico. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Utah Vocabulary .... No. 9 of Appendix B, pp. 140 — 143, of: James H. Simpson's Journal of a Military Eeconnaissauce from Santa F^, New Mexico, to the JNavajo Country (Eeports of the Secretary of War, with Eeoonnaissances of Koutes from San Antonio to El Paso .... also .... the Report of Lieutenant J. H. Simpson. Washington, Union Office, 1850 ; 8vo, pp. 65—168). VILELA. Indians of the Argentine province, Cordova,, on the banks of the Salado River. They are divided into Ontoampas, Yeconoampas, Ipas, and Pasaines. There are also some wandering tribes of the Vilela in the forests on the banlis of the Rio Bermcio; among them are the Chunupies, Ocoles, Atalalas. The Vilela VIRGINIA VUTA. 197 language is related to the Lule, and has several dialects, among M'hich the Vilela proper and the Ontoampa are the most promi- nent. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. P. S. GiLil, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, pp. 364—366. Heevas, Yocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq. Heetas, Origine, pp. 27, 29, 37, 41, 44, 45, 48, Tabb. XLIX, L, LI efc seq. Heevas, Aritmetioa, pp. 98, 99. Heetas, Saggio, pp. 103—105. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 508, 516, 517 (from Heetas and GriLii). Baibi, Atlas Etliuographique, Tab. XLI, No. 455. VIRGINIA. The words which we find mentioned under this name belong to the Mohegan. WOKDS AND VOCABULARIES. The "Few Words" given by Captain John Smith are to be found in — ], Vol. IV of: D. Samtiei. Pueohas, Hakluytus Postumus {London, 1625, V, folio), p. 1667. 2, p. 40 of his General History of Virginia. London, 1627 {ibid., 1630, 1632), and Vol. I, pp. 147, 148, of the edition published in 1819 at Rich- mond, Virginia, Franklin Press, William W. Gray, printer, 2 vols. 8vo. Vocabularium Barbaro-Virgineonim, pp. 133 — 154 of: Lutheri Catechismus ofversatt pa American Virginiske Spraket. Stoclcholm, Burehard, 1696, small 8vo. H. Eeiakdus, Dissertationes Miscellanefe. Trajecti ad Rhenum, 1706 — 1708, 3 vols. Svo; Vol. Ill, pp. 208-211. Heetas, Saggio, p. 126. Heetas, Origine, Tabb. L et seq. Smith Barton, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies ; and (from him, as well as from the Virginia Catechism) in : Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 387—389. Langue des Virginians: Cotjei de Gebelin, Monde Primitif, Vol. VIII, pp. 515^520. Paris, 1772, 4to. Eeprinted, pp. 328-331 of: J. B. Soberer, Eecherches Historiques et G^ographiques sur le NouTeau Monde. Faris, Bruuet, 1777, 12mo. VUTA, HUILLTCHE. Indians, west of the Patagonians, and south of the Araucaniansj 198 WACOES WAIK.UR. They are divided into the — Chanos, Chunos, or Chonos, on and next to the island of Chiloe ; Poyus, or Poyes, on the islands of Wellington and Hanover^ and the coast opposite; Keyus, or Keyes, south of the above, and down to the Straits of Magal- haens. Their language is a mixture of Araucan and Tehuelhet. WORDS AND VOCABULAllIKS. Th. Falknek, Description of Patagonia. Hereford, 1774, 4to, p. German translation — dotha, 1775, 8vo, p. 124. WACOES, NUECOS. Indians of the Great Prairies, belonging to the Pawnee stock, residing between the Washita and Red rivers, in about 98° 20' W. long. They are closely related to their neighbours, the Witchitas. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. ITueoo Vocabulary, pp. 65 — 68, and Fifteen Nueco Words compared with Pawnee, Eiccaree, Kichai, and Witohita, pp. 68, 69, of the Eeport upon the Indian Tribes, by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, Thomas Ewbank, and Professor W. W. Turner, added to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Keport on the Route near the 35th Parallel (Pacific Railroad Reports, Vol. II. Washington, 1856, 4to). WAJKUR, GUAIOUR, MONQUI. Indians of Lower California. The Cora and the Aripe speak dialects of their language. ^ WOUDS AND VOCABULARIES. J. Begebt, e S. J., Wachricliten von der Ameriianischen Halbinsel Californien, mit einem zwiefachen Anhang falscher Nachrieliten. G-eschrieben Ton einem Priester der Gesellsohaft Jesu, welcher lang darinn diese letztere Jahr gelebt hat. Mannheim, 1772, 8vo. Langue de la Californie (Waikur, from Begebt), pp. 553 — 555 of: Cottbt DE Gebelin, Monde PrimitiC. Paris, 1772, 4to. aiithridates. Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 198, 199. Cora A''ocabulary, iiid., pp. 87, 88, 153, 154. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 188—192 (from P. Begeet). WAIILATPU — WARllOWS. 199 WAIILATPU, MOLELE. Indians of western Oregon, south of Columbia Kiver. The Waiilatpu proper are called, also, Willetpoos, Cayuse. Their languages bear some affinity to the Sahaptin or Nez-perc6 language. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. T. Waiilatpu; O. Waiilatpu (Willepoos, Cayuse), from Dr. Whitman; P. Molele (see Vocabularies of North- western Amprica, pp. 569 — 629 of: HoK. Hale, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition. Phila- delfMa, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio). And U, XXV, p. 120, of the Vocabularies in ; Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. A Short Notice, p. 561 of: Hob. Hale, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition {Philadelphia, 1846, folio) ; and, reprinted, p. 56, Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II. WAUEOWS. Indians in the interior of British Guyana. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Journal of the Koyal Geographical Society of London, Vol. II {London, 1832, 8vo), pp. 247 et seq. Reprinted in K. JWontgomery Martin's British Colonial Library, Vol. V (West Indies, II), pp. 155, 156. London, Bohn, 1844, 12mo. Warrow Words, pp. 140, 141, of: John Dunmoee Lang, J).D., View of the Origin and Migrations of the Polynesian Nations. London, Cochrane, 1834, 12mo. Vocabulary of Eighteen Words compared with Arowak, Accaway, and Caribisi, pp. 297, 298 of: W. H. Beett, Indian Tribes of Gruyana. New York, Carter Brothers, 1852, 12mo. Sir EoBEET H. ScHOMBtTBG-K, Comparative Vocabulary of Eighteen Warauan Words, in his ; Vocabularies of Eighteen Languages and Dialects of Indian Tribes inhabiting G-uiana, pp. 97, 98 of: British Association Report, Swansea Meetmg, 1848. London, 1849, 8vo. 200 WEE-YOT — WINNEBAGOS. WEE-YOT. Indian band on the mouth of Eel Kiver and near Humboldt Bay, in north-western California. (Eel River is called Wee-yot by the Indians residing on it.) WOEDS AND VOCABULARIES. GrEOEGE GrBBS, Vocabulary : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes, Yol. Ill, pp. 434 — 440. WEITS-PEK. Indians of north-western Californiaj on the Klamath, at the junction of the Trinity. WORDS AND' VOCABULARIES. GeoeQE Gibbs, Tocabulary : Sclioolcraft's Indian Tribes, Vol. Ill, pp. 440 — 445. WINNEBAGOS, NIPPEGON. Called, by the French, Puans, or Otchagras ; by the Oma- haws, Horoje ; and by themselves, Hochungorah. Indians of the Sioux stock on Eox and Rock rivers, Wisconsin. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Professor Sat, ComparatiTe Vocabularies of Various Dialects of the Lenape (or Delaware) Stock of North American Indians, together with a Specimen of the Winnebago (or Nippegon) Language, Note 15, pp. 135—145, to John Picker- ing's edition of Dr. Edwards's Observations on the Mohegan Language CCollec- tions of the Massachusetts Historical Society, Vol. X of the Second Series. Boston Phelps and Farnham, 1823, 8vo ; reprinted, ibid., Little and Brown, 1843, Svo ; pp. 81—160). Note 16, pp. 149—151, relates to the Winnebago dialect, which is considered as being of Mexican origin. Professor Sat, Vocabulary, pp. Ixxxvi— IxxxTiii, added to : Astronomical and Meteorological Records and Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken in the Expedition for Exploring the Mississippi, under the command of Major J. H. Long. FMladelphia, 1822, 4to. Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 775. WISH-OSK WOKKONS. 201 No. TI, 33, of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305—367) to A. Gallaiim's Synopsis, etc. (Aroheeologia Americana, Vol. II). And under S, VI, 2, p. 116, of the Vocabularies in : American Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. II. (From Sat, and MS. notices of Boiloin Cass and in the War Departr ment.) Winnebago Numerals (1— billion), by Miss Elizabeth Lowey, pp. 214—216 of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. II. WISH-OSK. Indians of north-western California, on Humboldt Bay and Mad Eiver. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. GEOEaE GlEES, Vocabulary : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. Ill, pp. 434—440. WITCHITAS. Indians of northern Texas, near the Red Eiver. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Captain E. E. Maeoy, Vocabularies of Words in the Languages of the Comanches and Witchitas, Appendix H, pp. 273 — 276, of; Eandolph B. Maect and Geoboe B. M'Clellan, Exploration of the Red Hirer of Louisiana, in the year 1852. Washington, Nicholson, public printer, 1854, 8vo (33rd Congr. 1st Sess. House Exec. Doc.) Specimen of the Caddo and Witohita Languages, pp. 709 — 712 of Vol. V of; Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States. Eifteen Witchita Words (from Maecy) compared with Pawnee, Kiohai, Eio- oaree, and Hueoo, pp. 68, 69 of the Eeport upon the Indian Tribes ; added to Lieu- tenant A. W. Whipple's Eeport (Pacific Eaik-oad Reports, Vol. II. Wash- ingion, 1856, 4to). WOKKONS, WACOOA. Indians, formerly of North Carolina, long since extinct. Their language was related to that of the Catawbas. They were neighbours of the Tuscaroras in North Carolina. ' WORDS AND vocabularies. A small Dictionary of Tuskerora, Pampticough, Woooon, in : John Lawson, D D 202 YAMKALLIE. New Voyage to Carolina (see Tuscarora). London, 1709, 4to, pp. 225—230 et seq. German translation — Mamhurg, VT12, 8vo, pp. 341 et seq. Dr. John Beickei., The Natural History of North Carolina. Dublin, 1737, 8vo. New title, Hid., 1743, 8to. Heevas, Aritmetica, p. 114. Smith Baetott, New Views, etc. — Comparative Vocabularies. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 308 (from Lawson). Bami, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XXI, No. 793. Comparison of the Languages of the ancient Pamptieos of Nortb Carolina with the Algonquin Language, and of the ancient Waceoa of tbat State and the Catawba of South Carolina, pp. 552—558 of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of tbe United States, Vol. V. (Tuskarora and Wacooa, both from Lawson, pp. 552 — 555; Tuskarora, Pampticough,. and Wacooa, pp. 555, 556; "Waceoa and Catawba, pp. 557, 558. ■) P. 87, and No. XIX, 54, p. 372, of the Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. ( Archseologia Americana, Vol. II) . , YAMKALLIE, KALLAPUIAH. Oregon Indians of the plains of the "Wallamette, speaking a language related to that of the Cathlascons and Haeeltzuk. WORDS AND VodABDLAKIES. Kalapooah and Yamkallie Vocabularies, by Dr. John Scoitlee, in : Journal of the Koyal Geographical Society of London, Vol. XI. London, 1841, Svo ; pp. 237, 239, 241. Vocabulary of the Calapooa Nation, pp. 333 — 336 of: Eev. Samuel Paee:ee, Journal of an Exploring Tour beyond the Kooky Mountains. Ithaca, New York, printed by Mack, Andrus, and Woodruff, 1838, 12mo. No. 7, S, 9 {Kalapuyd), and r. {Tuhwalati, Follaties), of the Vocabularies of North-western America (pp. 569 — 629), in : Hoeatio Hale, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio. And E, XXVII {Kalapuya, Willamet), pp. 97, 99, of the North American Vocabularies (Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II). GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Pp. 564—566 of: Hoeatio Hale, Ethnography and Philology, United States Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio. And pp. 58—61, Vol. II, of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. YAGTJAS YAQTJI. 303 YAGUAS. Brazilian Indians on the Amazon. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES, Langue des Yaguas, Vocabulary, No. XSIII, pp. 297, 298, of: Castelnait, Vol. V, Appendioe. YAMEOS. Indians on the Upper Marauon, east from the junction of the Tigre Eiver. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Hebvas, Origiue, Tabb. XLVIII, L et seq. Heetas, Saggio, pp. 107, 108 ; and (from him) Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 589, 595—597. YANKTONS, YANKTONANS, OR YANKTOANANS. Sioux tribe^ between the Red River and the Missouri. WORDS AND TOCABUIABIES. P. Ixixiv of Say's Vocabularies ia : Astronomdoal and Meteorological Re- cords, and Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken on the Expedition for Ex- ploring the Mississippi .... under .... Major J. H. Long. Philadelphia, 1822, 4to. Baibi, Atlas Ethuographique, Tab. XLI, No. 774. No. VI, 35, of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305—367) to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. : Arohseologia Americana, Vol. II (from Say). Keprinted under S, VI, 1, p. 116, -of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II. Eeise des Priuzen Maximilian zu Wibd, Collenz, 1839 — 1841, 2 vols. 4to j Vol. II, pp. 491—498. YAQUI, HIAQUI. Christian Indians of Sonora, Mexico. (See also under Cinaloa.) It may be stated, on the authority of Heevas and Andk. Perez 204 YARURA. DE RiBAs (Historia de los Triumfos de nuestra Sauta Fe, Madrid, 1645^ folio), that the Hiaqui is the principal language ofSinaloaj and, on the authority of De Souza, that P. Luis BoNiPAZ has written an "Arte de la Lengua Principal de Cinaloa," which probably exists only in MS. WORDS AND VOCABTTLAEIES. Hebtas, Origine, Tabb. XLIX, L et seq. Heetas, Saggio, pp. 121, 122; and (from Mm) Mithridates, Tol. Ill, part 3, pp. 156—158. A Vocabulary of their Language bag been taken by John R. Baetlett, the United States Boundary Commissioner. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Arte de la Lengua Principal de Cinaloa, por P. Ltjis Bonieaz. (MS., according to De Souza.) Mitliridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 15.6—158 (Lord's Prayer, with Grrammatical Notes). YARUEA. Indians of New Granada, in the plains of the Meta and Casanare, tributaries of the Orinoco. They call themselves Japurin. Their language bears affinity to the languages of the Betoi, Ele, and Otomaques. WOUDS AND VOCABULARIES. Giiii, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, p. 212. Heevas, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq. Prom P. GiOT. Maeia Poeneei, a missionary among the Yaruras, who had composed a Grrammar and a Vocabulary of their language, the MS. of both of which he left at the Mission. Returned to Europe, he gave to Hervas MS, Notices concerning the Yarura language, which were after- wards also used by Adelung and V^ter for the Mithridates. Heetas, Origine, Tabb. XL VIII, L et seq. Heetas, Aritmetioa, pp. 105,- 106. - Heetas, Saggio, pp. 109, 110. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, p. 650 (from Heetas and Gilii). Balbi, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 646. C. S. Kaeinesque, Atlantic Journal, and Friend of Knowledge. Philadelphia 1832, 1833, 8to, p. 118. YUKAI YUMAS. 305 Ecprinted, pp. 349—351 of: Josiah Peiest, American Antiquities and Dis- coveries in tlie West. Third Edition, AlhoMy, printed by Hoffman and White, 1838, 8vo. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 635—640 (from Fobneei). A MS. Grammar of the Yarura Language was in the library of W. von Hum- boldt, and is now in the Eoyal Library at Berlin. YUKAI, Indians on Eussian River, in north- western California. WORDS AND VOCABDLAUIKS. G-EOEaE G-IBBS, Tocabulary : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. Ill, pp. 428—434. YULE. Indians of the Isthmus of Darien. WORDS AND VOCABULAEIKS. Vocabulary of the Language of the Yule Indians, inhabiting the rivers and the coast of Darien, from the mouth of the Atrato to the coast of San Bias, by Dr. Ebwaed Cttllen, pp. 241, 242 of Vol. XXI of : Journal of the Royal Geographical Society. London, John Murray, 1851, 8vo. YUMAS. Indians of the south-western part of California, on the Rio Colorado, down to its entrance in the Gulf of California. They are divided into five tribes, of which the Cuchans are the most important. The others are the Ma-ha-os, TIah-wal-coes, Yam- pai-o, and Co-co-pahs. The Gamoyes, or Puemaja, are a tribe of the Cuchans. WOEDS AND VOCABULARIES. Vocabulary of about 250 Words in the Yuma (rather Cuchan) Language, pp. 23—28 of lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Extract from a Journal of an Expedition from San Diego, California, to the Eio Colorado, from September 11th to Decem- ber 11th, 1849 (Congress. Dooum., 31 Congr., 2nd Sess., Senate Exec. Doc, No. 19, pp. 28). Eeprinted, pp. 118—121 of the : Physical Data respecting that part of Southern California lying on the line of boundary between San Diego and the mouth of the river Gila ; with incidental descriptions of the Diegunos and Yumas Indian Tribes ; pp. 99—121 of Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. IL 206 YUNGA — yUEACAKES. Keprinted as : Yuma Vocabulary, witli Notices of the Oomoyes dialect, taken from Pablo Coelum.ia Yuma chief, by Lieutenant A. W. WarpPLE, pp. 95—101 of: Report upon the Indian Tribes, added to Lieutenant Whipple's Eeport on the Route near the 35th Parallel (Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington, 1855, Vol. II, 4to). The United States Boundary Commissioner, John R. Babilett, has also taten a Vocabulary of the Yuma Language. YUNGA. Peruvian Indians of the departments Truxillo^ Zana, Piura, and Catamarca. The Yncas had forced them to leave their old abodes, and placed them in different villages; but they kept their language, which is totally different from the Quichua. In Mithridates, Vol. Ill, p. 548, the language is called Yunka- Mochika; by Hekvas, Mochika di Yuncas, Rivebo and TscHUDi call it a dialect of the Quichua. WORDS AND VOCABULAUIES. Hebtas, Saggio, p. 93, and (from him) Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 549—551. Hebvas, Origine, Tabb. L et seq. GEAMMAKS AND GEAMMATICAI, NOTICES. Febnando db ia Cabeeba (cura y vioario de S. Martin de Reque en el corre- gimiento de Chiclayo), Arte de la Lengua Yunga de I03 valles del obispado de Trujillo, con un coufessionario y todas las oraeiones cristianas y otras cosas. Lima, Juan de Contreras, 1644, 16mo. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, p. 551. (The aboTC Grammar was unknown to the authors of the Mithridates.) YURACAHES. Indians of Bolivia, on the eastern slope of the Andes, on the rivers Ibabo, Mamore, Aimore, and Seacri. The Tacana, Maropa, and Apolista are tribes related to them. WORDS AND VOCABTTLARIES. Vocabulary of Twenty-three Words, p. 164 of Vol. I of : A. D'Oebigny, L'Homme Am&icain. Dicoionario Yuracare, by P. la Cueva, 4to, in two parts : Espafiol-Yuracare, complete ; Yuracare-Espanol, incomplete. (MS. in possession of Alcide D'Orbiguy.) ZAMUCA ZAPOTECA. 207 GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. A. D'Oebignt, L'Homme AmericaiTi, Vol. I, p. 359, and p. 376 (Taoana tribe), p. 380 (Maropa tribe), p. 382 (Apolista tribe). ZAMUCA, SAMUOA. Indians of tte South American province Chiquitos. The three dialects of their language are the Zamitca, Caipotorade, and Morotoco. WORDS AND VOCABULARIES. Hebtas, Voeabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq., 223 (Zarnuca Chiquita). Hebtas, Saggio, pp. 101, 102, 229, 230. Heetas, Aritmetica, p. 97. Heetas, Origine, pp. 37, 41, 45, Tabb. XLIX, L et seq. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 554—570 (from Heetas). Balbi, Atlas Etlmographique, Tab. XLI, No. 462. VooabulaTy of Twenty-three Samuca Words, Vol. I, pp. 163, 164 j Vol. II, p. 136 (Xamuoa), of: A. D'Oebigny, Xj'Homine Amerioain. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 553—557. A. D'Oebiont, L'Homme Amt'rioain, Vol. II, p. 147. ZAPAEI. Indians of Upper Peru and Equador^ between the rivers Mara- iion, Pastazaj and Napo. WORDS AND TOCABULARIES. BrcTi cenni suU' idioma Zaparo, oorredati d'un saggio di diooionario, di alguni dialogi piii neoessarii pel viaggiatore, pp. 281 — 297 of: G-aetano Osctjlati, Explorazione dalle regioni equatoriali lungo il Napo, etc. Milano, Bernardoni, 1850, 8to. ZAPOTECA. Indian language of Oajaca, Mexico. 208 ZEONA. WORDS AND VOOABrLARIKS. Jttan de Coebota, Voeabulario de la Lengua Capoteca. Mexico, 1578, 4to. Tocabulario de la Lengua Zapoteca, 6 Diccionario Hispauo-Zapoteco. Mexico , 1571, 4to. Voeabulario de la Lengua Zapoteea, by Bishop Pedeo 1?eeia. Feria was born 1524, went to Mexico, joined the Dominicans, became a missionary amongst the Zapotecas, and, after filling many posts of dignity in the Church, was made Bishop of Chiapas, in 1575. Died about the year 1586. He wrote besides : Confessionario en la Lengua Zapoteca ; and : Doo- trina Christiana en la misma Lengua. Diccionario de la Lengua Zapoteca. Also : Los Evangelios Quadragesimales en Lengua Zapoteca, by Fray Chkistobal Agueko. Fray Christobal Aguero was born in 1600, in San Luis de la Paz, in Michoacan, became a Dominican monk in Oaxaca, in 1618, and, according to De Souza, was so perfect in the language of the Zapotecas, that he taught it publicly to Ms ecclesiastical brothers. He gaTe his Diccionario to the Bishop of Mon- terroso for publication ; the translation of the Evangelists remained in the Convent of Antequera. He wrote also : Miseellaneo Espiritual en idioma Zapoteca, which was published in 4to, in the city of Mexico, by Bernardo Calderon, 1666. C. S. Kabiuesque, Atlantic Journal, and Friend of Knowledge. Philadelphia, 1832, 1833, 8vo, p. 52. Ifouvelles Annales des Voyages, Vol. IV. Paris, 1841, 8vo ; pp. 260 — 286. The MS. Vocabulary of Cheistobal Aqueeo is also mentioned by Clavigero. GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES. J. DE CoEDOTA, Arte de la Lengua Capoteca. Mexico, 1564, 12mo. (De Souza gives the date of 1578.) Ai'te de la Gram&tica de la Lengua Zapoteca, conforme al que de la Q-ramitiea Latina esoiibio Antonio de Nebrija, por Fr. Pedeo Cueva. Megico, 1607, 8vo. Arte de la Lengua Zapoteca, por Fr. Antottio Pozo. MS. (According to De Souza, Pozo died in the Convent of Santa Ana Zecahe, in the year 1623. His MS. was preserved in Tentitlan, Valley of Oaxaca. Tratado curioso de los raices y formaoion de los Verbos de la Lengua Zapoteca, por Fr. Geeonimo Moeeno. Moreno was a native of Andalusia, went to America in 1597, was a mis- sionary in Oaxaca, and died, in 1631, in the Convent of San Domingo of Antequera. ZEONA. Language of the inliabitants of the north-westerly corner of ZOQUE. 209 tlie empire of Brazil, province of Para, on the left bank of the Amazon, between the rivers Putumajo and Caqueta. It may- be a dialect of the Omagua, and, like that language, related to the "Lingoa geral" of Brazil. WORDS AND TOCABULiEIES. Dieoionario y Doctrina en Lengua Zeona. MS. of pp. 416, in 12mo, in the possession of Colonel Joaquin Aoosta of Nueva Granada. The Appendix con- tains a List of Words of the "Lengua general del Brasil." ZOQUE. Indian language of Chiapas, Mexico. GRAMMAES AND OEAMMATICAL HOTICES. Fr. DE Cepeda, Arte de las Lenguas Chiapa, Zoque, Celdales, y Cinacanteca. Mexico, 1560, 4to. E E ADDENDA. {The Contributions furnished ly Professor Wm. W. Ttieneb, of Washington, are enclosed in brackets, thus [ ], and bear the initials W. W. T.) ABENAKI. [The Comparative Vocabulary appended to Edwards's Mohegan Gramm4i' was compiled, not by "Professor P. Sat," but by Dr. John PiCKEEiNa, from various sources, the Winnebago alone having been taken from Say, Of the Abenaki two Vocabularies are given, one from Father Easle's MS, Dictionary, and the othef (St. Francis Indians) from Eev. Messrs. Holmes and Noyes. The numerals, from Father Easle's MS. Dictionary, are printed in Collections of Massachusetts Historical Society, Vol. X, first series. Boston, 1809, pp. 187, 138.— W.W.T.] ABIPONES. ' Alonzo be Babcena, Arte y Vocabulario de la Lengua delos Indios Abipones y Quiraioguis. Printed, according to Lo9ano, Descripcion Chorographica del gran Chaco ; and Barcia, in his edition of Leon Pinelo. [A. F. Pott, Die quiuare und vigesimale Zahhnethode bei Volkern aller Welttheile. HalU, 1847, 8to. On the numerals, pp. 4— 7.— W. W. T.] ALGONKIN. [A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale ZShlmethode. On the numerals, pp. 64—66 ; on the pronouns, p. 109, note.—'W. W. T.] ALLENTIAC. Grrammatica y Vocabulario en las Lenguas Allentiac y Milcocayac, por Tosbaxta. Cima, 1608, 8vo. APACHliS ATNAS. 211 APACHES. [For Vocabulary of the Jicarilla Apaches, see " Tioorillas," p. 186 — W. W. T.] APPIACAS (Brazilian Indians). Vocabulary of 113 words on page 315 of: Memoria aobre os usos, Costumes e Linguagem dos Appiacas ; e descobrimento de Novas Minas na provincia de Mato Grrosso. Pelo Conego Jose da Silva Gruimarez, natural de Cuiaba. Pp. 29!? — 317 of: Kevista Trimensal do Instituto do Bio de Janeiro, Tonio VI. Mo de Janeiro, 1844, 8vo. ARAUCAKS. p. Gabriel be la Vega, Arte, Grraroatica, '\'ocabulario i retas a la Lengua de Cliile. Mentioned in Barcia's edition of Piiielo, but not known to be printed. AREAPAHOES. [There is no eyidence that Dr. Latham "collated" Mackenzie's Vocabulary. In "Varieties of Man," p. 344, he only copies Prichard (Vol. V, p. 414) in calling the tribe Ahnenin ; whereas G-aHatin (American Ethnological Society's Transac- tions, Vol. II, cvi) calls it Atsina. Which is right ? Eeise des Prinzen Maximilian zu Wied, Vol. II, pp. 499, 500, — W, W. T,] AURAWAKS. [A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesitnale ZaUmethode. On the numerals, p. 11.-W. W. T.] ATHAPASCANS. [BtrscHM Ann's Athapaskischer Spraehstamm contains also an exhibition of the pronominal prefixes, pp. 168— 170.— W. W. T.] Ueber die VoUter und Sprachen Neu- Mexico's und der Westseite des Britischen Nord Amerika's. Mit einer systematischen Worttafel des Athapaskischen Sprach- stammes. (Paper by J. C. E. Busclimann, read before the Berlin Academy, January 22, 1857.) ATNAS. [Reference is erroneously omitted to the larger Vocabulary in Bab und Helmebsen (97 words, by Von Wrangell), in the Table to p. 259.— W. W. T.] 212 ATNAHS — BODEGA- ATNAHS, OR Chin Indians. [The tenu "Kinn," retained from Jiilg, is simply a German translation of the English word ehiti. These people are called by Mackenzie "Chin Indians," apparently on account of the projecfcioB. of the lower part of the face, caused by flattening the forehead. H. HiLE, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedi- tion, Tocab. B. pp. 570—629. (Words.) H. Haie, Ethnography, etc., p. 536. (Grammar.) —W. W. T.] Nmnerals 1 to 10 in " Tableau comparatif des Ifoms de Nombre," Vol. II, p. 401, of : DvTLOT DE MoPEAS, Exploration duTerritoire de I'Oregon des Califomies et de la Mer vermeiHe, executee pendant lea annees 1840-42, 2 toIs. Faris, 1844, 8to. ATMAEA. DiEQO DE Q-TJAIDO, Arte de la Lsngua Aymara, con una silya de sus frases i su declaraoion. Chicuim, 1612, Sto. (Printed, according to Barcia-Pindo.) [A. E. Pott, Die quinare und rigesimale Zahhnethode. On the numerals, pp. 73, 74.— W.W. T,] BATEMDAKAIEE. (The \Batemdai:aiee, Choweshah, Eidcmapo, and YiiJcai of Gibbs are identical with the " SevernovsJda^^ or Choacha^nayu^ of the Kussians, as appears from a com- parison of the Vocabularies. These are all but diiferent names for the same tribe, or of subdivisions of the same tribe. — W. W. T.] BLACKEEET. [A. E. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahhnethode. On the numerals, p. 68. — W. W. T.] Blackfoot Vocabulary, pp. 348 — 352 of : Die Indianer Nord Amerika's und die wahrend ernes achtjahrigen Aufenthalts uuter den wildesten ihrer Stamme erlebten Abentheuer \md Schicksale, von G. Catlin. Nach der fiinften englischen Ausgabe deutseh herausgegeben TOn Dr. Heinrich Berghaus. Mit 24 vom Verfasser nach der Natm- entworfenen Gemalden. Zweite Ausgabe. Briissel, Muquardt, 1851, 870, pp. 382. BODEGA. [The Sodegan, or Olamentke Indians of the Russians (p. 20) are the same as the Tcliokogem of Gibbs (p. 184] and the Sam. Eafael Indians of Hale. The Talatm lillAZILTAN. 213 of Hale (p. 180) and the Tuohmne tribes of Jolmson (see "Californians," p. 27) are allied to them, at least in language. H. Hale, Ethnography and PhUology of the United States Exploring Expe- dition. San Raphael Vocab. No. 15, pp. 570—629. — W. W. T.] BRAZILIAN. Dictionarium Linguee BrasiUese, auctore Emm. Veiga, Lusitan. Cmn Gram- matica et Catecliismo. 4to. (Communicated by L. Leon de Eosny.) Memoria sobre a neeessidades do Estudo e Ensino das Linguas indigenas do BrasU, por Francisco Adolfo de Vamhagen. Pp. 53 — 63 of: Revista Trimensal do Rio de Janeiro, Tomo III, 1841, 8to. [A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahhnethode. On the numerals, pp. 3, 4, 7—10, 73 ; on names of the fingers, pp. 302 - 304.— W. W. T.] Dicoiouario da Lingua geral dos Indies do BrasU, reimpresso e augmentado com dirersoB rocabularioa, e offerecido a Sua Magestade Imperial por Joao Joaquim da Silva Guimaraes, Natural da Bahia. BaMa, Typ. de CamiUo de LelUs Masaon & Ca., Rua de Santa Barbara, n. 2, 1854, 8vo, pp. vi, 60, ii, 36. The contents of this volume are : Diccionario anonymo da Lingua de Na9ao Guarani, pp. 1 - 60. Addenda, pp. i, ii. Vocabnlario da Lingua principal dos Indies do Para, do qual usao diiferentes tribus da mesma provincia, pp. 1 — 7. Tocabulario da !N"a9ao Botocuda, pp. 8—12. Vocabularib da Na9a6 Camacam CiTihsada, pp. 12 — 14. Vocabulario da Na9ao Camacam Mongoyos, pp. 14 — 16. Vocabulario da Na9ao Maconi, pp. 16 — 18. Vocabulario da Na^ao Malali, pp. 18 — 20. Tocabulario da Na9ao Patach6, pp. 20, 21. Vocabulario da Ifa9ao Tupinambi, pp. 22. 23. Vocabulario da Na^ao dos Tamoyos, p. 23. Vocabulario da Na9ao Tupiniquins, p. 23. Vocabulario da Tribu Jupur6ca, pp. 24, 25. Vocabulario da Tribu Quat6, p. 25. Vocabulario da Tribu Machakalis, pp. 26, 27. Vocabulario da Tribu Mandacaru', p. 27. Vocabulario da Tribu Mucury, p. 28. Vocabularies de differentes Tribus, p. 29. Itapueuru', Puris, Macamecrom, Tabayara, Molopaque, Timbira, Nheengaibas, Xumanas. 214 CAHITA CALirOKNIAN LANGUAGES. Vocabulario dos Indies das Aldeas de S. Pedro e Almeida, pp. 30, 31. Dialeetos de Sao Pedro, pp. 31, 32. Dialectos de Almeida, p. 33. Notas para esclarecimentos, pp. 34, 35. Index, p. 36. On page 34 the following cmious note occurs : " Os idiomae das tribus Banebas, c Uruquenas tem alguns nomes Hebreos, como por exemplo — Joa — Jacob — Jacobi — Tom^ — Tomequi— JBavidu — Joanau — Marian^i. O que indica que os seus poTOS iia antiguidade tiverao commumca9Sio com os Hebreos." — Credat Judaeus ! CAHITA [Manual para admiuistrar ti los ludios del idioma Cahita los santos Sacrameutos. .... Compuesto por un Sacerdote de la Compania de Jests, Missionero en las de la ProTuicia de Zynaloa. Mexico, 1741, 16mo, pp. 168. (A portion is in Spanish and Cahita, very useful for studying the construction of the language.) — W. W. T.] Die Lautveranderung aztekischer Worter in den souorischeu Sprachen und die sonorische Endimg A M E dargestellt yon JoH. Cael Ed. Buschmann. Aus den Abhandlungen der Konigl. Atademie der Wissenschaflen zu Berlin, aus dem Jahre 1856. Serlin, 1857, 4to, pp. 118. CAIRNOS. Eeanc. de ia Puente, Catechismo de la Doctrina Christiana en el Idioma de los Indies Caimos. Publ. por el Pr. Mateo Anguiano, Capuch., 1703, 4to. Mentioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo. CALIFORNIAN LANGUAGES. PhUologie; Diversite des Langues (in California and Oregon). Chap. XIII, pp. 386—402 of: DtJELOT de Mopeas, Exploration du Territoire de I'Or^gon, des Califomies et de la Mer yermeiUe. Paris, Bertrand, 1844. M. DE MoERAS gives, on pp. 391 — 396 of Yol. II, translations of the Lord's Prayer in the following languages,, viz. : Gmluco, Mission S. Francisco Solano ; Choconyen, Bay del Sacramento ; JonMousm^, Mission S. Kafael ; Tallee de Tulares ; Mission S. Clara ; Tatch^ or Telami, Mission S. Antonio de Padua ; Mission S. Ines ; Mission S. Fernando ; Mission S. Julien ; Mission S. Juan Capistrano ; Mission S. Luys K«y de Francia; Mission S. Diego ; Mission S. Francisco de Borgia ; Mission S. Gertrudis ; Mission S. Ignaoio de Loyola. ^'umel•als 1 — 10 (Missions del Carmelo, La Soledad, San Luiz, Sau Jiiau, Pima, San Grabiiel, Indiens Aztcques), in the Tableau comparatif des !Noms de CAMACANS CHEPEWYAN. 215 ' Nombre. Vol. II, p. 401, of: Duplot de Mopras, Exploration du Territoire de 1' Oregon des Californies et de la Mer vermeille, executee pendant les annees 1840-42. 2 Tols. Parli, 8vo. CAMACANS. [A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zjihlmethode. On the numerals, p. 72. — W. W. T.] CANADA. The correct title of Ledesme's work is : Doctrine Chrestienne dvi P. Ledesma, de la Comp. de Jesus ; traduite en langue Canadienue par un Pere de la merae Compagnie (le Pfere Breboeuf). Souen, Richard, 1630, pp. 28, 8vo. Keprinted in Chaplain's Voyage in 1632. [The numerals 1 — 10 are given in Kudiqer, Grundriss einer G-eschichte der menschlichen Sprache. Thl. I, p. 123 (Leipzig, 1782) ; and in A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahbnethode, p. 65. — W. W. T.] CARIES. [The numerals of Essequibo (from Van Heuvel) are given by M. Gj-allatin, in Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. I, Table to p. 114. A. P. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp. 69-71.— W.W.T.] CAYUBABAS. [A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the mmierals, p. 74.— W. W. T.] CHEPEWYAN. [The first two sentences of what is said under this head apply, not to the Chepemyam, but to the Chippewm/s. The former, so far from being a courtly language, is one of the rudest and most uncouth that is spoken on the continent. The blunder was probably introduced by Julg (see Carver, Chap. XVII), as Vater well knew the difference between the two languages (Mithridates, Vol. Ill, parts, p. 419). The last sentence also is not quite correct. It was not a " theory" of Q-aUatin's that the Chepewyan belongs to the Athapascan family of languages. He gave the name of Atha/pascas to the tribes who speak the class of languages at the head of which stands the Chepewyan, from Athapasca Lake, which stands in the middle of their territory (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II, p. 17). 316 CHEHALIS — CHJAPANECAS. I would therefore propose to substitute the following heading : — "The Chepewyaus belong to the stock to which M. GaUatiu has given the common namo of Afhwpascwns. They call themselves Sah-issah-dinne (Kising- sun People), and extend from Hudson's Bay on the east, between the Eskimos on the north and the Algonkins on the south, to I/ake Athapaaca on the west." — W. W. T.] CHEHALIS, SELISH. Vocabulary of, in : The North-west Coast ; or. Three Years at Shoal- Water Bay. Containing Personal Adventures, a Description of the Coast from Columbia, Eiver to the Straits of Fuca, and an Account of Indian Customs, Superstitions, Music, etc., and of the Vocabularies of the ChehaUs and Chinook Languages, and of the " Jargon" of the North-west. With a genersd Description of Washington Ter- ritory, and Advice to Emigrants. Map and lEustrations, 12mo. New York, 1857. CHEROKEE. \Tsa-la-gi Tm-le-M-sa-u-hi, Cherokee Phoenix. Edited by Elias Boudlnot. Printed weekly by Isaac H. Harris, for the Cherokee Nation. New Schota, Vol. I, No. 1, Feb. 21, 1828, to Vol. V, No. 52, May 31, 1834 ; foUo. (Stopped then, to collect funds ; perhaps not resumed.) Besides a great number of public documents, passages from Scripture, hymns, and other pieces in the Cherokee language and character, it contains the following : — ■ On the Cherokee Alphabet, Vol. I, No. 1. On the Cherokee Numerals, Vol. I, No. 2. Questions on the Language, by C. S. Eafiuesqus, Vol. I, No. 22. Answers to Prof. Kafinesque's Questions, by W. [Rev. S. A. Worcester], Vol. I, Nos. 23, 25, 27. Long Words. By the same. Vol. II, No. 1. Inflections of Cherokee verbs : tsi-ne-ga, I speak, by Gawolihoski, Vol. II, Nos. 33, 34, 35 ; ga-lu-i-ha, I am tying, by the Eev. S. A. Worcester, Vol. II, Nos. 37, 41. Cherokee Advocate. Pubhshed [weekly] at Tahlequah, Cherokee Nation. Vol. I, No. 1, Sept. 26, 1844, to Vol. IX, No, 22, Deo. 28, 1853 j foUo. The first editor was W. P. Eoss. (The publication may have continued longer, but No. 22 of Vol. IX is the last of the copy in Mr. Peter Force's hbrary, Washington.) This newspaper, like the preceding, contains a great many papers in the Cherokee language, which would be extremely valuable to the student of the language.— W. W. T.] CHIAPANECAS. Fk. Dominqo de Lava, Obispo, Vocabulario de la Lengua de Chiapa. Men- tioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not known to be printed. CHINUK CHIPPEWAY. 217 OHINUK. Numerals 1—10 in the Tableau eomparatif des Noms de Nombre. Vol. 11, p. 101, of: DuPLOT DE MoPRis, Exploration du Ten-itoii-e de 1' Oregon, des Califomies et de la Mer vermeiUe, ex^cutee pendant les anuees 1840-42. Paris, 1844, 2 vols., 8vo. [Lieut. G-. P. Emmons gives a brief Klatsop Vocabulary in: Schoolcraft's Hist., etc., of Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. Ill, pp. 223, 224. The foUdwing items are to be added to those on the " Jargon," which should have been put by themselres : — Vocabulary of the Jargon or Trade Language of Oregon [Enghsh-Erench Jargon]. Washington, 1853, 8to, pp. 22. '(Printed by the Smithsonian Institution for private distribution.) A Complete. Dictionary of the Chinook- Jargon [English- Chinook and Chinook- English] ; to which is added numerous Conversations, thereby enabling any person to speak the Chinook correctly. 3rd edit. Porlland, 0. T., pubhshed by S. J. McCoi-mick, 1856, 24mo, pp. 24. -W. W. T.] A Vocabulary of, ia : The North-west Coast ; or, Three Years at Shoal-Water Bay. Containing Personal Adventures, a description of the Coast from Columbia Eiver to the Straits of Puoa, and an account of Indian Customs, Superstitions, Music, etc., and of the Vocabularies of the ChehaHs and Chinook Languages, and of the " Jargon" of the North-west. "With a general Description of Washington Territory, and Advice to Emigrants. Map and Illustrations, 12mo. New Yorlc, 1857. CHIPPEWAY. ■[Evans, James, The Speller and Interpreter in Indian and EnghBh,for the use of the Mission Schools. In the Odjibwa tongue. . New York, 1831, 12mo. H. E. SCHOOIOEAET, Summary Narrative of an Exploratoiy Expedition to the Sources of the Mississippi Eiver in 1820 ; resumed and completed by the Discovery of its Origin in Itasca Lake, in 1832, etc. PliiladelpMa, Lippincott, G-rambo, and Co., 1855, 8vo, pp. 596. This work contains " Examination of the Elementary Structure of the Algonquin Language, as it appears in the Chippeway Tongue," pp. 442—447 ; and also the four Lectures previously published in the " Expedition to Itasca Lake" and "Oneota," pp. 453— 515. The Eev. G-. A. BEtcotfET has composed an elaborate " Dictionnaire Fran9ais- Sauteux," which vrill probably be pubhshed by the Smithsonian Institution. — W. W. T.] A Vflcabulary of Chippeway Words, in H. W. Lonq-eellow's Song of Hiawatha. Boston, 1855, 8vo. r p 218 CHIRIGUANA COMANCHE. CHIRIGUANA (GUARANI). p. DiE&o Samaniego, Vocabulario de la Lengua Chiriguana. Mentioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not known to be printed. OHOOHA. Dramas allegoricoa en Lengua Chocba, by the Fray Maetin Aceteeedo, natire of San Ildefonso, in the province of Oaxaca, Mexico. He left his MSS. in the con- vent of Oaxaca (De Souza). CHOCTAW. [There are some remarks on the language by James Hattshton, in the Massachusetts Historical Collection, Vol. IX, first series, pp. 95 — 97. The Rev. Cteus BYlNaioir wrote, many years ago, a Gtrammar of the Choctaw Language, which he is now engaged in revising for pubhcation. — W. W. T.] COCAMAS. (? SOUTH AMERICA— aUAN CHACO.) P. Raymundo "BE S*^' Cbtjz, Vocabulario de la Lengua de los Indios Cocamas. Mentioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not known to be printed. COCHIMI. [P. S. Clatigeeo, Storia della California. Venizia, 1789, 2 vols., 8vo. Gram- matical Notices, Vol. I, pp. 110, 264.— W. W. T.] COCO-MARICOPAS. [That this might be an Apache people was a conjecture of M. GWlatin's, from their word for " man" (Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II, p. xcii) ; but now that we have Apache vocabularies, the Coeo-Maricopa language is seen to belong to an entirely different stock. — W. W. T.] COMANCHE. Names of Comanche Chiefs and Numerals (1 — 20), pp. 273, 274 of "Wm. BoIiLAEET'S Observations on the Indian. Tribes in Texas," in Vol. II of: The Journal of the London Ethnological Society. London, 1850, 8vo. COBA DAKOTA. 319 COEA. [A. P. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp. 89, 90. -W. W. T.] Die Lautveriinderiing aztekisclier Worter in den sonorisclieu Sprachen mid die sonorische Endung A M E dargestellt von JoH. Cael Ed. BusoHltAUir. Aus den Abhandlungeu der Konigl. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin aua dem Jahre 1856. Berlin, 1857, 4to, pp. 118. CREOLE, NEGEO-ENGLISH. [B. SouTHEY gires a sketch of the language in an article on the Negro-Enghsh New Testament : Quarterly Keview, Vol. XLIII. London, 1830, pp. 553 — 564. — W. "W. T.] CUMANAS. The correct title of Yangues' work is : Principios y Beglas de la Lengua Cum- maaagota general en varias naciones que habitan en la proTincia de Cummana en las Indias Occidentales, con un Diccionario. By Man. de Yangues. Bwgos, 1683, 4to. CUNACUNA. [A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. Nimierals 1 — 10, from Baibi, p. 72.— W. W. T.] DAKOTA. [P. Dtj Ponceatj, Comparative Table of the Sioux or Nadowessie Stock, com- prehending the Winnebago. In Note 16 to Edwards's Mohegan Grammar. (Mass. Hist. Collections, Yol. X, second series, p. 151.) H. C, Gabelentz, Grammatik der Dakota Sprache. Leipzig, 1852, 8vo, pp. 64. P. Httitpaiti, a Dakota nyelv. Kiilon lenyomat a m. acad. ertesitiibol. (The Dakota Language, extracted from the Bulletins of the Hungarian Academy.) Pesth, 1856, 8vo, pp. 55. Dakota Tamaxifkn Kin, or The Dakota Eriend, published [monthly] by the Dakota Mission. G. H. Pond, editor. St. Paul, Minnesota. Vol. I, Nos. 1— 12, Nov. 1850 to Oct. 1851, 4to. Yol. II, Nos. 1—8, Jan. 1852 to Aug. 1852, fol. (The publication was suspended at this point, on account of Indian troubles.) The Dakota Friend contains many articles in the Dakota language, besides specimens of the language in short sentences, with interlinear English transla- tions, etc. A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesiinale Zahlmethode. On the niunerals, pp. 67, 68.— W. W. T.] 220 DAllIEN ESKIMOS. DARIEN. A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmetliode. On the numerals, p. 72. — W. W. T.] DELAWARE. Ad Lossbiel, p. 64 The German original was published at Ba/rby,.V7SQ, 8vo. • Delaware and Iroquois words, pp. 29, 30. Six Delaware words, on page 125 of " General Parsons' DiscoTeries made in the Western Country." Article XI (pp. 119—127) of: Memoirs of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Tol. II, Part 1. Sosion, 1793, 4to. DIEGENOS. [This name means the Indians of San Diego, so that there is no such name as Begiiinos. Their language belongs to what I hare termed the Tuma tongue, dialects of which are spoken by yarious tribes on the Rio Colorado and Gila, e. g., the Mohave, Cuchan, and Ooco-Maricopa. AH the vocabularies, (except the Diego itself) here enumerated by Dr. Ludewig belong to different other stocks. Dr. Buschmann's paper on the Kizh and Ifetela has been published separately under the following title : Die Sprachen Kizh und Xetela von Neu Cahfomien, dargestellt von Job. Carl Ed. Buschmann (aua den Abhandl. d. Konigl. Akad. d. Wissenschaften zu Berhn, 1855). Berlin, 1856, pp. 31, 4to.— W. W.- T.] ESKELEN. [A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numei-als, pp. 63, 64.— W. W. T.] ESKIMOS. Schediasma hocce etymologico-philologicum prodromumAmericano Gronlaudicum in patronis appropriatum insinnat Twams Abel. Savnice, 1783, 4to. Vocabulary of the Enghsh, Danish, and Esquimaux Languages. Pp. 61 — 89 of : Appendix to the Narrative of a Second Voyage in Search of a North- West Passage, a,iid of a Residence in the Arctic Regions during the Years 1829, 1830, 1831, 1832, 1833. By Sir John Ross, C.B., K.S.A., K.C.S., etc., Captain in the Royal Navy. Including the Reports of Commander, now Captain, James Clark Ross, R.N., E.R.S., E.L.S., etc. ; and the Discovery of the Northern Magnetic Pole. London, Webster, 1835, 4to, pp. xii, 120, cxhv, eii. 20 plates. Dialogues in the Enghsh, Danish, and Esquimaux Languages. Pp. 91 — 104 of: Appendix to the Narrative of a Second Voyage in Search of a North- West Passage, ETCHEMINS GORGOTOQUIENSES. 221 and of a Residence in the Avetic Regions dui-iiig the Years 1829, 1830, 1831, 1832, 1833. By Sii- John Ross, C.B., K.S.A., K.C.H., etc., Captain in the Royal Navy! Including the Reports of Commander, now Captain, James Clai-k Ross, R.N., F.II.S., P.L.S., etc. ; and the Discovery of the Northern Magnetic Pole. Zoftdon, Webster, 1835, 4.to, ]5p. xii, 120, cxKt, cii. 20 plates. Remarks on the Eskimo Language, in the article " Eskimo," by HiissLEE, Ersch und Gruber's Encyelopffidie, 1 Sect., Baud 38, pp. 108 — 132. Verzeichniss der in Labrador beflndhchen Laudsaugethiere, Wasservogel, etc., in : Miinchner Q-elehrte Anzeigen, 1844, Nos. 52, 53 (with the names in the Eskimo [A. P. Pott, Die quinare und Tigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp. 2, 3.-W. W. T.] Greenland Numerals (I— 10, 16—30), pp. 208, 209, of P. C. Southemand, on the Esquimaux, in Vol. IV of the Journal of the London Ethnological Society. London, 1854, 8vo. " Die Sprache der Eskimos auf Grronland," article by W. Schott, in : Magazin fill- die Literatur des Auslands. Berlin, 1856, Nbs. 38, 39. ETCHEMINS. [Feed. Kidbee^ Vocabulary of the Openango or Passamaquoddy Language, in : Schoolcraft's History, Condition, etc., of Indian Tribes, Vol. V, p. 690.— W. W. T.] ELATHEADS. . [J. HowBE, Vocabularies of certain North American Languages, m : Proceedings of PMlological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1850, pp. 199— 206.— W. W. T.] EOX ISLANDS. [Here, too, should be inserted the title of Sauer's work (see under " Aleutans," p. 4), as Billings's vocabulary was taken in Sithanak, and corrected in TJnalashka, both of which belong to the Fox Islands.— W. "W. T.] GE, GEIKO. [A. P. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, p. 73. -W, W. T.] GOEUOTOQUIENSES. p. Gaspab Ruiz, Aleman, G-ramatica de la Lengua Gorgotoquiense en el Peru. Mentioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not known to be printed. / 322 GUARANI HUASTECA. GUAEANI. p. Ant. Kuiz de Montota, L'Arte, Bocabulario, Catecismo y Tesoro de la Lengua Guarani de la PrOTincia del Paraguay y Bio de la Plata. Madrid, 1639. [A. F. Pott, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp. 6, 7, 60, 61, 301 ; on the pronouns, p. 109, note.—'W. W. T.] GUARAPUAVA. A district in Brazil^ inhabited by the Games, Votoroes, Dorins, and Xocrens. The idiom used by these Indians is probably Gnaraiii. Words and Grammatical Notices, pp. 53, 54 of : Memoria sobre o Descobrimento e Colonia de GruarapuaTa. Escripta pelo Padre Fbanoisco DOS CHAdAS Lima. Pp. 43 — 64 of : Eevista Trimeusal, etc., Tomo IV. Sio de Janeiro, 1842. GUATUSOS. " Les Indiens Guatusos du Nicaragua, par E. G-. Sqfeek," in : Athenseum Erau- . Pedeo Bspinaebda. Written about the year 1565, and mentioned by De Souza as liaring existed in the arcliives of the Convent of the Yilla del Nombre de Dioa. ZAMUOA. [A. F. Pott, Die qninare und rigesimale Zahhnethode. On the numerals, p. 74. — W. W. T.] ZAPOTECA, ZACAPULA. Feeia's Vocabulary is also mentioned by Bareia-Pinelo, and Pozo's Grrammar by ClaTigero. Barcia-Pinelo mentions moreoTer that Fr. Saitadoe db S. Cipeiaito, Domini- cano, wrote " De los Indios de la Provinoia de Zacapula, en la Lengua de ella." INDEX. Abbitibbe (Knistenaux) , 04. Atenaki, or Wapanaohki, 1, 210. Abipones, 2, 21 0. Acadians, oir Soiiric^uois, 177. Acagchemera (Diegenos), 62. Accaway, 2, 79. Achaguas, 3. Achastlians fRumsen), 163. Acherekotti (Tamanaque), 180. Acherigotes (Caribs), 28. Acoma, or Keres (Pueblo Indians), 92. Adaize, 3. Aglegmutes, Agolegmiitea, 3. Agoneaseab (Iroquois), 87. Agua (Omagua), 137. Ahnahaways, Ahwahaways (Crovs) ,58. Ahnenin (Arrapahoe), 12. Ah-wash-tes (Costanos), 53. Aimbores, or Engerekmung, 67. Airiko (Betoi), 18. Alasapas (Texas Indians), 186. Alasar (MinetaresJ, 119. Aleutans, 4. Algonquin, 5, 210. Allakaweah (Crows), 58. AUentiac, Guarpes, Milcooayac, 7, 210. Almeida (Brazilian), 214. Al-tah-mos (Costanos), 63. Ameriscoggins (Abenaki), 1. Amores, or Engerekmung, 67. Andaquies, 7. Antis, 8. Ao-ges (Gre), 75. Apaohes, 8, 211. Apaches de Nabojoa (Navajos), 132. Apiaoas, 8, 211. Apinages, 8. Apolista (Yuracare), 206. Araucans, 9, 211. Arda, 12. Arecuma (Guyana), 79. Aricaras, or Riccarees, 163. Aripe (Waikur), 198. Ark (Sitka), 176. Arrapahoes, 12, 211. Aroaquis (Oregones), 189. Arrawaks, Arrowaks, 13, 211. Assineboins, or Stone Indians, 177. Assinibules, or Stone Indians, 177. Assinipoils, or Stone Indians, 177. Atalalas (Vilela), 196, Athapasoa, 14, 211. Atna, 14, 211. Atnah, Chin, or Kinn Indians, 15, 212. Atnah (Flathead), 72. Atorays (Guyana), 79. Atsina (Arrapahoes), 12. Attakapas, 15. Attikameg (Knistenaux), 94. Ature, 16 ; (Saliva), 166. Auca, or Araucans, 9. Avanes (Maipures), 104. Avarigotes (Caribs), 28, ISO. Aymara, 16, 212. Aymores, or Engerekmung, 67. Ayrate (Cherokee), 37. Aztek, or Mexican, 111. B Bakra (Creole), 64. Baniba, Baniwa, 17, 214. Barre, 17. Batem-da-kai-ee, 17, 212. Baure (Moxa), 126. Bayano, 18. Beaver Indians, 18. Bethuck, 18. Betoi, 18, Bigbellies (Minetares), 119. Billechoola (Haeeltzuk), 80 ; (Naass In- dians), 130. Blackfeet, 19, 212. Blackshoes (Crows), 58. Blanoos (Costa Kica), 54. Blood Indians, or Kahna (Blackfeet), 19. Bodega, 20, 212. Borrados (Texas Indians), 186. Botocudos, or Engerekmung, 67, 213. Boutomora3^(Botooudos), 67. Brazilians, or Tupis, 20, 213. Bugre, 25. 248 INDEX. CabaroB, 26. Caddoes, 25. Cadodaquious, or Caddoes, 28. Cahita, 26, 2U. Cahailloa, 26. Caipotorade (Zamuca), 307. Cairnos, 214. Californians, 26, 214. Callilehet (Tehuelhet), 184. Camacans, 27, 213, 215. Camoyes (Yuma), 205. Canada, 27, 215. Canacata-ges (Ges), 75. Caniba (Quiohua), 162. - Ganishana, 28. Carajas, S8. Caribs, 28, 315. Caribi-Tamanaean (Guyana), 79. Caribisi (Guyana), 79. Cariri, or Sabuja, 164. Carriers, or Taoullies, 178. Casarnee (Haidah), 80. Cattt-vfba, 32. Cathlascons, 32. Cavalleros (Guaylturu), 78. Caveres (Maipures), 104. Ca-wi-os, or Cahuillos, 26. Cayapos, 32. Cayowas (Guarani), 76. Cayubabas, 33, 215. Cayuga, 83. Cayuse (Wailatpu), 199. Celdales, or Tzendales, 198. Ceris, 34. Cerros (Mainas), 108. Chaoahuaxti (Totonaka)j 190. Chahtah, or Choctaw, 46. Chamers (Osages), 139. Chanos (Vnta), 198. Chapaoura, 34. Chapopines (Texas Indians), 188. Cbarcas (Aymara), 16. Charruas (Puelches), 155. Chavantes, or Cherentes, 36. Chayma, 84. Cheealish, Cbehalish, or Selish, 72, 216. Cbechehet (Puelches), 155. Chemehuevi, 35. Chepewyan, 35, 315. Cherentes, 36. Cherohakah, or Nottoways, 135. Cherokee, 37, 216. Chetimachas, 38. Cheyennes, or Shyennes, 176. Chiapanecas, 30, 216. Chibcba, or Muysoa, 128. Chicachas, or Chickasaw, 39. Chichimecs (Mexicans), 111. • Chickailis, or Tsihailish (Flatheads), 73. Chickasaw, 89. Chikkasas, or Chicachas, 89. Chilake, or Cherokee, 87. ChUcart (Sitka), 176. Chilicothe (Shawanoes),il72. Chilidugu, or Araucans, 9. ChUts, or Tsihailish (Flathead), 7a. Chimano, 39. Chimmesyans,40; (Haeeltzuk),80; (Naass Indians), 130. Chin Indians, or Atnah, 1 5 ; or Nagailer, 1 78. Chinanteka, Cinacantequa, 40. Chinchaisuyu (Quichua), 159. Chinuk, 40, 217. Chippeways, 41, 21 7. Chiquitos, 45. Chiriguana (Guarani), 76, 163, 218. Chirupa (Maipure), 104. Chocha, 218. Chooo, Cholo, 47. Choctaw, 46, 218. Cholo, 47. Cholona (Peru), 162. Chondal, Woolwa, 48. Ghonos (Vuta), 198. Chopunish, or Sahaptin, 17J. Chorotega, 48. Chorti, 48. Chow-e-sbak, 48, 212. Chuohu (Moxa), 126. Chunos (Vnta), 198. Chunupies (VUela), 196. Chuntaquiros, 49, Chwachamaja, or Severnovskia, 170. Cinakantequa, or Chinanteka, 40. Cinaloa, 49. Clamets, or Lutuami, 100. Clatsop (Chinuk), 41. Cobeu, 49. Cooanas, Cocamas, Cocuannas, 49, 218. Cochimi, 49, 218. Chochitemi (Keres), 92. Cochiti (Pueblo Indians), 154. Coohnewagoes (Mohawk), 122. Cocknawaga, or Coohnewagoes (Mohawk), 122. Coco-maricopas, 50, 218. Coconoons (California), 37. Coconucos, 50. Cocopas, 51 ; (Yuma), 305. Coeurs d'Aleine, or Skitsuish (Flathead), 72. Colastukweck, or St. John's Indians, 165. Coluz (CaUfornlans^, 36. Comanches, 51, 318. Coraeya (California, San Diego), 26, 63. Conchas (Chickasaw), 39. Concho, 53. Conibos, 52. Copeh, 52. Cora, 53, 219. Cora (Waikur), 198. INDEX. 249 Corneilles, or Crows, 08. Coroados, or Coropos, 63. Coronado (Maiuas), 103. Coropos, or Coroados, 53. Correguajes, 53. Costa Eioa, 54. Costauos, 53. Coutanies, or Kutanae, 98. Covareca (Chiquitoa), 48. CowelitB, or Kawelitsk (Flathead), 73. Craikmouses (Botooudos), 67. Cran-ges (Ges), 75. Crans, or Timbiras, 187. Cree, or Knistenaux, 04. Creek, or Muskoghee, 127. Creole, 64, 219. Crows, 68. Ciichan, or Yuma, 205. Cuciijuia (Chiquitos), 46. CtOaau Cunny (Tehuelhet), 184. Cumana, 68, 219. Cumanagota (Tamanaque), 180. Cumsliawa, or Cumshewar (Queen Char- lotte's Island), 157; (Haidah), 80. Cunaouna, 69, 219, Curavea (Chiquitos), 46. Curetu, 59, CuTuminaoa (Chlquitos), 46. Cushna, 69. Cuzco (Quiohua), 158. Dahkotah, or Sioux, 59, 219. Darien, Dariel, 61, 220. Dauri (Guyana), 79. Delaware, or Lenni Lenape, 63, 220. Deguiuo (California), 26, 63, 220. Diegenoa, 26, 62, 220. Diggers (California), 26. Diggers of Napa Valley (California), 26. Diriaua (Chorotega), 48. Divihet (Puelches), 155. Djoe tongo (Creole), 56. Dogrib, 88. Dtinne, or Athapascan, 14. E Ecdemaohes, Eskelen, 68. Echeloota (Chinuk), 41. Eelikino (Sitka), 176. Ehatsar (Minetares), 119. Ehnek, 67. Eijiguaijegi, or Guaykuru, 78. Ekklemaohea (Eskelen), 68. Ele, 87. Enagiia (Omagua), 136. Enakaga (Guaykuru), 78. Enimaga, or Kochaboth (Guaykuru), T8. Engerekmung, or Botooudos, 87, Escoples, or Skofflos, 176. Eskelen, 68, 220. Eskimos, 69, 220. Eslenes, or Eskelen, 68. Etchemins, or St. John's Indiana (Abe- naki), 165, 221. Eudeve (Opata, Pima), 139, 149. Eall Indians, or Alaaar (Minetares), 119, Eilijayas (Texas Indians), 186. Elatbowa, or Kutanae, 98. Flatheads, 72, 221. Flathead (Atnah), 15. Florida Indians, or Timu.aca, 187. FoUaties, or Tuhwalatis, 202. Fox Islands, 74, 221. Foxes and Sacs, 165. Friendly Village, Mackenzie's (Haeeltzuk), 80. Fucu Strait, 74. Fuegians, or Pesoherai, 149. G Galibi (Caribs), 28. Galzanes, or Koltschanes, 06. Ge, Geiko, Ges, 74, 231. Geiko, Ge, or Ges, 74, 331. Gens de Pitffi (Shoahoues), 174. Ges, 74, 221. Gherins (Botooudos), 67. Gogoyans, or Cayugas, 83. Gorgotoquienses, 221. Greenlanders (Eskimo), 69. GrosTentre (Minetares), 119. Guaohire (Caribs), 28. Guaiour, or Waikur, 198. Guaiqueries (Caribs), 28. Guajiquero (Lenca), 100. Guambias (Coconucos), 60. Guanas, 75. Guaques, 75. Guarani, 75, 313, 239. Guarapuava, 323. Guarayi (Guarani), 75, Guarpes, Allentiac, Milcocayac, 77. Guasava, 77. Guatos, 77 ; Quato, 213, Guatusos, 322. Guaykuru, 78, 222. Guenoa, 79. Guentuae (Guaykuru), 78, 233. Guinau (Guyana), 70, Guyana, 70, 222. Guypunavi (Maipure), 104, H Haeeltzuk, 80. Hah-wal-ooes (Yuma), 206. KK 250 INDEX. Haidah, BO, 222. Hailtsa, or Haeeltzuk, 80. Haiti, 81. Hennega (Sitka), 176. H'hana (California), 36. Hiaqui, or Yaqui, 203, 34S. Hietaus, or Comanches, 51. Hitohittees, 81. Hoohelaga, 82. Hoeliungorah, or Winnebago, 800. Hoodsunhoo (Sitka), 176. Hoo-pah, 82. Horoje, or Winnebago, 200. Huachi, or Cliapafcura, 34. Huasteca, 82, 222. Hudson's Bay Indians, 83, 233. Hueco3 (Wacoes), 198. HuiUioheVuta (Araucans), 9, 197. Humurano Mainas, 103. Hurons, 84, 223. Huzzaws, or Osages, 139. laakema, or Wallawalla (Sabaptin), 170. Jaconaiga (Abipones), 2. labycos, or Ges, 74. lakons, 8.5. Japurin, or Yarura, 204. Idibae (Darien), 61. "* lemez (Pueblo Indians), 154. Jetans, or Comanobes, 51. Illinois, 86. Indiens ventrus (Crows), 58. Indiens du Sang, or Kahna (Blaokfeet), 19. Inganos, 86. Iniea (Caddoes), 35. Inkalit-Yugelnut (Kinai), 92. Inkilik (Kinai), 92. Inkiiluobliiats, 86, 323. Intibucas (Lenca), 100. loways, 80, 224. Ipas (Vilela), 196. Iquitos, 87. IrocLUois, 87, 224. Isistine (Lule), 100. Isleta (Pueblo Indians), 154. Issati (Sioux), 59. Isty-semole, or Seminoles, 169. Itapucuru (Brazilian), 213, Ite, Itenes, 88. Itonama, 68. luiadge (Guaykuru), 78. Juporooas (Botocudos), 67, 213. luriB, 89. Kaoobi, or Kachiquel, 89, 224. Kadjalt, 90, 324. Kalieten (Brazil), 30. Kahna (Blaokfeet), 19. Kake (Sitka), 176. Kallapuiah, or Yamkallie, 302. Kalcbaqui (Quichua), 159. Kalina, Kalinago (Caribs), 28. Kalisteno, or Knistenaux, 94. Kamakan (Menieng), 110. Kanas (Aymara), 16. Kancbis (Aymara), 16. Kangulit, or Inkiiliichliiat, 86. Kanzas, Kansas, 97. Kanze, or Konza, 97. Karaikas (Pescberai), 149. Karalits, or Greenlanders (Eskimo), 69, Karankas (Aymara), 16. Karina (Caribs), 28. Kai-itis, 335. Kasnas (Aymara), 16. Katabba, Catawba, 33. Kattanabaws (Minetare), 119. Kaveres (Maipure), 104. Kavasumsenk (Narraganset), 131. Kawelitsk (Flatbead), 73. Kawitcbes, 91. Keohi (California), 26; (Diegenos), 63. Kechua, or Quichua, 158. Keeohies, or Kiehais, 92. Keesarn (Queen Charlotte's Island), 157. Kemenetes (Pescberai), 149. Kenai, or Kinai, 92. Kenaize, or Kinai, 93. Kennekas (Pescberai), 149. Keres, 93, 154. Kettlefalls, or Soaiadpi, 73. Keyes, Keyus, or Kicbais, 92, 198. Kiehais, 93. Kiche, or Quiche, 157. Kigarnee (Queen Charlotte's Island), 157. Kikatsa (Crows), 58. Kikkapu, 92. Killamuks, or Nsietshawus (Flathead), 73. Killamuks (Lower), or lakons, 83. -Killisteno, or Knistenaux, 94. Kinai, 92, 225. King's Eiver Indians (California), 3fl, 63. Kinn Indians, Chinn, or Atuahs, 15. Kioways, 94. Kiriri, or Sabuja, 164, 225. Kiskapocoke (Shawanoes), 172. Kitunaha, or Kutanae, 98. Kiwomi, or Tihuex (Keree), 92, 187. Kizh (Kish), or San-GabrielVDiegenos), 63,237. ' Kliketats (Sahaptin), 170. Knistenaux, 94, 225. Koohaboth (Guaykuru), 78. Kokama (Omagua), 137. Kollaguaa (Aynxara), 18. Koltshanes, 96. Koluehes, 96, 225. Konages, or Kttdjak, 90. INDEX. 251 Konztt, 97, a-)S. Kooyou (Sitka), 170. Kristenaux, or Knisteuaux, 91. Kula-napo, 97, 313. Kuliiio, or Ciimano, 39, KuUespelm (Flathead), 73. Kunaguara (Caribs), 28. Kupeno (Moxa), 126. Kuskokwims, or Kusbkukchwakuiutes, 98. Katahba, or Catawba, 33. Kuskokwimjuts, 226. Kutauae, Kutneba, Kutani, 98. Kiitobin, 99, 226. Kwaiaatl (Flathead), 73. Kwalbioijua, or Tlatskanai (Tahkali), 179, 189. Kwenaiwitl (Flathead), 73. Kwigpak (Inkiiliicbliiat), 80. Kyganies, or Kigarnies (Haidab), 80. La Soledad (Diegenos), 63; see also ilut- suns, 233. Laguna (Pueblo Indians), 154. Lamaiio (Quicbua), 159. Lamissa, or Lamano, 109. Lapanas, or Lipans, 230. Laymon, 09. Lennl Lenape, or Delaware, 03. Leuoa, 99. Lipans, Lapanas, 230. Loucheux, or Kutchin, 99. Lupakas (Aymai'a), 10. Lule, 100. Lutuami, 100. M Macamecrom (Brazilian), 313. Machakalis (Brazilian), 213. Maokcnzies (Illinois), 80. Maconis, 101, 213. Maooa (Saliva), 106. Macoussies (Guyana), 79. Mag Readings, Indiana at (California), 37. Maha, 10], 226. Ma-ha-os (Youmas), 203. Mahikan, or Mohegan, 128. Maia, or Maya, 103. Mainas, 103. Maiongkong (Guyana), 79. Maipures, 104, 326. Makaw (Upper CaUfornia), 26. Makoby, 105. Malalis, 106, 313. Mame, Pokomam, 105, 237. Manaos, 105. Maudacaru (Brazilian), 313. Mandans, 106, 238. Manibas, or Baniwas, 17, 314. Manoas, or Manaos, 105. Manos de Perro ('lexns Indians), 180. Maopityan (Guyana), 70. Mapoje (Saliva), 166. Maqua, 100. Marabe (Pueblo Indiansj, 155. Maradi9os (Shoshonees), 174. Maramomisios, 338. Mai'opa fYuracare), 300. Mascbacaris, 107. Massachussetts Indians, 107, 338. Massit (Queen Charlotte's Island), 157. Mataguaya, 109. Mataras (Lule), 100. Matlazinga, 109. Mauvaia Monde (Dogrib), 66. Mawakwa (Guyana), 79. Maya, Maia, 102, 230. Mayorunas, 110. Mbaya, or Guaykuru, 78. Mechchaooh (Mohegans), 138. Mekos (Mexicans), 111. Menieng, 110. Menomoniea, 111. Mequachake (Shawanoea), 172. Mesealoa (Texas Indians), 180. Messisaugas, 111, 338. Mexicans, 111, 338._ Miami, 116. Micmac, MLkmak, 117, 330. ; Mije, 117. Milcocayac, Allentiao, Guarpea, 1 18, 2^10. MiHcite, 119. Minetares, 119. Minsi, Ministi (Delaware), 63, 120, 230. Miramichi (Micmac), 117. Miskito, or Mosquito, 195. Misteco,. or Mixteka, 130. Mitlantongo (Mixteka), 130. Blixe, or Mige, 117, 330. Mixteka, 130, 230. MobUians (Chickasaw), 39. Mobimi, 131.; Mochica (Yunga), 206. Mochono (Moxa), 120. Moooby, 121. Mooorosi, 123, 331. Mohavi, 122. Mohawks, 122, 231. Mohegans, 123, 331. Molele, or Waiilatpu, 199. Molopaque (Brazilian), 213. Moluches, or Araucans, 9. Mongoyoz, or Camacana, 27, 313. Monoas, or Manaos, 105. Monq^ui, or Waikur, 198. Mousonik (Knistenanx), 94. Montagnards, Mountaineers, 107. Montauka, 173. MorotoGO (Zamuca), 307. Mosotie (Moxa), 136. 253 INDEX. '"Mosquito, 125. Mountaineers, or Sheshatapoosh, 176, Moxa, Mossa, 136. Moyave, or Mohavi, 122. Mozka, or Muyska, 12S. Mucliquanh (Mohegans), 123. Muchojeones (Mossa), 138. Mucury (Brazilian), '313. Muhh^kanew Indians (Algonquin Mote- gan), 6, 123. Munseyi, or Minsi (Delaware), 63, 230. Mundruous, 127, 232. Muraa, 137. Muskoghee, 137, 233. Mutsuns, 232. Muturicus, or Mundruous, 137, 333. Muysoa, 138, 233. Mynoquesar, Myuckussar, 129. N Naass, 130. Nabadaches (Caddoes), 25. Nadowessies, Sioux, Dahkotahs, 59. Nagailer, or TacuUies, 178. Nagrandans (Chorotega), 48, 130, 332. Naguegtgaguehee (A.biponesJ, 2. Nak-nanouks (BotocudQs),^67. Nahuatl, or Mexican, 111. NamoUo (Tshuktshi), 191. Nandakoes (Caddoes), 2S. Nanticohe, Nantiooke, 130, 333. Narragansett, 131, -233. Nasqually, 73. Natohes, 132. Natik, Nadik (or Massachusetts Indians), 107. Nangatuck Indians (Pequot), 149. Navajos, 132, 333. Negro-Dutch (Creole), 56. Negro-English (Creole), 54. Negro-ITrench (Creole), 57. Negro-Portuguese"(Creole), 66. Negro-Spanish (Creole), S7. Nehethawa (Knistenaux), 94. Nenawehk (Knistenaux), 94. Netela, or San Juan Capistrano (Diegeno), 63, 237. Newfoundland, 133. New Brunswick (Mikmak), 117, 133, 233. New Granada, 233. Nez-Perces, or Sahaptin, 170. Nheengaibas (Brazilian), 213. Nihaloitih (CJiinuk), 41. Ningre (Creole), 54. Nipissing (Algonquin), 134. Nippegon, or Winnebagoa, 200. Niquirans, 134, Noana (California), 38. Norton Sound, 184. Nottoways, 135. Nova Scotia (Mikmak), 117. Nouros (Brazilians), 20. Naietshawus (Flathead), 73. Nuecos (misprint for " Hueoos "), or Wa- coes, 198; see also page 345. Nusdalum, 135. Nutka, 135, 333. Ocoles (Vilela), 196. Oje (Tamanaques), 180. Ojibois (Chippewayj, 41. Ojibways, or Chippeways, 41. Okanagan (Sahaptin), 170. Okanagan (Atnah), 15. Oktolaktos, or Otoes, 140. Olamentke, or Bodega, 20, 213. '^ Ol-hones (Costanos), 53. Omagua, 136. Omaha, or Maha, 101, 226. Oneida, 137, 233. Onondaga, 138, 234. Ontoampas (Vilela), 196. Opata, or Tequima, 139, 185. Opatoro (Lenca), 100. Oregones, 139. Orejones (Texas Indians), 186. Orelhudos (Oregones), 139. Oristine (Lule), 100. Orotinans (Chorotegans), 48. Osages, 139, 234. Osawsea, or Osages, 139, 334. Otchagras, or Winnebagos, 300. Othouez, or Otoes, 140. Otakapa, or Attakapas, 15. Oto, Otoes, 140, 234; (loways), 87. Otomi, 141, 234. Ottare ("Cherokees), 37. Ottawas, 143. Ottogami, Onthagamies, or Sacs, 165. Ottomacque, or Ottomaku, 148. Ottomaku, 143. Otuquis, 144. Ous, or Osages, 139. Oyampis, 144. Paoahuchea (Texas Ipdiana), 186. Pacaoa, Pacoas (Texas Indians^, 186. Pacasas (Aymara), 16. Pacaguara, 144. Paduca, or Comanche, 51. Paegana, or Piekana (Blaokfeet), 19. Pahoja (Otoes), 140. Pah-utah, or Chemehnevis, 85. Pajalates (Texaa Indians), 186. Paiconeca, 145. Paiure (Tamanaque), 180. Pakasas (Aymara), 16. Palaihui, Palaiks, 145. INDEX. 253 Palencas (Tamanaq^ue), 160. Pamanes (Texas Indians), 186. PamaCLues (Texas Indians), 186. Pampas (Puelohes), 155. Pampa del Sacramento (Peru), Pampopas (Texas Indians), 1B6. Pampticough, 143. Pani, or Pawnee, 147. Panos, 146. Papoloka, Popoluka, 153, Para (Brazilian), 213. Parechi (Tamanac^ues), 180. Pareni Parenes (Maipure), 104, 140. Pariagotos (Tamanaque), 180. Parias, (Tamanaque), 180. Pasaines (Vilela), 196. Passa (Peru), 162. Passamaquoddi (St. John's Indians), 165. Patachos, 146, 213. Patagonians, or Tehuelhet, 184. Paunaca (Paiconeca), 145. Paunch Indians (Crows), 58. Pawnees, 147, 235. Payaguas (Guaykuru), 78. Paycob-ges (Gea), 75. Pebas, 147. Pecos, or Yemes (Pueblo Indians), 154. Pehuenche (Araucans), 9. Pelas, or WaUawallas (Sahaptin), 170. Pend d'Oreilles, or Kullespelm (Flathead), 73. Penobscot, 147, 235. Pennsylvanians, 148, 235. Pequod (Narraganset), 131. Pequot, 149. Pescherai, 149. Petiguaren (Brazil), 20. Pianoghotto (Guyana), 79. Piaroas (Saliva), 166, Piankashaws, 149. Picaneux, or Piekans (Blackfeet), 19. Picori (Pueblos Indians), 154. Pieds noirs, or Blackfeet, 19. Piekans (Blackfeet), 19. Pihniques (Texas Indians), 186. Pikunehe, or Puelche (Araucans), 0. Pima, Pimo, 149, 235, Pina, 238, Pinaleiios (Apaches), 150. Pinols, or Pinaleiios, 150. Piquas (Shawanoes), 172, Pirinda, 151. Pii-o, 151, 236. Piros (Chuntaquiros), 49. Pisoous, or Piskwans (Flathead), 73. Pojuaque (Pueblo Indians), 154. Pojnate (Pueblo Indians), 154. Poko-mam (Mame), 105. Pokonchi, Poko-man, 151. PoUndaras (Coconucos), 50. Ponohas, Poncars (Maha), 101. Ponderays, or Kullespelm (Flathead), 73. Ponkata-ges (Ges), 75, Popoluca, Papoloka, 162, 236, Pottawatome, 153. Pouteotamis, or Pottawatome, 158, Powhattans, 153. Poyes, Poyus (Vuta-Huilliche), 198. Prince "William's Sound, 154. Puans, or Winnebagos, 200. Puctunc (Maia), 102. Pueblo Indians, Keres, 154, 236. Puelche, or Pikunehe (Araucans), 9, Puelches, 155. Puemaja (Yuma), 205, Puncaws, or Ponchas (Maha), 101 Puquini, 156. Pujunis (Sacramento Indians), 165. Purugotos (Caribs), 28. Purys, Paris, 166, 213. Quadus, 150. Quappas, 156. Quaquare (Ele), 67. Quaquas (Saliva), 166. Quato (Brazilian), 213 ; Guato, 77. Queen Charlotte's Island, 157. Quemaja, or Camoyes (Yusma, Cuchan), 205. Quengues, or Cayuga, 33. Queres, or Keres, 92, 154. Quiche, 157, 236. Quiehua, 158, 236. Quime, or Cochitemi (Keres), 92, Quintikuk (Narraganset), 181. Quito (Quiehua), 158. Quoddi, or Passamaquoddi (St. John's In- dians), 166, E Eadigeurs (Shoshonees), 174. Eicarae, Eiccarees, 163. Eiccarees, or Eicaras, 163, 237. Koamaino (Mainas), 103. Eo-rao-nans (Costanos), 63. Eoot-diggers (Shoshones), 174. Eucahee (Abipones), 2. Eumsen, Eunsienes, 163, 237; (see also under "Mutsuns," 232). s San Aldefonso (Pueblo Indians), 155. Santa Anna (Pueblo Indians), 156. San Antonio (Diegenos), 02. Santa Barbara, 167, 238. Santa Clara (Pueblo Indians), 165. San Diego (Diegenos), 62. San Domingo (Pueblo Indians), 155. 254 INDEX. San Felipe (Pueblo Indians), ISO. San Gabriel (Diegenos), 62, 237. Saint John's Indians, 165, 2.Sy. San Juan (Pueblo Indians) 155. San Juan Capistrano (Diegenos), 62, 237. San Luis Obispo, California (Diegenos), 62. San Miguel (Diegenos), 62. San Raphael (Diegenos), 62, 212. Sabuja, or Kiriri, 164. Sao Pedro (Brazilian)., 214. Sacramento Indians', 16.4. Upper Sacramento Indians (California and Sacramento), 27, 164. Sacs, Salii, Salcewi, 165. Sahaptin, or Sbahaptan, 1 70, ,237. Saki, 165. Saliva, 166. Samipaos (Texas Indians), 166. Samuca, or Zamuca, 207. Sanlcikani, 166. Sapibokoni, 168, 238. Sarabeca, 168. Saramacca (Creole), 56. Saste, or Silastics, 168: Satrabe, or Eiccarees, 163. Satsiltaa (Blackfeet)^ 19. Sauks, Sawkis, or Saki, 165. Sauteux (Cbippeway),.41. Savaneric, 168. Sehuak Cunny (Tehuelhet, 184. Sekumne (Sacrajnento Indians), 105. Selish, or Flatheads, 72. Seminoles, 169, 238. Seneca, 169, 238. Seris, or Ceris (Pima), 34, 150. Serpens, or Shoshones, 174. Serranos (Tehuelhet), 184. Setaba, or Passa (Quichua),-162. Severnovskia, 170, 212, 239. Shahaptan, 170. Shara, or Cbeyennes, 175. Sbasties, 168. Shawhays, or Cheyennes, 175. Shawanoe, 172, 238. Shebayi, 173, Sheshatapoosh, 176. Shushwapumsh (Tsihaili-Selish), Flat- heads, 73. Shinicooks, 173. Shoshouees, 174, 238. Shushwap (Flathead), 73. Shyennes, or Cheyennes, 175. Sicaunes (TacuUies), 178. Sjevernovtsi, Severnovskia, 239. SUla (Pueblo Indians;, 158. Similaton (Lenca), 100. Sinaloa, or Cinajoa, 49. Sioux, or Dahkotah, 59, 239. Sirionos (Guarani), 75. Sitka, Sitcha, 175, 239. Situga (Betoi),, 18. Sketapushoish, or Slcoifies, 176. Slcitsuish (Flathead), 73. Skittageets (Queen Charlotte's Island), 157. Skoffies, 176. Skwale (Flathead), 73. Slave Indians (Dogrib), 66, Smallrobes (Blaokfeet), 19. Snake Indians, or^Shoslinees, 174. Soaiatlpi (Flathead), 73. Soerigong (Guyana), 79. Sonora, 239. Souliers noirs (Crows), 58. Souriquois, 177. . Spokein (Flathead), 73. Squallyamish, 177, 239. Stickeen (Sitka), 176. Stone Indians, 177, 240. Sussee, Sursee, 178. T Tabalosa, 240. . . Tabayara (Brazilian), .213, Tacames (Texas Indians), 180. Tacana (Yuracare), 206. Tachies, or Inies (Caddoes), 2.">, TacuUies, or Tahkali, 178, 240. Tacunas, or Ticunas, 187. Tahkali, or TacuUies, 179. Tah-le-wah, 179. Talamanca (Costa Eioa), 54. Talatui, 180. Taluhet (Puelohes), 155. Tamanaque, TamanaM, 180j ^40. Tamoiae, Tamoj-os (Brazil), 21, 213. Taos (Pueblo Indians), 155. Taparita (Ottomakn), 143. Tapiguae (Brazil), 21. Tapiis (Chiquitos), 46. Tappen (Brazil), 20. Tarahumara, 181, 240. Tarasca, 182, 241. Tariana, 183. Tarnma (Guyana), 79. Tatimolo (Totonaka), 190. Tatiquilhati (Totonaka), 190. Taural (Guyana), 79. Tchekto (Tschnlrtchi), 191. Tchinkitane, 241. Tchnagmjutes, or Kuskokwlqis, 0-!. Teho-ko-yem, 184, 212., Tchuktchi (Aglegmute's), 3, 191. Tecunas, or Ticunas, 18'7. Teguas, or Tiluex (Keres), 187. Tehama (California), 26. Tehuetches ('Puelohes), 155. Tehuelhet, 184, 241. Tehuel Cunny (Tehuelhet), l8J, Tepeguana, 185, 241. INDEX. 255 Tepozkolnla (Mixteka), 120. Tequima, or Opata, 139, 185. Terre neuve Island (Mikmak), 117. Tesuque (PueWo Indians), 155. Tetons, 186. Texas Indians, 186, 241. Thing-e-ha-dtinne, or Dogrib, 66. Tiberacotti (Guyana), 79. TicoriUas, erroneously for " Jicarillas," 186, 241. Ticonas, or Ticunas, 187. Tihuex, 92, 187. Tikomeri (Moxa), 126. Tikuna, or Chimano, 39. Timbiras, 187, 213, 241. Timuaca, 187, 242. Timuicana, or Timuaca, 187, 243. Tinne, or Athapasca, 14. Tinqua, 188. Tiverighotto (Guyana), 79. Tlahiako (Mixteka), 120. Tlakatat, or Kliketat (Sahaptin), 170. Tlamatl, or Lutuami, 100. Tlaoquatch, Tloquatch, 188. Tlapaneka, 189. Tlascaltecas, 189, 242. Tlatsap (Chiuukl, 41. Tlatskanai (Talikali), 179, 189. Tnaitia, or Kinai, 93. Toba, or Mocoby, 121. Tokantin (Omagua), 137. Tokistine (Lule), 100. Tolteks (Mexican), 111. Tonocote (Lule), 100. Toon-paooh (Mohegans), 123. Totonaca, 190, 242. Tsakaitsitlin (Spokein, Flathead), 73. Tsamak (Sacramento Indians), 165. Tschinkitans (Kolusches), 96. Tshinuk (Chinuk), 41. Tsbnagmjutes, or Kuskokwims, 98. Tshugatshi, 191. ^ Tshuktshi, 191, 242. Tsihaili-Selish (Wathead), 73. Ttynai, or Kinai, 92. Tuapoka (Caribe), 38. Tubar, 192, 243. Tncano, 192. Tuouman, 243. Tuounas, or Ticunus, 187. Tuhwalati (Yamkallie), 202. Tulare Lake Indians (Califomians, 26. Tulareiia, 243. Tu-lo-mos (Costanos), 53. Tumgarsee (Sitka), 176. Tummimloi (Brazil), 21. Tunghase, 192. Tuolumne (CaUfomians), 27, 313. Tnpis, or Brazilians, 20. Tupinabft, Tubinamba (Brazil), 20, 213. Tupininiiuins (Brazil), 21, 213. Tuscarora, 192, 243. Tzendales, 193. u Uainambeu, 194. Uara-Mukuru (Tamanaque), 180. Uaraea-Paccili (Tamanaque), 180. Uchee, 194. Ugalentsi, Ugalenzi, 194, 243. Ugaljaohmutzi (Kinai), 93 ; see also un- der "Ugalentsi," 243. UkaMpu, or Kilikapu, 92. Umpqua, or Tahkali, 179, 198, 244. Unalashka, 196, 244. Unalachtgo (Delaware), 63. Unami (Delaware), 68. Unohagog (Shinicooks), 173. Upsaroka (Crows), 58. Urabae (Darien), 6]. Uruquenas (Brazilian), 214. Utah, 196, 244. Utagami, or Sacs and Foxes, 165. Utlateca, 244. Valientes (Costa Eica), 54. Venados (Texas Indians), 186. Vaela, 196. Virginians, 197, 244. Vuta-Huilliche, 197. w Waccoa, or Wokkons, 201. Wacaway, or Accaway, 2, Wacoes, 198 (ought to be "Huecos," 244). Wahtani, or Mandans, 106. Wahtohtana, or Otoes, 140. Wahtoktak, or Otoes, 140. Waicuri, Waikur, 198, 245. Waiilatpu, 199. Waiyamara (Guyana), 79. Wakaikama (Chinukj, 41. Wakash, or Nutka, 135. WaUawalla (Sahaptins), 170. Wanami (Delaware), 63. Wapanachki, or Abenaki, 1. Wapisiana (Guyana), 79. Wapisian-Parauana (Guyana), 79. Warau (Guyana), 79. Warrows, 199. Washas, or Osages, 139. Watlala fChinuk), 41. Wawah, 6r Osages, 139. Weas, 245. Wee-yot, 200. Weits-pek, 200. Willamet (YamkalUe), 202. 256 INDEX. WilletpooB (WaiUatpu), 199. Winnebagos, 200. Wish-osk, 201. Witohitas, 201, 215. Wocoons, Wokkons, 201, 245. Woolwa, Chondal. 48. Woyawai (Guyana), 79. Wyandota, or Hurons, 84, 223. Xumanaa (Brazilian), 213. Yaoana-Cunny (Tehuelhet), 184. Yaguaa, 203. Yakanaku, or Pescherai, 149. Yakema, or loakema (Sahaptin), 171. Yameos, 203. Yamkallie, 202. Yam-pai-o (Yttma), 205. Yankitlan (Mixteka), 120. Yanktons, Yanktonans, 203. Yaoi(Caribs),28. Yaiiui, 4-9, 203, 245. Yarura, 204, 245. Yeconoampaa (Vilela), 96. Yete (Omagna), 137. Ypapana (Totonaka), 190. Yucuatl, orNutka, 135. Yugelnut (Kinai), inatead of Ingelmut, Yukai, 205, 212. Yule, 205. Yumaa, 205. Yunga, 206. Yunka-Mochika (Ynnga), 206., Yuracarea, 206. Yuris, or luris, 89. Yurimagua (Omagna), 136. Zecapula, Zapoteca, 246. Zacateeas, 246. Zamuca, 207, 246. Zapari, 20.7. Zapoteca, 207, 246. Zeona, 208. Zoe (Cinaloa), 49. Zoque, 209. Zufii (Pueblo Indians), 154. Zutugil (Kaohiquel), 89. THE END. London, Printed by Thomas Harrild, 11. Salisbury Square. l?ieet Street. EKEATA. I'AOB LINS ■ 2 add to AcOAWAT, "Wacawoyo." 5 40 for Dares read Davies. 6 10 for Langue read Tongue. 7 14 for Gruarpos read Gruarpes. 8 8 for puellos read pueblos. 8 10 /or Atnapascanreaii Athapascan. 8 11 for Tinalenos read Pinalenos. 10 32 after 6 Tols. insert Folio. 11 3 after pp. 330 insert This edition is without the " Vocabulario aque se anada la Doctrina Christiana." 11 19 after 6 vols, insert Folio. - 12 22 Arda, after Doctrina Christiana, etc., insert This language being entirely unknown, the Lord's Prayer is given from the above book. 12 5 from the bottom, for Vol. II read Vol. III. 14 18 for TicoriUas read JicarUlas. 16 33 disconnect the words " New edition, enlarged (by D. de Gualdo?)" from the title to which they are attached, and connect them with the subse- quent title, line 34, to which they belong. 17 23 for Isanno read Isauna. 28 24 for Purugotos read Purugotes. 32 10 for Kutahba read Katahba. 33 14 for Q.ueugues read Quengues. 35 head-hne and hnes 4 and 8, for Chemehnevi read Cheme- huevi. 36 26 for Ticorilla read JicariUa. 37 28 for 914 read 415. 45 17 for L'Ance read I'Anse. 50 29 for Nuevo read Nueva. 52 14 for Putor read Putos. 52 19 for Najarit read Nayarit. 54 10 for KonigHohen read Kaiser- lichen. 55 23 for Page 117 read Page 88 of Vol. I. 55 24 for 1 vol. read 2 vols. 57 32 for Dominque read Domiugue. 58 2 for en la langue read en langue. 58 3 after Fran9aise3 insert Par M. Gtoux. F\QE LINE 59 9 from the bottom,yorNadowessier read Nadowessies. 61 3 transpose after line 4. 61 lastlme,/o-rUrabaorea(iUrabae. 62 26 & 35, for Boscara read Boscana. 64 32 add " The Gennan original was pubUshed at Barby, 1789, in 8vo." 67 14 for Ququaro read Quaquaro. 67 article Ele, insert after Gihi, " Balbi Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 647." 67 18 for Amores read Aymores. 67 13 from the bottom, /or plain read simple. 68 Last line, for Sutel. read Sutil. 69 2 for pays de read paso del. 69 3 for nordeste read noroeste. 69 16 for Karalis read KaraUt. 70 29 for a voyage read a second voy- 70 30 for 1821 read 1824, 70 30 after 4to add pp. 559—569. 70 42 for Schubert read Schubart. 70 43 for Index read Register. 71 18 for Hehnesen read Helmerseu. 74 9 for Aleutan read Aleutian. 75 30 for Guararo read Guarano. 75 31 for Chiviguana read Chiriguana. 76 34 for Fullah read Foulah. 79 16/brTamanaken readTamanaean, 80 34 for Camshava read Cmushawa. 81 24 for Chatahsochee read Chata- hoochee. 86 20 for IntiiliiehMate read Initl' , luchliiat, OMd omit Eangjuht, 86 22 for Eskimo read Kenai. 86 27 & 28, dele from Kwigpak to 512, and read Vocabulary of theln^ kUiks proper and of .the Inka^ Hts-Yugelnut, pp. 481 — 487. 87 5 for Iowa read loway. 87 6 for Otae read Otoe. 87 7 for Iowa Mission read loway and Sac Mission Press. 89 after luris insert JicariUas. (See under " TicoriUas " in the Addenda.) 90 14 for du read de. 90 29 for Eobeck read Robet. 258 ERRATA. PAOE LINE 91 11 for (I'lle read de Tile. 91 31 ^or Kawitschenre(2(^ Kawitches. 92 3 for Tiguex read Tihuex. 93 2 for distinguishes four read fiii'- nishes Tocabularies of two. 93 3 dele among which are, and for InkaHt, and Ingehnut read. I nkalit- Yugelnut. 93 27 /or Inkilit, lukalit, and Ingel- mut read Inkilit and Inkaht- Yugehiut. 94 24 for Moon read Moons. 95 40 for Caultere read Carlton. 96 11 for and read or. 98 4 & 18 for Tchwagmjates read Tshuagmjutes. 98 V for Kuskokwina read Kuskok- wim. 100 15 for Isifline read Isistine. 100 24 for IV read III. 103 5 from the bottom, for Kingdom read Kingdon. 104 4 for Maranou read Maranon. 104 17 for Avanoe, Kayere, read Avane, Cavere. 104 IS/brGruypunaToereatZGuipunaTe. 106 26 for TJpsasoke read Upsaroka. 113 35 for 1855 read 1555. 114 11 for propiedad read propriedad. 114 12 /or Biblioteca read Bibhotheca. 114 IQ for Catredratioo read Cathe- dratico. 114 17 for Sacalo read Sacado. 117 9 from the bottom,/or Terre neiive Island read Newfoundland. 118 29 dele Mikokayak — (an en-or of Jiilg's, corrected in Ilia errata) . 122 6 for the read a. 125 8 dele Columbus, May, 1787, pp. 672. 130 2 from the bottom, for Murray Vans read Vans Murray. 136 7 for anno read ano. 136 9 for nordeste read noroeste. 138 16 for Porst read Fort. 140 5 from the bottom, /or Winnepago and Otoe Dialects read Winne- bago Dialect. 140 6 for E<>vet read Koret. 141 2 after Indians insert to. 143 13 for Ottowwaws read Ottawwaws. 148 29 for 198 read 19, y. 149 11 for Kamenetes read Kemenetes. 150 14 for 161, 162 read 461, 462. faqb line 152 12 for T. read J. 152 15 for Hues read Hues. 153 12 & 26, /or Pottawatame read Pot- tawatome. 158 3 after Antigua dele tlie comma. 158 38 for Manle read Maule. 159 3 for Tubaman read Tucuman. 160 27 & 28, for exploracioni read ex- plorazioni. 163 15 for Nueco read Hueco. 163 20 for AchastUers read Achasthans. 163 26 for anno read ano. 164 6 for Achasthers repiTAchastlians. 170 21 for you read yon. 170 26 & 29, for Chwachamaja read Chwachamaju. 171 21 for Choatat read Khiatat. 175 2 from the bottom, for Archipel read Archipelago. 176 6 for Eclikino read Eelikino. 176 7 for Kooyen read Kooyou. 176 ih for Massaohusett read Massa- chusetts. 17S 11 for Saskatchewaine read Sas- katchewan. 180 13 after Aoherekotti insert Avari- kotti. ISO 30 after Paria insert a semicolon. 182 24 for Gu'olamo read Jeronimo. 185 24 for Grirolamo read Jeronimo. 186 16&29,/orTicoriUasread JicariEas. 187 8 for 'i'iluex read Tihuex. 190 9 for Caja read Baja. 191 2 for Kadjah Islands read Kadjak Island. 191 11 for Tschuktchi read Tchuktchi. 191 12 for western read eastern. 191 15 for WUd read Nomade. 191 16 for Tchouktschee read Tchoukt- chee. 191 24. for 407, 408 read 467, 468. 192 7 for 3 read 2. 193 29 for Document read Documents. 195 19 for TicoriUa read JicariEa. 197 34 for Vuta, Huilliche read Vuta- HuUhche. 198 9 & 15, for Nueco read Hueco. 199 7 for T. read S. 201 5 for BoUom read Boilvin ; and insert commas after Boilvin and after Cass. 202 18 for Kallapuiah read Kalapuiah, 202 28 for 9 read q. 204 9 for 3 read 2. London : Printed by Thomas Hai-rild, 11, Salisljury Square, Fleet Street.